2010 honda pilot owner's manual

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in theinstrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preservesyour investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind thatyour dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems uniqueto your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will bepleased to answer any questions and concerns.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2010 Honda Pilot was a wise investment.It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

i

０９／０３／１３　１５：２６：１３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０００２　

2010 Pilot

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.

Event Data Recorders

This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone elseexcept as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The datacan be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It mayalso be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.

Introduction

WARNING:

This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. Thesedevices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failureof any airbag system component.

ii

０９／０３／１３　１５：２６：１７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０００３　

2010 Pilot

－

－

－－

－

－

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .These signal words mean:

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

on the vehicle.Safety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety SectionInstructions

Safety Labels

A Few Words About Safety

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

iii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

０９／０３／１３　１５：２６：２７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０００４　

2010 Pilot

These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a highcenter of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have asignificantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantlymore likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wearseat belts.

For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page of this manual and thesection on page . Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in loss of

control or an accident.

Your Pilot has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher groundclearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and roughterrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.

449410

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

Important Handling Information

iv

０９／０３／１３　１５：２６：３２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０００５　

2010 Pilot

(fluid capacities and tire pressures)

(main controls)

(seat belts, SRS, and child protection)

(indicators, gauges, multi-information display, dashboard, and steering column)

(climate control, audio, steering wheel, rear entertainment, security, cruise control, and HomeLink )

(fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading)

(engine and transmission operation)

(minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)

(flat tire, jump starting, overheating, and fuses)

(vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)

(warranty and contact information)

(how to order)

Contents

................................................................................................................................................Index . I

Service Information Summary

...............................................................................................Your Vehicle at a Glance . 3

............................................................Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

.......Instruments and Controls . 65

..Features . 191

.......................................................................Before Driving . 393

.........................................................................................Driving . 409

.................................................Maintenance . 453

........................................Taking Care of the Unexpected . 507

..............................................Technical Information . 535..................Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) . 553

..................................................................................Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) . 557

1

０９／０３／１３　１５：２６：４１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０００６　

00X31-SZA-6100 © American Honda Motor Co., Inc. - All Rights Reserved

2010 Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual

2010 Pilot

Owner's Identification Form

A convenient reference to thesections in this manual.

A quick reference to the maincontrols in your vehicle.

Explains the purpose of eachinstrument panel indicator and gauge,and how to use the controls on thedashboard and steering column.

What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to loadluggage and other cargo.

The proper way to start the engine,shift the transmission, and park; pluswhat you need to know if you’replanning to tow a trailer.

ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,and technical information.

Important information about theproper use and care of your vehicle’sseat belts, an overview of thesupplemental restraint system, andvaluable information on how toprotect children with child restraints.

How to operate the climate controlsystem, the audio system, rearentertainment system, and otherconvenience features.

The maintenance minder shows youwhen you need to take your vehicleto the dealer for maintenance service.There is also a list of things to checkand instructions on how to checkthem.

This section covers several problemsmotorists sometimes experience,and details how to handle them.

A summary of the warrantiescovering your new vehicle, and howto contact us for any reason. Refer toyour warranty manual for detailedinformation.

A summary of the information youneed when you pull up to the fuelpump.

How to order manuals and othertechnical literature.

Contents

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Driver and Passenger Safety

Instruments and Controls

Features

Before Driving

Driving

Maintenance

Technical Information

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Warranty and CustomerRelations(U.S. and Canada only)


Index

Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

Overview of Contents

2

０９／０３／１３　１５：２６：５７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０００７　

2010 Pilot

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

CONTINUED: If equipped

Your Vehicle at a GlanceY

ourV

ehicleata

Glance

3

GAUGES

INSTRUMENT PANELINDICATORS

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

MIRROR CONTROLAUTO BUTTON

PARKING BRAKEPEDAL

PASSENGER’SFRONT AIRBAG

DRIVER’S FRONTAIRBAG

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE HEADPHONE

CONNECTORS

AUDIO SYSTEM

DRIVING POSITIONMEMORY SYSTEM

PARKING BRAKERELEASE HANDLE

MOONROOF SWITCH HomeLink BUTTONS

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKET

Vehicle with navigation system is shown.

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE

REAR CLIMATECONTROL SYSTEM

REAR HEATING/COOLING CONTROLS

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLSCLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

GLASS HATCHRELEASE BUTTON/POWER TAILGATESWITCH

(P.11, 29)

(P.173)

(P.169)

(P.138)

(P.165)

(P.395)

(P.145)(P.397) (P.169) AUXILIARY INPUT

JACKS (P.347) (P.348) (P.186)

(P.204)

(P.197)

(P.413)

(P.199)

(P.192)

(P.208)

(P.11, 29)

(P.170)(P.357)(P.168)(P.67)

(P.82)

０９／０３／１３　１５：２７：０７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０００８　

2010 Pilot

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊＊＊

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.If equipped

1 :2 :3 :4 : 4WD models only

Your Vehicle at a Glance

4

HORN

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON


GLASS HATCH RELEASE BUTTON/POWER TAILGATE SWITCH

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASEHANDLE


POWER DOOR LOCK MASTERSWITCH

MIRROR CONTROLS

DRIVING POSITION MEMORYSYSTEM

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSISTSYSTEM OFF SWITCH

PARKING SENSOR SYSTEMSWITCH

HEADLIGHT/TURN SIGNAL/FRONT FOG LIGHTS

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS

(P.361)

PARKING BRAKE RELEASEHANDLE

VOICE CONTROLBUTTONS

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR

VTM-4 LOCKBUTTON


SEAT HEATERSWITCHES

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

MULTI-INFORMATIONBUTTONS

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER/HEATEDMIRROR BUTTON

(P.126)

(P.432)

(P.386)

(P.173)

(P.171)

(P.138)

(P.165)

(P.395)

(P.145)

(P.169)(P.133) (P.87)

(P.350)

(P.164)

(P.186)

(P.130, 172)

(P.418)

(P.124)

(P.36)

(P.130)(P.311)BLUETOOTHHANDSFREELINK SYSTEMVOICE CONTROL BUTTONS

13

3

3

3

3

2

4

3

3

3

3

０９／０３／２３　１４：１４：３２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０００９　

2010 Pilot

－

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 8

.......................................Seat Belts . 9.........................................Airbags . 11

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 15............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 16

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 165. Fasten and Position the

.............................Seat Belts . 176. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 19.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 20...Additional Safety Precautions . 21

Additional Information About.......................Your Seat Belts . 22

..Seat Belt System Components . 22......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 23

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 24

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 25Additional Information About

...........................Your Airbags . 26......Airbag System Components . 26

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 29

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 32How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 34..How the SRS Indicator Works . 35

How The Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 35

How the Passenger Airbag...............Off Indicator Works . 36

.............................Airbag Service . 37...Additional Safety Precautions . 37

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 39

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 39

All Children Should Sit in a.................................Back Seat . 40

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 40

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 42

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 42

...Additional Safety Precautions . 43Protecting Infants and

.........................Small Children . 44.......................Protecting Infants . 44

.........Protecting Small Children . 45.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 47....................Installing a Child Seat . 48

...............................With LATCH . 49.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 53

..............................With a Tether . 54...........Protecting Larger Children . 57

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 57..................Using a Booster Seat . 58

When Can a Larger Child Sit in.........................................Front . 59

...Additional Safety Precautions . 60.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 61

...................................Safety Labels . 62

Driver and Passenger SafetyD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

5

０９／０３／１３　１５：２７：２１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００１０　

2010 Pilot

－

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat, not the front seat. Infants andsmall children should be restrainedin a child seat. Larger childrenshould use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder belt until they can use thebelt properly without a booster seat(see pages ).

17

39 60

Important Safety Precautions

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Don’t Drink and Drive

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Restrain All Children

6

０９／０３／１３　１５：２７：２８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００１１　

2010 Pilot

Engaging in mobile phoneconversation or other activities thatkeep you from paying close attentionto the road, other vehicles andpedestrians could lead to a crash.Remember, situations can changequickly, and only you can decidewhen it is safe to divert attentionaway from driving.

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).496


Pay Appropriate Attention to theTask of Driving Safely

Control Your Speed Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

7

０９／０３／１３　１５：２７：３４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００１２　

2010 Pilot

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment, front and rear crushzones, a collapsible steering column,and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting inthe correct position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wearyour seat belts

8

(7)

(9)(3)

(1)

(2)(6)

(10)(8)

(5)

(2)

(11)

(4)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(11) Door Locks

０９／０３／１３　１５：２７：４１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００１３　

2010 Pilot

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument paneland a beeper to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces and territoriesrequire you to wear seat belts.

CONTINUED

Seat Belts


Why Wear Seat Belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

9

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

０９／０３／１３　１５：２７：４８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００１４　

2010 Pilot

－－－－

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including:

frontal impactsside impactsrear impactsrollovers

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wearyour seat belt, and make sure youwear it properly.


What you should do:

10

０９／０３／１３　１５：２７：５４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００１５　

2010 Pilot

CONTINUED

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).

In addition, your vehicle has sidecurtain airbags to help protect theheads of the driver, front passenger,and passengers in the outer rearseating positions during a moderateto severe side impact or rollover (seepage for more information on howyour side curtain airbags work).

29

32

34


Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

11

０９／０３／１３　１５：２８：０１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００１６　

2010 Pilot

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force. Sowhile airbags help save lives, theycan cause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.


Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

What you should do:

12

０９／０３／１３　１５：２８：０８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００１７　

2010 Pilot

－

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adultpassengers, and teenage childrenwho are large enough and matureenough to drive or ride in the front.

See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors and thetailgate are closed and locked.

Your vehicle also has a tailgate, glasshatch, and door open indicator onthe multi-information display toindicate when the tailgate, the glasshatch, or a specific door is open. Youwill see the appropriate indicator(s)and message(s) for each condition.

Your vehicle has a door-open indicator on the

instrument panel to indicate whenany door is open.

Your vehicle also has atailgate, glass hatch, and

door open indicator on theinformation display to indicate whenthe tailgate, the glass hatch, or aspecific door is open. You will seethe appropriate indicator(s) for eachcondition.

When one or more doors are open,the ‘‘DOOR OPEN’’ message willcome on.

39 60

CONTINUED

On Touring modelsExcept Touring modelsIntroduction

Close and Lock the Doors1.

Protecting Adults and TeensD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

13

０９／０３／１３　１５：２８：１８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００１８　

2010 Pilot

Locking the doors, the glass hatch,and the tailgate reduces the chanceof someone being thrown out of thevehicle during a crash, and it helpsprevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door, theglass hatch, or the tailgate andfalling out.

Locking the doors, the glass hatchand the tailgate also helps prevent anoutsider from unexpectedly openinga door, the glass hatch, or thetailgate when you come to a stop.When the glass hatch, tailgate, and

one or more doors are open, the‘‘DOOR, HATCH & TAILGATEOPEN’’ message will come on.

When the glass hatch, the tailgate,or both glass hatch and tailgate areopen, the ‘‘HATCH OPEN,’’‘‘TAILGATE OPEN,’’ or ‘‘HATCH &TAILGATE OPEN’’ message willcome on.

This vehicle has auto door locking/unlocking features. See page forhow to set them.

This vehicle has auto door locking/unlocking features. See pages

and for how to set them.

139

116 117

Except Touring models

On Touring models

Protecting Adults and Teens

14

０９／０３／１３　１５：２８：２５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００１９　

2010 Pilot

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel up and down, and inand out (see page ).

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

See page for how to adjust afront seat (power adjustment) andpage for a manual adjustment.

133

154

155

On vehicles with manual adjustableseats


Adjust the Front Seats2.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

15

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

０９／０３／１３　１５：２８：３３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００２０　

2010 Pilot

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe center of the back of your headrests against the center of therestraint.

Have passengers adjust their headrestraints properly as well. Tallerpersons should adjust their restraintas high as possible.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

See page for how to adjust themanual adjustable seat-back, andpage for the power adjustableseat-back.

155

154


Adjust the Head RestraintsAdjust the Seat-Backs 4.3.

16

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

０９／０３／１３　１５：２８：４２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００２１　

2010 Pilot

CONTINUED

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints and how the driver’sand front passenger’s active headrestraints work.

The center seating position in thesecond row and all third row seatshave a detachable seat belt that canbe unlatched and retracted into theceiling to allow the seats to be foldeddown. See page for how tounlatch and relatch a belt.

Detachable seat belts shouldnormally be latched whenever theseat-backs are in an upright position.See page for how to unlatch abelt, and page for how to relatcha belt.

157

162

162163


Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

17

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

０９／０３／１３　１５：２８：５１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００２２　

2010 Pilot

The front seats and second row seatshave adjustable seat belt anchors. Toadjust the height of an anchor,squeeze the two release buttons, andslide the anchor up or down asneeded (it has four positions).

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.

This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.


18

RELEASE BUTTON

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

０９／０３／１３　１５：２８：５７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００２３　

2010 Pilot

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and head restraints, andput on their seat belts, it is veryimportant that they continue to situpright, well back in their seats, withtheir feet on the floor, until thevehicle is safely parked and theengine is off.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

If a seat belt does not seem to workproperly, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

22


Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

19

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

０９／０３／１３　１５：２９：０４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００２４　

2010 Pilot

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.


Advice for Pregnant Women

20

０９／０３／１３　１５：２９：１０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００２５　

2010 Pilot

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

A passenger who is notwearing a seat belt during a crashor emergency stop can be thrownagainst the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out ofthe vehicle.


Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe belt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.


Additional Safety PrecautionsNever let passengers ride in thecargo area or on top of a folded-down back seat.

Passengers should not stand up orchange seats while the vehicle ismoving.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

21

０９／０３／１３　１５：２９：１８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００２６　

2010 Pilot

This system uses the same sensorsas the front airbags to monitorwhether the front seat belts arelatched or unlatched, and how muchweight is on the front passenger’sseat (see pages and ).

If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.

This system monitors the front seatbelts. If you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position before yourseat belt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. Ifyour seat belt is not fastened beforethe beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all seating positions.The front seat belts are alsoequipped with automatic seat belttensioners.

When no one is sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat, or a child or smalladult is riding there, the indicatorshould not come on and the beepershould not sound.

You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEATBELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGERSEAT BELT’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

31 32

95

On Touring models

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System Components

22

０９／０３／１３　１５：２９：２６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００２７　

2010 Pilot

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat (see page ).

The lap/shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

If the indicator comes on or thebeeper sounds when the driver’s seatbelt is latched and there is no frontseat passenger and no items on thefront seat, something may beinterfering with the monitoringsystem. Look for and remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any object(s) hanging on the seator in the seat-back pocket.

Any object(s) touching the rear ofthe seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer.

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockableretractor will activate. The belt willretract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockable retractor,unlatch the buckle and let the seatbelt fully retract. To refasten theseat belt, pull it out only as far asneeded.

17

53

CONTINUED


Lap/Shoulder Belt

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

23

０９／０３／１３　１５：２９：３６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００２８　

2010 Pilot

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in position.

The tensioners are designed toactivate in any collision severeenough to cause the front airbags todeploy, or if a sensor detects yourvehicle is about to roll over (see page

).

The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theextra tension in the seat belt couldbe helpful.

If a side curtain airbag deploysduring a side impact, the tensioneron that side of the vehicle will alsodeploy.

The lap/shoulder belts in the centerseat of the second row and both ofthe third row seats are equipped witha detachable anchor that has twoparts: a small latch plate and abuckle.

The detachable seat belt shouldnormally be latched whenever theseat-backs are in an upright position.For more information about thedetachable seat belt, see page .

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled.

162

34

do not deploy

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners


24

DETACHABLE ANCHOR

０９／０３／１３　１５：２９：４５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００２９　

2010 Pilot

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully, and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

Honda provides a limited warrantyon seat belts. See your

booklet fordetails.

490

HondaWarranty Information


Seat Belt Maintenance

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

25

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

０９／０３／１３　１５：２９：５１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００３０　

2010 Pilot

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag System Components

26

(5)(3)

(2)(9)

(1)

(6)

(4)

(5)

(10)

(11)

(7)

(4)(8)

(12)

(1) Driver’s Front Airbag(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag(3) Control Unit/Rollover Sensor(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors(8) Side Impact Sensors (First)(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator(10) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors(11) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors Control Unit/

OPDS Sensors Control Unit(12) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator

０９／０３／１３　１５：２９：５６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００３１　

2010 Pilot

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceilingabove the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

).

Your Airbag System includes:

29

32

34

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

27

(13)

(16)

(15)

(14)

(13) Front Impact Sensors(14) Rear Safing Sensor(15) Side Impact Sensors (Second)(16) Side Curtain Airbags

０９／０３／１３　１５：３０：０２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００３２　

2010 Pilot

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page ).

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. If the weight is about 65 lbs(29 kg) or less (the weight of aninfant or small child), thepassenger’s front airbag will beturned off (see page ).

A rollover sensor that can detect ifyour vehicle is about to roll overand signal the control unit todeploy both side curtain airbagsand front seat belt tensioners (seepage ).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact,side impact, or if your vehicle isabout to rollover.

Sensors that can detect whether achild is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and signal the controlunit to turn the airbag off (seepage ).

Sensors that can detect whetherthe driver’s seat belt and the frontpassenger’s seat belt are latchedor unlatched (see page ).

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).

24

33

22

31

31

34

35

35

36


28

０９／０３／１３　１５：３０：１２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００３３　

2010 Pilot

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will inflatethe driver’s and front passenger’sairbags, at the time and with theforce needed.

Only the driver’s airbag can deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

36

CONTINUED

How Your Front Airbags Work


riverand

Passenger

Safety

29

０９／０３／１３　１５：３０：２１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００３４　

2010 Pilot

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whethersensors detect the occupant iswearing a seat belt or not.

If the occupant’s belt is , theairbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.

Dual-Threshold Airbags

latched

Dual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe

not latched


30

０９／０３／１３　１５：３０：２９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００３５　

2010 Pilot

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to children or smallstatured adults who ride in front.

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although Hondadoes not encourage carrying aninfant or small child in front, if thesensors detect the weight of aninfant or small child (up to about 65lbs or 29 kg), the system willautomatically turn the passenger’sfront airbag off.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any objects or metal itemsunder the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

CONTINUED


Advanced Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

31

DRIVER’SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR

PASSENGER’SSEATWEIGHTSENSOR

０９／０３／１６　１４：０７：３２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００３６　

2010 Pilot

Be aware that objects placed on thepassenger’s seat can also cause theairbag to be turned off.

When the passenger airbag getsturned off by the weight sensors, a‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator inthe center of the dashboard comeson (see page ).If the weight sensors detect there isno passenger in the front seat, theairbag is automatically turned off.However, the passenger airbag offindicator in this situation will notcome on.To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

A second-row passenger pushingor pulling on the back of the frontpassenger’s seat.

Moving the front seat forciblyback against cargo on the seat orfloor behind it.

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

Moving the front passenger’s seator seat-back forcibly back againstthe folded right-side second-rowseat.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, sensors willdetect rapid acceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

Second-row passengers should notwedge objects or intentionallyforce their feet under the frontpassenger seat.

Also, make sure the floor mat behindthe front passenger’s seat is hookedto the floor mat anchor (see page

). If it is not, the mat mayinterfere with the proper operationof the sensors and operation of theseat.

36

491

How Your Side Airbags Work


do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

32

０９／０３／１３　１５：３０：４８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００３７　

2010 Pilot

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoffsystem designed primarily to protecta child riding in the front passenger’sseat.

If the side airbag off indicator comeson (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in front, if theposition sensors detect a child hasleaned into the side airbag’sdeployment path, the airbag will shutoff.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or another object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

35Side Airbag Cutoff System


riverand

Passenger

Safety

33

０９／０３／１３　１５：３０：５６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００３８　

2010 Pilot

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid accelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag and activate the seat belttensioner on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

If the rollover sensor detects yourvehicle is about to roll over, it signalsthe control unit, which immediatelydeploys both side curtain airbags andactivates both front seat belttensioners.

The airbag on the passenger’s sidewill deploy, and the seat belttensioner will activate, even if thereare no passengers on that side of thevehicle.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

In a Side Impact

In a Rollover


34

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

０９／０３／１３　１５：３１：０４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００３９　

2010 Pilot

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on briefly then goes off. Thistells you the system is workingproperly.

This indicatoralerts you that the

passenger’s side airbag has beenautomatically shut off. It doesmean there is a problem with yourside airbags.

The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your airbags or seat belttensioners.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the indicatorshould come on briefly and then gooff (see page ). If it doesn’t comeon, stays on, or comes on whiledriving without a passenger in thefront seat, have the system checked.

You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGERSIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKAIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.

95

72

95

On Touring models

On Touring models How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works

How the SRS Indicator Works

not


riverand

Passenger

Safety

35

U.S. Canada

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

０９／０３／１３　１５：３１：１６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００４０　

2010 Pilot

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less(the weight of an infant or smallchild) on the front passenger’s seat.It does there is a problemwith the airbag.

Be aware that objects placed on thefront seat can cause the indicator tocome on.

If no weight is detected on the frontseat, the airbag will be automaticallyshut off. However, the indicator willnot come on.

The passenger airbag off indicatormay come on and off repeatedly ifthe total weight on the seat is nearthe airbag cutoff threshold.

If an adult or teenage passenger isriding in front, move the seat as farto the rear as possible, and have thepassenger sit upright and wear theseat belt properly.

If the indicator comes on with nofront seat passenger and no objectson the seat, or with an adult ridingthere, something may be interferingwith the weight sensors. Look forand remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any object(s) hanging on the seator in the seat-back pocket.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer assoon as possible.

Any object(s), such as a folded-down back seat, that are touchingthe rear of the seat-back.

How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

not mean


36

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

CanadaU.S.

０９／０３／１３　１５：３１：２６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００４１　

2010 Pilot

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Anyseat belt tensioner that activatesmust also be replaced.

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by an authorized dealer ora knowledgeable body shop.

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

If water oranother liquid soaks into a seat-back, it can prevent the side airbagcutoff system from workingproperly.

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor, the frontpassenger’s weight sensors, thefront seat belt tensioners, and allseat belts and their anchors wornduring a crash to make sure theyare operating properly.

CONTINUED

Airbag Service Additional Safety Precautions

An airbag ever inflates.

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

Do not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not expose the front passenger’sseat-back to liquid.

If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.


riverand

Passenger

Safety

37

０９／０３／１３　１５：３１：３４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００４２　

2010 Pilot

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact HondaAutomobile Customer Service at(800) 999-1009.


Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.

38

０９／０３／１３　１５：３１：３６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００４３　

2010 Pilot

－

－－

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state,Canadian province and territoryrequires that infants and children beproperly restrained when they ride ina vehicle.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof death of children age 12 andunder.

44 5657 60

properly

Protecting Children General Guidelines

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

39

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

０９／０３／１３　１５：３１：４４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００４４　

2010 Pilot

－

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt. (See page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren.)

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenaged 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat. Somestates have laws restricting wherechildren may ride.

Children who ride in the back areless likely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

Even though your vehicle has anadvanced front airbag system thatautomatically turns the passenger’sfront airbag off under certaincircumstances (see page ), pleasefollow these guidelines:

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

36

57

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat


Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

Infants

40

０９／０３／１３　１５：３１：５４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００４５　

2010 Pilot

－

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

U.S. Models

Canadian Models

Protecting Children General GuidelinesD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

41

DASHBOARD

SUN VISORS

SUN VISORS

０９／０３／１３　１５：３２：０７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００４６　

2010 Pilot

－

Your vehicle has two rows of backseats where children can be properlyrestrained. If you ever have to carrya group of children, and a child mustride in front:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or a small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visual contact,we strongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in a backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

57

15

19

17

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

If a Child Requires CloseAttention


42

０９／０３／１３　１５：３２：１５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００４７　

2010 Pilot

－

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.

If a child wraps a looseseat belt around their neck, theycan be seriously or fatally injured.(See pages and for how toactivate and deactivate thelockable retractor.)


This can preventchildren from accidentally fallingout (see page ).

Children who play invehicles can accidentally gettrapped inside. Teach yourchildren not to play in or aroundvehicles.

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the tailgate orthe glass hatch, which can lead toaccidental injury or death.

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates, and Canadian provinces/territories, and can be veryhazardous.

144

53 54


Additional Safety PrecautionsNever hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Make sure any unused seat beltthat a child can reach is buckled,the lockable retractor is activated,and the belt is fully retracted andlocked.

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Use the childproof door locks toprevent children from opening therear doors.

Lock all doors, the tailgate and theglass hatch when your vehicle isnot in use.

Keep vehicle keys/remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

43

０９／０３／１３　１５：３２：２４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００４８　

2010 Pilot

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat, and the child is at leastone year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

When properly installed in thesecond row, a rear-facing child seatmay prevent the driver or a frontpassenger from moving their seat asfar back as recommended, or fromlocking their seat-back in the desiredposition.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front.

It could also interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.

Rear-facing Child Seat Placement

44

０９／０３／１３　１５：３２：３３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００４９　

2010 Pilot

CONTINUED

In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat directly behind thefront passenger’s seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

Many states, Canadian provinces andterritories allow a child one year ofage or older who also meets theminimum size and weightrequirements to transition from arear-facing child seat to a forwardfacing seat. Know the requirementswhere you are driving and follow thechild seat instructions. Many expertsrecommend use of a rear-facing seatup to age two, if the child’s height

and weight are appropriate for arear-facing seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

We also recommend that a smallchild use the child seat until the childreaches the weight or height limitfor the seat.


Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

45

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

０９／０３／１３　１５：３２：４０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００５０　

2010 Pilot

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

Even with advanced front airbagsthat automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

36


Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.

46

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

０９／０３／１３　１５：３２：４６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００５１　

2010 Pilot

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren (LATCH) system.

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the rear seatingpositions.

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS 213 or CMVSS213 on the box.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position or positionswhere the seat will be used.

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meetFederal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213 or Canadian MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

1.

2.

3.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

47

０９／０３／１３　１５：３２：５４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００５２　

2010 Pilot

After selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-sidemovement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for rear-facing child seats.Properly secure the child seat to

the vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

Secure the child in the child seat.

1.

2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat

48

０９／０３／１３　１５：３３：００　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００５３　

2010 Pilot

CONTINUED

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat in either outer second row seat:

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren) at each of thesecond row seats and the passenger’sside third row seat.

When you install a child seat in thesecond row seating position, use thelower anchors as shown in theillustration. You can install up tothree child seats at a time withLATCH.

Do not attach two child seatconnectors to a single lower anchorat a time.

You can find lower anchors in theslits in the seat-backs.

The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

1.

2.

Installing a Child Seat withLATCH


Using the Outer LATCH

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

49

LOWER ANCHORS

MARKS

０９／０３／１３　１５：３３：１０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００５４　

2010 Pilot

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Lift the head restraint (see page), then route the tether strap

through the legs of the headrestraint and over the seat-back,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

Other LATCH-compatible seatshave a flexible-type connector asshown above.

3.

4.

5.157


50

RIGID TYPE FLEXIBLE TYPE

TETHER STRAP

０９／０３／１３　１５：３３：１８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００５５　

2010 Pilot

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchor, then tighten thestrap as instructed by the childseat maker.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat in the center seating position onthe second row seat, use the centerlower anchors as shown above.

Follow step 1 through 4 asdescribed previously to secure thechild seat.

Lower the head restraint first.Route the tether strap over thehead restraint and seat-back, thenattach the tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.


Unlatch the detachable seat beltanchor latch and retract the seatbelt all the way into the ceiling.Place the latch plate and anchorlatch in their holding slots (seepage ).

6.

7.

2.

3.

4.

1.

162CONTINUED

Using the Center LATCH

Installing a Child SeatD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

51

０９／０３／１３　１５：３３：２６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００５６　

2010 Pilot

The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat in the passenger’s side seatingposition of the third row:

Unlatch the detachable seat beltanchor latch and retract the seatbelt all the way into the passenger’sside panel. Place the latch plateand anchor latch in their holdingslots (see page ).

Follow steps 1 through 4 of thesecond row installation on pages

and .

You can find lower anchors in theslits in the seat-backs.

Lower the head restraint first.Route the tether strap over thehead restraint and seat-back, thenattach the tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted.


1.

2.

3.

4.

163

49 50


52

LOWER ANCHORS

０９／０３／１３　１５：３３：３４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００５７　

2010 Pilot

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle and remove any slack fromthe lap portion of the belt.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

If you intend to install a child seat inthe center seating position of thesecond row or in the third row, makesure the detachable seat belt issecurely latched (see page ).

1. 2.

3.

163

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt


riverand

Passenger

Safety

53

０９／０３／１３　１５：３３：４２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００５８　

2010 Pilot

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe second or third row.

To deactivate the lockable retractorand remove a child seat, unlatch thebuckle, unroute the seat belt, and letthe belt fully retract.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

4. 5.

Installing a Child Seat with aTether


54

０９／０３／１３　１５：３３：５０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００５９　

2010 Pilot

Each second row seat has a tetheranchorage point behind the seat-back.

For the center seat, lower the headrestraint, then route the tether strapover the head restraint and seat-back.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), lift the headrestraint, then route the tetherstrap over the seat-back andthrough the head restraint legs.

1.53

CONTINUED

Second Row Installation


riverand

Passenger

Safety

55

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT

TETHER STRAP

Outer Seating Position

０９／０３／１３　１５：３３：５７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００６０　

2010 Pilot

Route the tether strap over thehead restraint, then attach thetether strap hook to the anchor,making sure the strap is nottwisted.Tighten the strap according to the

seat maker’s instructions.

Attach the tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the tetherstrap is not twisted.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

Each third row seat has a tetheranchorage point behind the seat-back.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), lower the headrestraint.

1.

2.

3.

2.

3.53

Third Row Installation


56

０９／０３／１３　１５：３４：０６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００６１　

2010 Pilot

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear the lap/shoulder belt.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Larger ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

57

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

０９／０３／１３　１５：３４：１３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００６２　

2010 Pilot

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-

facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster seat meetsfederal safety standards (see page

) and that you follow the boosterseat maker’s instructions.

Some states, Canadian provinces andterritories also require children touse a booster seat until they reach agiven age or weight (e.g., 6 years or60 lbs). Be sure to check currentlaws in the states, provinces andterritories where you intend to drive.

3.

4.

5.

47

Using a Booster Seat

Protecting Larger Children

58

０９／０３／１３　１５：３４：２１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００６３　

2010 Pilot

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster seat, the child should not sitin front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

17 57

CONTINUED

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront

Physical Size

Maturity

Protecting Larger ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

59

０９／０３／１３　１５：３４：３０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００６４　

2010 Pilot

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.


Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.

Protecting Larger Children

60

０９／０３／１３　１５：３４：３９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００６５　

2010 Pilot

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. Carbonmonoxide should not enter thevehicle in normal driving if youmaintain your vehicle properly andfollow the information on this page.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

With the tailgate/glass hatch open,airflow can pull exhaust gas into yourvehicle’s interior and create ahazardous condition. If you mustdrive with the tailgate/glass hatchopen, open all the windows and setthe heating and cooling system/climate control system as shownbelow.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the heatingand cooling system/climate controlsystem as follows:

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.The vehicle was in a collision thatmay have damaged the underside.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide HazardD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

61

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

０９／０３／１３　１５：３４：４８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００６６　

2010 Pilot

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury or death. Read these labelscarefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read (except for the U.S.dashboard label which may beremoved by the owner), contact yourdealer for a replacement.

U.S. models only

Safety Labels

62

RADIATOR CAP

DASHBOARD

BATTERY LABEL

０９／０３／１３　１５：３４：５６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００６７　

2010 Pilot

U.S. models

Canadian models

Canadian modelsU.S. models

U.S. models

Safety LabelsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

63

SUN VISOR DOORJAMBS

０９／０３／１３　１５：３５：１１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００６８　

2010 Pilot

64

０９／０３／１３　１５：３５：１４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００６９　

2010 Pilot

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 66

............................Instrument Panel . 67..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 69

.............................................Gauges . 82.............Multi-Information Display . 87

Controls Near the Steering.........................................Wheel . 123

Windshield Wipers and.................................Washers . 124

Rear Window Wiper and...................................Washer . 125

.........Turn Signal and Headlights . 126...............Hazard Warning Button . 130...............Rear Window Defogger . 130

......Instrument Panel Brightness . 131........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 133

.............................Keys and Locks . 134......................Immobilizer System . 135

..............................Ignition Switch . 137....................................Door Locks . 138

............Childproof Door Locks . 144.............Tailgate and Glass Hatch . 144

..........................Power Tailgate . 145.....................Remote Transmitter . 150

...............................................Seats . 154...................Detachable Anchor . 162

..................................Seat Heaters . 164

............................Power Windows . 165.......................................Moonroof . 168

...............................Parking Brake . 169...........................................Mirrors . 170

Driving Position Memory........................................System . 173

...............................Interior Lights . 176.........Interior Convenience Items . 179

.........................Center Console . 180.......Console Compartments . 180

.....................Beverage Holders . 181..............Storage Compartment . 182

..................................Glove Box . 183..............Integrated Sunshades . 183

....................Sunglasses Holder . 183................Conversation Mirror . 184

...................................Sun Visor . 184............................Vanity Mirror . 185

................................Coat Hooks . 185.......................Seat Under Tray . 185

........Accessory Power Sockets . 186.......................AC Power Outlet . 187

.............................Cargo Hooks . 188Cargo Floor Storage

........................Compartment . 188..................................Cargo Net . 189

Instruments and ControlsInstrum

entsand

Controls

65

０９／０３／１３　１５：３５：１８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００７０　

2010 Pilot

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

: If equipped

Control Locations

66


POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

HEADPHONECONNECTORS

INSTRUMENT PANELINDICATORSGAUGES


DRIVER’S FRONTAIRBAG

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE

MOONROOF SWITCH HomeLink BUTTONS MIRROR CONTROLAUTO BUTTON

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

REAR HEATING/COOLING CONTROLS

AUDIO SYSTEM

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

REAR CLIMATECONTROL SYSTEM

PARKING BRAKEPEDAL


PARKING BRAKERELEASE HANDLE

DRIVING POSITIONMEMORY SYSTEM

GLASS HATCHRELEASE BUTTON/POWER TAILGATESWITCH

AUXILIARY INPUTJACKS

(P.11, 29)

(P.173)

(P.169)

(P.138)

(P.165)

(P.395)

(P.145) HOOD RELEASEHANDLE (P.397) (P.169) (P.186) (P.347) (P.348)

(P.204)

(P.197)

(P.413)

(P.199)

(P.192)

(P.208)

(P.170)(P.357)(P.168)(P.67)

(P.82)

０９／０３／１３　１５：３５：２７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００７１　

2010 Pilot

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

4WD models onlyIf equipped1 :

2 :

Instrument PanelLX, EX, and EX-L models

Instruments

andC

ontrols

67

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKESYSTEM INDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDERINDICATOR

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) INDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

FOG LIGHTINDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR

VTM-4 INDICATOR

LIGHT CONTROL INDICATOR

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS INDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

FUEL ECONOMY INDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR

LOW TIRE PRESSURE INDICATOR

INFORMATION DISPLAY

VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)SYSTEM INDICATOR

A/T TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

STARTER SYSTEM INDICATOR

DOOR-OPEN INDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMINDICATOR

MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR (P.77)

(P.70)

(P.70)

(P.77)

(P.79)

(P.79)

(P.70)

(P.79)

(P.76)

(P.73)

(P.73)

(P.78)

(P.74)

(P.83)(P.75)

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.81)

WASHER LEVEL INDICATOR (P.80)

LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.80)

(P.79)(P.72)

(P.69)

(P.71)

(P.78)

(P.78)

(P.72)

(P.78)

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.78)

(P.75)

(P.78)

(P.72)

1

2

2

1

０９／０３／１３　１５：３５：３８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００７２　

2010 Pilot

＊

＊

＊

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.: 4WD models only

Instrument PanelTouring models

68

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

CRUISE MAIN INDICATORFOG LIGHTINDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKESYSTEM INDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDERINDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEMINDICATOR

DOOR-OPEN INDICATOR

MESSAGE INDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR

VTM-4 INDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

FUEL ECONOMY INDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR

MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATIONINDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST(VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR

LOW TIRE PRESSUREINDICATOR

A/T TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

(P.70)

(P.77)

(P.70)

(P.70)

(P.79)

(P.76)

(P.74)

(P.73)

(P.73)

(P.78)

(P.87) (P.81)

(P.77)

(P.79)

(P.80)

(P.72)

(P.69)

(P.71)

(P.78)

(P.78)

(P.72)

(P.78)

(P.78)

(P.78)

(P.72)

０９／０３／１３　１５：３５：４８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００７３　

2010 Pilot

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle. This indicator comes on when you

turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. It reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.A beeper also sounds if you have notfastened your seat belt.

If your front passenger does notfasten their seat belt, the indicatorcomes on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

If either of you do not fasten yourseat belt while driving, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals. For moreinformation, see page .

You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEATBELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGERSEAT BELT’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

For more information, see page .

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belt, the beeper sounds,and the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belt before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

22

95

22

On Touring models

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

Instrument Panel IndicatorsInstrum

entsand

Controls

69

０９／０３／１３　１５：３５：５５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００７４　

2010 Pilot

The engine can be severelydamaged if this indicator flashesor stays on when the engine isrunning. For more information,see page .

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ messageon the multi-information display(see page ).

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKCHARGING SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

For more information, see page.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKEMISSION SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ). For more information, seepage .

521

95

521

95

522

95522

On Touring models

On Touring models

On Touring models

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Instrument Panel Indicators

70

０９／０３／１３　１５：３６：０４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００７５　

2010 Pilot

This indicator has two functions:

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. A beepersounds if you drive with theparking brake not fully released.Driving with the parking brake notfully released can damage thebrakes and tires.

You will also see a ‘‘RELEASEPARKING BRAKE’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

If it remains on after you havefully released the parking brakewhile the engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For more information, seepage .

You will also see a ‘‘LOW BRAKEFLUID’’ or ‘‘CHECK BRAKESYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

1.

2.

95

523

95

On Touring models

On Touring models


Parking Brakeand BrakeSystemIndicator (Red)

Instruments

andC

ontrols

71

U.S. Canada

０９／０３／１３　１５：３６：１０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００７６　

2010 Pilot

This indicator comes on for severalseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates a potential problem withyour front airbags. This indicator willalso alert you to a potential problemwith your side airbags, passenger’sside airbag automatic cutoff system,side curtain airbags, automatic seatbelt tensioners, driver’s seat positionsensor, or the front passenger’sweight sensors. For moreinformation, see page .

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKAIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

This indicator comes on for severalseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates that the passenger’s sideairbag has automatically shut off.For more information, see page .

This indicator normally comes onfor a few seconds when you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position, and when the ignitionswitch is turned to the START(III) position. If it comes on at anyother time, there is a problem withthe ABS. If this happens, haveyour vehicle checked at a dealer.With this indicator on, yourvehicle still has normal brakingability but no anti-lock function.For more information, see page

.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABSSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page

).

You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGERSIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).35

95

35

95 429

95

On Touring models On Touring models

On Touring models

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) IndicatorSide Airbag Off

Indicator


72

U.S. Canada

０９／０３／１３　１５：３６：２０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００７７　

2010 Pilot

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. For more information, seepage .

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSASYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page

).

This indicator has three functions:

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If an indicator does not blinkor blinks rapidly, it usually meansone of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see page ). Replacethe bulb as soon as possible, sinceother drivers cannot see that you aresignaling.

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsand all turn signals on the outside ofthe vehicle flash.

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, or if it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, there is aproblem with the VSA or Hill StartAssist systems. Take your vehicle toa dealer to have it checked. WithoutVSA, your vehicle still has normaldriving ability, but will not have VSAtraction and stability enhancement.See page for more informationon the VSA system.

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA or Hill StartAssist systems.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSASYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

1.

2.

3.431

95

431

431

95

484

On Touring modelsOn Touring models


Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

VSA Activation Indicator Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Instruments

andC

ontrols

73

０９／０３／１３　１５：３６：３２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００７８　

2010 Pilot


This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on while driving,it indicates that one or more of yourvehicle’s tires are significantly lowon pressure.

If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost the pressure, and determinethe cause. If it is because of a flat tire,replace the flat tire with the compactspare (see page ), and have theflat tire repaired as soon as possible.If two or more tires are underinflated,call a professional towing service(see page ). For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator has two functions:

If it comes on while driving, itindicates that one or more of yourvehicle’s tires are significantly lowon pressure.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TIREPRESSURE’’ message on themulti-information display (seepage ).

Check the tire pressure monitoron the multi-information displayand determine the cause (see page

).

If this happens, pull to the sideof the road when it is safe,check which tire has lostpressure on the multi-information display, anddetermine the cause. If it isbecause of a flat tire, have theflat tire repaired as soon aspossible. If two or more tires areunderinflated, call a professionaltowing service. For moreinformation, see page .

1.

508

420

96

424

531

531

On Touring modelsExcept Touring models


Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator

Low Tire PressureIndicator

74

０９／０５／２５　０９：５５：００　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００７９　

2010 Pilot

This indicator comes on when thereis a problem with the starter system.For more information, see page .

If you see a ‘‘CHECK STARTERSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display, there is aproblem with the starter system (seepage ).

If this indicator begins to flash,there is a problem with the tirepressure monitoring system(TPMS). You will also see a‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay. The indicator continues toflash for a while (approximately 1minute), then stays on. If thishappens, have your dealer checkthe system as soon as possible.For more information, see page

.


If this indicator comes on and stayson at any other time, or if it does notcome on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, thereis a problem with the TPMS. Withthis indicator on, the low tirepressure indicator and the tirepressure monitor will not come onwhen a tire loses pressure. Take thevehicle to your dealer to have thesystem checked.

2.

426

411

96

On Touring models

Except Touring modelsExcept Touring models


Starter SystemIndicator

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

75

U.S. Canada

０９／０３／１３　１５：３６：４９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００８０　

2010 Pilot

This indicator monitors thetemperature of the automatictransmission fluid. It should come onfor a few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on while driving,it means the transmission fluidtemperature is too high. Pull to theside of the road when it is safe, shiftto Park, and let the engine idle untilthe indicator goes out.

You will also see an ‘‘A/T TEMPHIGH’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).96

4WD models only

On 4WD Touring models


A/T TemperatureIndicator

76

Continuing to drive with the A/Ttemperature indicator on may causeserious damage to the transmission.

０９／０３／１３　１５：３６：５５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００８１　

2010 Pilot

This indicator comes on when thereis a system message on the multi-information display. Press the INFObutton on the steering wheel (seepage ) to see the message (seepage ).

Most of the time, this indicatorcomes on along with other indicatorsin the instrument panel such as theseat belt reminder indicator, SRSindicator, VSA system indicator, etc.

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Itreminds you that it is time to takeyour vehicle in for scheduledmaintenance. The maintenance mainitems and sub items will be displayedin the information display. See page

for more information on themaintenance minder.

This indicator goes off when yourdealer resets it after completing therequired maintenance service.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on at any othertime, there is a problem in the 4WDsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer to have it checked.

If the indicator blinks while driving,the VTM-4 fluid temperature is toohigh. Pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, shift to Park, and letthe engine idle until the indicatorgoes out.

455

8794

Except Touring models On Touring models 4WD models only

Message IndicatorMaintenance MinderIndicator

VTM-4 Indicator


entsand

Controls

77

Continuing to drive with the VTM-4indicator blinking may cause seriousdamage to the system.

０９／０３／１３　１５：３７：０４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００８２　

2010 Pilot

This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control system bypressing the CRUISE button (seepage ).

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. This indicatorwill also come on when the lightswitch is in AUTO and the lightsturn on automatically. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the LOCK (0) position withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will remain on. A reminderchime will also sound when you openthe driver’s door.

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly codedignition key. If it is not a properlycoded key, the indicator will blink,and the engine’s fuel system will bedisabled (see page ).

This indicator comes on when youturn on the fog lights. For moreinformation, see page .

135

128

126

350

350Except LX models

Cruise Control Indicator

Cruise Main Indicator

High Beam Indicator

Fog Light Indicator

Lights On IndicatorImmobilizer SystemIndicator


78

０９／０３／１３　１５：３７：１５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００８３　

2010 Pilot

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on at any othertime, there is a problem with theautomatic lighting control system.Have your vehicle checked by yourdealer as soon as possible.

If you see a ‘‘CHECK LIGHTCONTROL SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display, thereis a problem with the automaticheadlight control system. Take yourvehicle to a dealer to have it checked.

If this indicator comes on when theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position and the parking brake isreleased, it means there is a problemin the high beam headlight’s circuit.Have your vehicle checked by yourdealer.

If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRLSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display, there is aproblem with the daytime runninglight system. Take your vehicle to adealer to have it checked.

While the engine is operating in itsmost economical range, thisindicator may come on and stay on.It goes off when your vehicle usesextra fuel.

This indicator comes on if any dooris not closed tightly.


Except Touring models Except Touring models

Light Control Indicator Daytime Running LightsIndicator

Door-open Indicator

Fuel Economy Indicator


entsand

Controls

79

０９／０３／１３　１５：３７：２４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００８４　

2010 Pilot

This indicator comes on as areminder that you must refuel soon.

You will see a ‘‘LOW WASHERFLUID’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

You will also see a ‘‘LOW FUEL’’message on the multi-informationdisplay.This indicator comes on when the

washer fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this indicatorcome on (see page ).

When the indicator comes on, thereare about 2.9 U.S. gal (10.8 ) of fuelremaining in the tank.

When the needle reaches E, there isa very small amount of fuel in thetank.

477

96


On Touring models

On Touring modelsLow Fuel IndicatorWasher Level Indicator


80

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

０９／０３／１３　１５：３７：３１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００８５　

2010 Pilot

This indicator comes on when thesecurity system is set. See page

for more information on thesecurity system.

Your vehicle has a door, glass hatch,and tailgate open indicator on theinformation display. If any door(s),the glass hatch, or the tailgate is notclosed tightly, the appropriate light/lights will come on to remind you toclose the tailgate, the glass hatch orthe door(s).

The door, glass hatch, and tailgateopen indicator appears on the multi-information display (see page ).

This indicator is displayed as thesystem message on the multi-information display (see page ).

The appropriate tire indicator willcome on along with the low tirepressure indicator if a tire issignificantly underinflated or hassuddenly lost pressure. See

for what todo if this indicator comes on.

349

13

424

Except LX modelsExcept Touring models

On Touring models

On Touring models


Security System Indicator Door, Glass Hatch, and TailgateOpen Indicator

Tire Pressure Monitor

LowTire Pressure Indicator


entsand

Controls

81


０９／０３／１３　１５：３７：４１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００８６　

2010 Pilot

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should rise toabout the middle of the gauge. Insevere driving conditions, the pointermay rise to the upper zone. If itreaches the red (hot) mark, pullsafely to the side of the road. Forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem, see page .

This shows how much fuel youhave. It may show slightly moreor less than the actual amount.

519

Gauges

Temperature Gauge

Fuel Gauge

82

U.S. model is shown.

SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE

TEMPERATURE GAUGETACHOMETER

INFORMATION DISPLAYSELECT/RESET KNOB

SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE

TEMPERATURE GAUGE

SELECT/RESET KNOB

Touring models


TACHOMETER

MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

０９／０３／１３　１５：３７：５１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００８７　

2010 Pilot

The odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures miles in U.S.models and kilometers in Canadianmodels. It is illegal under U.S.federal law and Canadian provincial/territorial regulations to disconnect,reset, or alter the odometer with theintent to change the number of milesor kilometers indicated.

To switch the display, press andrelease the select/reset knobrepeatedly. When you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, your last selection isdisplayed.

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays by pressing the select/resetknob repeatedly.Each trip meter works independently,so you can keep track of twodifferent distances.To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the select/resetknob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.

For information about the multi-information display, see page .

The information display shows theodometer, trip meter, engine oil life,outside temperature (if equipped),instant fuel economy, average fueleconomy, range (estimated distance),and maintenance item code(s).

87

On Touring models


Odometer

Information Display

Trip Meter

GaugesInstrum

entsand

Controls

83

INFORMATION DISPLAY

TRIP METER A

OUTSIDETEMPERATUREINDICATOR

U.S. model with outside temperature indicator is shown.

ODOMETER

RANGE

ENGINEOIL LIFE

TRIP METER B

INSTANT FUEL ECONOMY

SELECT/RESET KNOB

AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY

０９／０３／１３　１５：３８：０２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００８８　

2010 Pilot

When either of the trip meters (tripA or B) is displayed, your vehicle’saverage fuel economy since you lastreset that trip meter can be shownon the information display (mpg onU.S. models and l/100 km onCanadian models). This number isupdated once per 10 seconds. To seethe average fuel economy, press andrelease the select/reset knobrepeatedly.

When you reset a trip meter, theaverage fuel economy for that tripmeter also resets.

This display shows the estimateddistance you can travel on the fuelremaining in the tank.

This distance is estimated from thefuel economy you have achievedover the last few miles (kilometers),so it will vary with changes in speed,traffic condition, etc.

This display shows the instant fueleconomy you are getting.

It shows the number of mpg (U.S.)or l/100 km (Canada).

Range (Estimated Distance)Instant Fuel Economy Average Fuel Economy

Gauges

84

０９／０３／１３　１５：３８：０９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００８９　

2010 Pilot

± ±

－－－－－－－－

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

If the outside temperature isincorrectly displayed, you can adjustit up to 5°F in U.S. models ( 3°Cin Canadian models) warmer orcooler.

The temperature must bestabilized before doing thisprocedure.

To adjust the outside temperatureindicator, press and hold the select/reset knob for 10 seconds. Thefollowing sequence will appear for 1second each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 5, 4,

3, 2, 1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2, 3,3, 2, 1, 0 (Canada).

When the temperature reaches thedesired value, release the select/reset knob. You should see the newoutside temperature displayed.

This indicator displays the outsidetemperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.models) or Celsius (Canadianmodels).

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. The temperaturereading can be affected by heatreflection from the road surface,engine heat, and the exhaust fromsurrounding traffic. This can causean incorrect temperature readingwhen your vehicle speed is under19 mph (30 km/h). When you startyour trip, the sensor is not fullyacclimatized, therefore it may takeseveral minutes until the propertemperature is displayed.

Except LX models

Gauges

Outside Temperature Indicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

85

NOTE:

０９／０３／１３　１５：３８：１６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００９０　

2010 Pilot

The information display in theinstrument panel shows you theengine oil life and maintenanceservice items when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position. Thisinformation helps to keep you awareof the periodic maintenance yourvehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving. Refer to page formore information.

Your vehicle’s onboard diagnosticsystem will detect a loose or missingfuel fill cap as an evaporative systemleak. The first time a leak is detecteda ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messageappears on the information display.

Turn the engine off, and confirm thefuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosenit, then retighten it until it clicks atleast once. The message should gooff after several days of normaldriving once you tighten or replacethe fuel fill cap. To scroll to anotherdisplay, press the select/reset knob.

The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messagewill appear each time you restart theengine until the system turns themessage off.

If the system still detects a leak inyour vehicle’s evaporative emissionssystem, the malfunction indicatorlamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fillcap was not already tightened, turnthe engine off, and check orretighten the fuel fill cap until itclicks at least once. The MIL shouldgo off after several days of normaldriving once the cap is tightened orreplaced. If the MIL does not go off,have your vehicle inspected by adealer. For more information, seepage .

455

522

Gauges

Maintenance Minder Check Fuel Cap Message

86

０９／０３／１３　１５：３８：２２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００９１　

2010 Pilot

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

To change the display, press theINFO ( / ) button on the steeringwheel repeatedly until the mainmenu appears (see page ).

With the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, the multi-informationdisplay changes as shown on thenext page each time you press theINFO ( / ) button or the SEL/RESET button.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, your lastselection is displayed.

In the multi-information display, thesystem message is also displayed(see page ) and you cancustomize your vehicle controlsettings (see page ).

The multi-information display in theinstrument panel displays variousinformation and messages when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position. Some of the messages helpyou operate your vehicle morecomfortably. Others help to keepyou aware of the periodicmaintenance your vehicle needs forcontinued trouble-free driving.

You can also change the display bypressing the select/reset knob in theinstrument panel.

When you open the driver’s door, a‘‘Welcome’’ message is shown on themulti-information display.

88

94

97

CONTINUED

On Touring models

Multi-Information DisplayInstrum

entsand

Controls

87

INFO ( / )BUTTON

SEL/RESETBUTTON

０９／０３／１３　１５：３８：３０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００９２　

2010 Pilot

Multi-Information Display

88

INFO button

SEL/RESET button


Main Menu

Go to Customize Menu (See page 97)

(See page 89)

Trip Computer(See page 92)

Tire Pressure for each tire (See page 91)

Go to HandsFreeLink Menu (See page 92)

０９／０３／１３　１５：３８：３４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００９３　

2010 Pilot

The odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures miles in U.S.models and kilometers in Canadianmodels. It is illegal under U.S.federal law and Canadian provincial/territorial regulations to disconnect,reset, or alter the odometer with theintent to change the number of milesor kilometers indicated.

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it. Thereare two trip meters: Trip A and TripB. Each trip meter worksindependently, so you can keep trackof two different distances.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the SEL/RESETbutton until the number resets to‘‘0.0.’’

When the main menu is blank orTrip Computer is displayed, pressingthe SEL/RESET button changes thedisplay to ‘‘odometer/trip meter’’‘‘outside temperature/trip meter’’and ‘‘engine oil life.’’

CONTINUED


Trip MeterOdometer

Instruments

andC

ontrols

89

TRIP METERODOMETER


０９／０３／１３　１５：３８：４３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００９４　

2010 Pilot

When you reset Trip A, AVERAGEFUEL A, AVERAGE SPEED A, andELAPSED TIME A are reset at thesame time. When you reset Trip B,AVERAGE FUEL B, AVERAGESPEED B, and ELAPSED TIME Bare reset.

You can customize the Trip A,AVERAGE FUEL A, AVERAGESPEED A, and ELAPSED TIME Areset condition on the multi-information display (see page ).

This shows the outside Fahrenheittemperature in U.S. models, andCelsius temperature in Canadianmodels.

In the left corner of the lowersegment, a compass indicates whichdirection your vehicle is pointed.

106


Outside TemperatureCompass

90

U.S.

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE

Canada

０９／０３／１３　１５：３８：５１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００９５　

2010 Pilot

When the tire pressure monitor isshown on the multi-informationdisplay, press the SEL/RESETbutton. The display changes asshown.You can see the pressure of each tirein this monitor. If one or more tiresare low, inflate them to the correctpressure. For more information, seepage .

This shows the remaining life of theengine oil. It shows 100% after theengine oil is replaced and the displayis reset. The engine oil life iscalculated based on engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions. For more information,see page .

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. The temperaturereading can be affected by heatreflection from the road surface,engine heat, and the exhaust fromsurrounding traffic. This can causean incorrect temperature readingwhen your vehicle speed is under19 mph (30 km/h). When you startyour trip, the sensor is not fullyacclimatized, therefore it may takeseveral minutes until the propertemperature is displayed.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.You can adjust the outsidetemperature display (see page ).105

455

424

Tire Pressure MonitorEngine Oil Life


entsand

Controls

91

U.S.

Canada

ENGINE OIL LIFE

０９／０３／１３　１５：３８：５８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００９６　

2010 Pilot

You can receive or make phone callsfrom your cell phone through yourvehicle’s HandsFreeLink(HFL) system without touching yourcell phone.

To use the system, your cell phoneand the HFL system must be linked.Not all cell phones are compatiblewith this system. Refer to page

for instructions on how to linkyour cell phone to HFL and how toreceive or make phone calls, or visitthe handsfreelink.com website. InCanada, visit , or call 1-(888) 9-HONDA-9.

Along with the trip meter, the tripcomputer calculates these values:

Average Fuel EconomyRangeAverage Vehicle SpeedElapsed Time

Instant Fuel Economy

361

Bluetooth

www.honda.ca


Trip ComputerHandsFreeLinkBluetooth

92

０９／０３／２３　１４：１４：４４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００９７　

2010 Pilot

This shows the estimated distanceyou can travel on the fuel remainingin the fuel tank. This distance isestimated from the fuel economyyou received over the last severalmiles(U.S.) or kilometers (Canada),so it will vary with changes in speed,traffic, etc.

This shows the average speed youare traveling in miles per hour (mph)for U.S. models or kilometers perhour (km/h) for Canadian models.

This shows the accumulatedtraveling time since you last reset it.When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, ELAPSEDTIME is reset.You can customize the TRIP A INFO(Trip A, AVERAGE FUEL A,ELAPSED TIME A, and AVERAGESPEED A) reset condition in themulti-information display (see page

).

This shows your vehicle’s averagefuel economy in mpg (U.S. models)or liter/100 km (Canadian models)since you last reset Trip A or Trip B.

This shows your instant fueleconomy.

106

RANGE

AVERAGE SPEED A/B

ELAPSED TIME A/BINSTANT FUEL MPG (U.S.models)/INSTANT FUEL L/100 km(Canadian models)

AVERAGE FUEL A/B


entsand

Controls

93

０９／０３／１３　１５：３９：１５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００９８　

2010 Pilot

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

If there is a problem with yourvehicle, for example the engine oillevel is low or a door is not fullyclosed, the multi-information displaywill show you the problem. It doesthis by interrupting the currentdisplay with one or more messages.

The system message(s) triggers theappropriate indicator(s) on theinstrument panel, including thesystem message indicator, to comeon. The system message indicatordoes not go off until the problem(s)is corrected.

You will also hear a beep when thesystem message comes on for thefirst time.

When there are several messages tobe shown, the system switches themessages every 5 seconds.The message is shown until youpush the INFO ( or ) button.To see the message again, press theINFO ( or ) button, 5 secondsafter the display disappears.

Here is a list of messages shown onthe multi-information display:


System Messages

94

SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR

０９／０３／１３　１５：３９：２２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　００９９　

2010 Pilot

CONTINUED

See page13

See page22

See page22

See page35

See page169

See page523

See page523

See page521

See page522

See page521

See page430

See page431

See page79

See page35


entsand

Controls

95

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

Canada

０９／０３／１３　１５：３９：３６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１００　

2010 Pilot

See page425

See page426

See page426

See page76

See page147

See page412

See page413

See page389

See page477

See page80

See page387

See page128

See page460

See page396

See page137


96

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

Canada

０９／０３／１３　１５：３９：４９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１０１　

2010 Pilot

When the main menu displays‘‘Keyless Memory Settings ,’’ youcan customize some vehicle controlsettings.To enter the customizing mode,press the SEL/RESET button.

If you turn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)position, or move the shift lever outof Park, the display will change tothe normal screen.

You can customize some vehiclecontrol settings for ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ and‘‘DRIVER 2’’ separately. If ‘‘DRIVER1’’ or ‘‘DRIVER 2’’ is not displayed,customizing is not possible.

To have the driver’s ID detected,make sure your remote transmitteris linked to the system (see KeylessMemory Settings on page ).

If you want the settings as they werewhen the vehicle left the factory,select DEFAULT ALL, as describedon page .

Refer to the table on the followingpages about the settings you want tocustomize.

If you want to change any vehiclecontrol settings, select CHGSETTING, then press the SEL/RESET button.

To change the settings, the ignitionswitch must be in the ON (II)position, and the vehicle must bestopped with the transmission inPark.

153

100

CONTINUED


Customize Settings

Instruments

andC

ontrols

97

TM TM

０９／０３／１３　１５：３９：５８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１０２　

2010 Pilot

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

－～± ～

－～± ～

＊

Menu Item Description Setting OptionGroup Setup PageLANGUAGE SELECTION

ADJUST OUTSIDETEMP. DISPLAY

TRIP A INFO RESET

MEMORY POSITION LINK

Changes the language used in the display.

Changes the outside temperature reading above orbelow its current reading.

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,average fuel A, elapsed time A, and average speedA.Changes the driver’s seat and the outside mirrorpositions to a stored setting.

ENGLISHFRENCHSPANISH

5°F 0°F 5°F(U.S.)

3°C 0°C 3°C(Canada)with REFUELMANUAL ONLYIGN OFFONOFF

METER SETUP(P.103)

POSITION SETUP(P.108)

104

105

106

109

: Default setting


98

０９／０３／１３　１５：４０：０２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１０３　

2010 Pilot

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Menu Item DescriptionGroup Setup Setting Option PageINTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIMEHEADLIGHTAUTO OFF TIMER

AUTO LIGHTSENSITIVITY

AUTO DOOR LOCK

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

KEY AND REMOTEUNLOCK MODEKEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGMENT

SECURITY RELOCKTIMER

15 sec

0 sec

LOWMIN

Changes how long (in seconds) the interior lightsstay on after you close the doors and the tailgate.Changes how long (in seconds) the exterior lightsstay on after you close the driver’s door.

Changes the timing of when the headlights comeon. The headlight switch needs to be in the AUTOposition.Changes the setting of when to automatically lockthe doors.

Changes the setting of when to automaticallyunlock the driver’s/all the doors.

Changes which doors unlock with the remotetransmitter on a first push.The exterior lights flash each time you press theLOCK or UNLOCK button. A beeper will alsosound when you press the LOCK button twice.Changes how long it takes (in seconds) for thedoors to relock and the security system to set afteryou unlock but do not open the door.Set/Cancel all the customized settings as default.

LIGHTING SETUP(P.110)

DOOR/WINDOWSETUP(P.115)

DEFAULT ALL(P.100)

60 sec30 sec60 sec30 sec15 secMAXHIGHMIDSHIFT FROM PWITH VEH SPEEDOFF

IGN OFFOFFDRIVER DOORALL DOORSONOFF

90 sec60 sec30 secSETCANCEL

111

112

113

116

117

119

120

121

100

: Default setting

DRIVER DOOR /ALL DOORS

SHIFT TO P


entsand

Controls

99

０９／０３／１３　１５：４０：０８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１０４　

2010 Pilot

▲ ▼ ▲ ▼If you want to set the default settings,press the INFO ( / ) button toselect DEFAULT ALL, then pressthe SEL/RESET button.

When DEFAULT ALL is set, you willsee the above display for severalseconds, then the screen returns toCUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If the setting is not successfullycompleted, ‘‘FAILED’’ is shown forseveral seconds, and then the screengoes back to the normal messagemode. Repeat the same procedure toselect DEFAULT ALL.

If you want to cancel DEFAULTALL, select CANCEL, then press theSEL/RESET button. The screengoes back to the previous display.

To set the default settings, press theINFO ( / ) button to select SETthen press the SEL/RESET button.

DEFAULT ALL


100

０９／０３／１３　１５：４０：１５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１０５　

2010 Pilot

▲▼

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

You can customize some of thevehicle control settings to yourpreference. Here are the settingsyou can customize:

METER SETUP

LIGHTING SETUPPOSITION SETUP

DOOR/WINDOW SETUP

Each time you press the INFO ( /) button, the screen changes as

shown on the next page. Press theINFO ( / ) button until you seethe setup you want to customize,then press the SEL/RESET buttonto enter your selection.

When you want to change thevehicle control settings, press theINFO ( / ) button to select CHGSETTING, then press the SEL/RESET button.

CONTINUED


Customize Settings

Instruments

andC

ontrols

101

０９／０３／１３　１５：４０：２３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１０６　

2010 Pilot


102

Select‘‘DEFAULT ALL’’

Select ‘‘EXIT’’

Select ‘‘CANCEL’’

INFO button

SEL/RESET button

METER SETUP(See page 103)

POSITION SETUP(See page 108)

LIGHTING SETUP(See page 110)

DOOR/WINDOW SETUP(See page 115)

０９／０３／１３　１５：４０：２７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１０７　

2010 Pilot

▲▼

▲ ▼

LANGUAGE SELECTIONADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.DISPLAY

Here are the three custom settingsfor the meter setup:

TRIP A INFO RESET

While ‘‘METER SETUP’’ is shown,press the SEL/RESET button toenter the customize mode.


shown in the illustration. Press theINFO ( / ) button until you seethe setting you want to customize,then press the SEL/RESET buttonto enter your selection.

CONTINUED

Meter Setup


entsand

Controls

103

INFO button

SEL/RESET button

０９／０３／１３　１５：４０：３５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１０８　

2010 Pilot

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

Language Selection

There are three language selectionsyou can make: English, French, andSpanish. To choose the language youwant, follow these instructions:

You can choose this item tocustomize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’by pressing the INFO ( / ) buttonrepeatedly.

Press the SEL/RESET button to seethe selections.

Select the desired language bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then enter your selection by pressingthe SEL/RESET button.

When your selection is successfullycompleted, the display changes asshown above, and then goes back tothe customize item screen.

If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘LANGUAGE SELECTION’’ andrepeat the procedure again.


104

０９／０３／１３　１５：４０：４３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１０９　

2010 Pilot

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

CONTINUED

Adjust Outside Temp. Display

If you sometimes find that thetemperature reading is a fewdegrees above or below the actualtemperature, you can adjust it byfollowing these instructions:


Adjust the outside temperature valueby pressing the INFO ( / ) buttonrepeatedly. Press the SEL/RESETbutton to set the desired value.


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.DISPLAY’’ and repeat the procedureagain.


entsand

Controls

105

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

Canada

０９／０３／１３　１５：４０：５２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１１０　

2010 Pilot

－

－

－

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

There are three settings you canchoose from:

with REFUEL Trip A Info is resetevery time you refuel your vehicle.

MANUAL ONLY You can resetTrip A Info when you press and holdthe SEL/RESET button until thenumber resets.

IGN OFF Trip A Info is resetwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe LOCK (0) position.



Select ON or OFF by pressing theINFO ( / ) button, then enteryour selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

Trip A Info Reset


106

０９／０３／１３　１５：４１：００　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１１１　

2010 Pilot


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to ‘‘TRIPA INFO RESET’’ and repeat theprocedure again.


entsand

Controls

107

０９／０３／１３　１５：４１：０４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１１２　

2010 Pilot

▲▼

▲ ▼

You can customize the MEMORYPOSITION LINK setting in positionsetup.

While ‘‘POSITION SETUP’’ is shown,press the SEL/RESET button toenter the customize mode.



Position Setup


108

INFO button

SEL/RESET button

０９／０３／１３　１５：４１：０９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１１３　

2010 Pilot

▲ ▼

▲▼

Memory Position Link




If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ andrepeat the procedure again.

If ‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ is‘‘ON,’’ the driver’s seat and outsidemirrors move to the positions storedin the memory when you open thedriver’s door, using the remotetransmitter.

You can choose this item tocustomize from ‘‘POSITIONSETUP’’ by pressing the INFO ( /

) button repeatedly.


entsand

Controls

109

０９／０３／１３　１５：４１：１７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１１４　

2010 Pilot

▲▼

▲ ▼

INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIMEHEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMERAUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY

While ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ isshown, press the SEL/RESETbutton to enter the customize mode.



Here are the three custom settingsfor the lighting setup:

Lighting Setup


110

INFO button

SEL/RESETbutton

０９／０３／１３　１５：４１：２４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１１５　

2010 Pilot

▲▼

▲ ▼

CONTINUED

Interior Light Dimming Time

The interior lights fade out when youclose all doors and tailgate. Tochange how long the lights stay onbefore they fade out, follow theseinstructions:

You can choose this item tocustomize from ‘‘LIGHTINGSETUP’’ by pressing the INFO ( /




If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMINGTIME’’ and repeat the procedureagain.

Select the desired setting bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then enter your selection by pressingthe SEL/RESET button.


entsand

Controls

111

０９／０３／１３　１５：４１：３３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１１６　

2010 Pilot

▲▼

▲ ▼

Headlight Auto Off Timer





The headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights, taillights, and licenseplate lights go off after the selectedtime when you remove the key fromthe ignition switch and close thedriver’s door. To change how longthe lights stay on before they go off,follow these instructions:


112

０９／０３／１３　１５：４１：３８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１１７　

2010 Pilot

－

－

－

－

－

▲▼

CONTINUED

Auto Light SensitivityThe headlights automatically comeon when the headlight switch is inthe AUTO position and the ambientlight reaches a changeable level. Youcan select the auto light sensitivityfrom the following five levels:


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER’’and repeat the procedure again.

MAXThe headlights come on when it isbright.

HIGHThe headlights come on when it issomewhat bright.

MIDThe headlights come on when it is asbright as sunset or sunrise.

LOWThe headlights come on when it issomewhat dark.

MINThe headlights come on when it isdark.




entsand

Controls

113

０９／０３／１３　１５：４１：４７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１１８　

2010 Pilot

▲ ▼


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTOLIGHT SENSITIVITY’’ and repeatthe procedure again.




114

０９／０３／１３　１５：４１：５３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１１９　

2010 Pilot

▲▼

▲ ▼

CONTINUED

Here are the five custom settings forthe door/window setup:

AUTO DOOR LOCKAUTO DOOR UNLOCKKEY AND REMOTE UNLOCKMODE

SECURITY RELOCK TIMER

While ‘‘DOOR/WINDOW SETUP’’is shown, press the SEL/RESETbutton to enter the customize mode.



KEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGMENT


Door/Window Setup

Instruments

andC

ontrols

115

INFO button

SEL/RESETbutton

０９／０３／１３　１５：４２：０１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１２０　

2010 Pilot

－

－

▲▼

▲ ▼

－

Auto Door LockThere are three settings you canchoose from:

SHIFT FROM PThe doors lock whenever you movethe shift lever out of Park.

OFFThe auto door lock mode isdeactivated all the time.

You can choose this item tocustomize from ‘‘DOOR/WINDOWSETUP’’ by pressing the INFO ( /




WITH VEH SPEEDThe doors lock when the vehiclespeed reaches about 10 mph (U.S.)and 15 km/h (Canada).


116

０９／０３／１３　１５：４２：０９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１２１　

2010 Pilot

▲▼－

－

－

CONTINUED

Auto Door UnlockThere are three settings you canchoose from:




If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTODOOR LOCK’’ and repeat theprocedure again.

OFF The auto door unlock modeis deactivated all the time.

SHIFT TO P The driver’s door orall the doors, depending on yourselection in the next step, unlockwhen you move the shift lever toPark.

IGN OFF The driver’s door or allthe doors, depending on yourselection in the next step, unlockwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe LOCK (0) position.


entsand

Controls

117

０９／０３／１３　１５：４２：１７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１２２　

2010 Pilot

▲ ▼▲ ▼


If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTODOOR UNLOCK’’ and repeat theprocedure again.

If you choose ‘‘SHIFT TO P’’ or ‘‘IGNOFF’’, you will see the above display.

Press the INFO ( / ) button toswitch the door lock mode settingbetween the driver’s door and alldoors. Then, press the SEL/RESETbutton to enter your selection.




118

０９／０３／１３　１５：４２：２５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１２３　

2010 Pilot

▲▼

▲ ▼

Key and Remote Unlock Mode

To select whether the driver’s doorunlocks or all the doors unlock whenyou unlock the doors with theremote transmitter, follow theseinstructions.





If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to ‘‘KEYAND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE’’and repeat the procedure again.


CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

119

０９／０３／１３　１５：４２：３３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１２４　

2010 Pilot

▲▼

▲ ▼

Keyless Lock AcknowledgmentWhen you push the LOCK button onthe remote transmitter, someexterior lights flash, and a beepersounds when you push the LOCKbutton again within 5 seconds toverify that the doors and the tailgateare locked and the security systemhas set (see page ). You cancustomize the exterior lights not toflash and the beeper not to sound.





349


120

０９／０３／１３　１５：４２：３９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１２５　

2010 Pilot

▲▼

Security Relock TimerIf you unlock the doors and thetailgate with the remote transmitter,but do not open any of the doors orthe tailgate within 30 seconds, thedoors and the tailgate automaticallyrelock and the security system sets.

You can change this relock timefrom 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.




If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘KEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ and repeatthe procedure again.

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

121

０９／０３／１３　１５：４２：４６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１２６　

2010 Pilot

▲ ▼



If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’message appears, go back to‘‘SECURITY RELOCK TIMER’’ andrepeat the procedure again.



122

０９／０３／１３　１５：４２：５２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１２７　

2010 Pilot

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊＊＊

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.If equipped

1 :2 :3 :4 : 4WD models only

Controls Near the Steering WheelInstrum

entsand

Controls

123

HORN

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON


GLASS HATCH RELEASE BUTTON/POWER TAILGATE SWITCH

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASEHANDLE


POWER DOOR LOCK MASTERSWITCH

MIRROR CONTROLS

DRIVING POSITION MEMORYSYSTEM

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSISTSYSTEM OFF SWITCH

PARKING SENSOR SYSTEMSWITCH

HEADLIGHT/TURN SIGNAL/FRONT FOG LIGHTS

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS

(P.361)

PARKING BRAKE RELEASEHANDLE

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

VOICE CONTROLBUTTONS

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR

VTM-4 LOCKBUTTON


SEAT HEATERSWITCHES

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

MULTI-INFORMATIONBUTTONS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER/HEATEDMIRROR BUTTON

(P.126)

(P.432)

(P.386)

(P.173)

(P.171)

(P.138)

(P.165)

(P.395)

(P.145)

(P.169)(P.133) (P.87)

(P.350)

(P.164)

(P.186)

(P.130, 172)

(P.418)

(P.36)

(P.124)

(P.130)(P.311)BLUETOOTHHANDSFREELINK SYSTEMVOICE CONTROL BUTTONS

13

3

3

3

3

2

4

3

3

3

3

０９／０３／２３　１４：１４：５１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１２８　

2010 Pilot

－－－

－

－

－

－

－

－

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield washers

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

The wipers are not activated.

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

The length of the wipeinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to vehicle speed.

If you turn it to the shortest delay,the wipers change to low speedoperation when the vehicle speedexceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

Pull thewiper control lever toward you,and hold it. The washers sprayuntil you release the lever. Thewipers run at low speed, thencomplete one more sweep afteryou release the lever.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

MIST

OFF

LO

HI

INT

Windshield Washer

Windshield Wipers and Washers

124

０９／０３／１３　１５：４３：０９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１２９　

2010 Pilot

When you turn the wiper switch tothe ‘‘OFF’’ position, the wiper willreturn to its parked position.

Rotate the switchcounterclockwise to spray thewindow washer.

If you attempt to open the glasshatch while the rear wiper isoperating, the wiper will return tothe parked position, and then theglass hatch can be opened. After theglass hatch is closed, the rear wiperstarts to operate again after a fewseconds delay.

To turn on the rear window wiper,rotate the switch clockwise to ON.It operates intermittently.

Hold past ON to turn the rearwindow wiper on and to spray therear window washer.

When you shift the transmission tothe reverse position with the frontwindshield wipers activated, the rearwindow wiper operates automatically.

The rear window washer uses thesame fluid reservoir as the wind-shield washer.

The rear wiper will not work if theglass hatch is not fully closed.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Windshield Wipers and Washers

Rear Window Wiper and Washer

Instruments

andC

ontrols

125

０９／０３／１３　１５：４３：１８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１３０　

2010 Pilot

－－

－

＊

＊

＊

Turning theswitch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turnson the parking lights, taillights,instrument panel lights, side-markerlights, and rear license plate lights.

Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights. Ifyou leave the lights on with the keyremoved from the ignition switch,you will hear a reminder chime whenyou open the driver’s door.

This indicator stays on if you leavethe lights on and turn the ignitionswitch to the ACCESSORY (I) orLOCK (0) position.

When the light switch is in either ofthese positions, the lights onindicator comes on as a reminder.

To switch from lowbeams to high beams, push the leftlever forward until you hear a click.The blue high beam indicator willcome on (see page ). Pull it backto return to low beams. To flash thehigh beams, pull the lever backlightly, then release it. The highbeams stay on as long as you holdthe lever back.

Turn signalOffParking and indicator lightsAUTOHeadlights onHigh beamsFlash high beamsFog lights offFog lights on

Push down on theleft lever to signal a left turn and upto signal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever andhold it. The lever will return to thecenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.

: If equipped

78

Headlights OnHigh Beams

Turn Signal

Turn Signals and Headlights

126

０９／０３／１３　１５：４３：２４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１３１　

2010 Pilot

－ The automatic lightingfeature turns on the headlights andall other exterior lights, when itsenses low ambient light.

To turn on automatic lighting, turnthe light switch to AUTO. The lightswill come on automatically when theoutside light level becomes low (atdusk, for example). The lights onindicator comes on as a reminder.The lights and indicator will turn offautomatically when the systemsenses high ambient light.

The lights will remain on when youturn off the ignition switch. They willturn off automatically when youremove the key and open the driver’sdoor. To turn them on again, eitherturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position or turn the light switchto the position.

Even with the automatic lightingfeature turned on, we recommendthat you turn on the lights manuallywhen driving at night or in a densefog, or when you enter dark areassuch as long tunnels or parkingfacilities.

To change the ‘‘AUTO LIGHTSENSITIVITY’’ setting, see page

.

Do not leave the light switch inAUTO if you will not be driving thevehicle for an extended period (aweek or more). You should also turnoff the lights if you plan to leave theengine idling or off for a long time.

The automatic lighting feature iscontrolled by a sensor located on topof the dashboard. Do not cover thissensor or spill liquids on it.

113

On Touring models

Headlights

AUTO

Instruments

andC

ontrols

127

LIGHT SENSOR

０９／０３／１３　１５：４３：３２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１３２　

2010 Pilot

Turn the fog lights on and off byturning the switch next to theheadlight switch.

You can use the fog lights only whenthe headlights are on low beam.With the light switch in the AUTOposition, you can also use the foglights when the headlights turn onautomatically. They will go off whenthe headlights turn off.

With the headlight switch off, thedaytime running lights come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position and release theparking brake. They remain on untilyou turn the ignition switch off, evenif you set the parking brake.

When the headlights are on, thedaytime running lights are off.

If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRLSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display, there is aproblem with the daytime runninglight system. Take your vehicle to adealer to have it checked.

When the multi-information displayshows a ‘‘DRL OFF’’ message, thedaytime running lights are off.Follow the procedure in the leftcolumn to turn them on.

Except LX modelsOn Touring models

Headlights

Fog Lights Daytime Running Lights

128

０９／０３／１３　１５：４３：３９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１３３　

2010 Pilot

This feature turns off the headlights,all other exterior lights, and theinstrument panel lights within 15seconds after you remove the keyand close the driver’s door.

The automatic lighting off featureactivates if you leave the headlightswitch in the ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’position or if the lights are turned onby setting the switch in the ‘‘AUTO’’position, and you remove the key,then open and close the driver’s door.

To change the ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTOOFF TIMER’’ setting, see page .

If you turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position with theheadlight switch on, but do not openthe door, the lights turn off after 10minutes (3 minutes, if the switch isin the ‘‘AUTO’’ position).

The lights turn on again when youunlock or open the driver’s door.If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightsgo off. With the driver’s door open,you will hear a lights-on reminderchime.

112

On Touring models

Headlights

Automatic Lighting Off Feature

Instruments

andC

ontrols

129

０９／０３／１３　１５：４３：４５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１３４　

2010 Pilot

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicator inthe button lights to show thedefogger is on. If you do not turn itoff, the defogger will shut itself offafter about 15 minutes. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignition.You have to turn it on again whenyou restart the vehicle.

The defogger wires on the inside ofthe rear window can be accidentallydamaged. When cleaning the glass,always wipe side-to-side.

Pushing this button also turns themirror heaters on or off. For moreinformation, see page .

Push the button to turn on thehazard warning lights (four-wayflashers). This causes all fouroutside turn signals and both turnindicators in the instrument panel toflash. Use the hazard warning lightsif you need to park in a dangerousarea near heavy traffic, or if yourvehicle is disabled.

172

Except U.S. LX model

Rear Window DefoggerHazard Warning Button

Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger

130

０９／０３／１３　１５：４３：５３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１３５　

2010 Pilot

The select/reset knob on theinstrument panel controls thebrightness of the instrument panellights. Turn the knob to adjust thebrightness.

Separate adjustments can be madewhen the headlights are on and off.

You will hear a beep when maximumor minimum brightness is reached.You will also hear a beep when themaximum level is canceled byturning the knob a click to the left.

To reduce glare at night, theinstrument panel illumination dimswhen you turn the light switch to

or . Turning the select/reset knob to the right until you heara beep will cancel the reducedbrightness.

The level of brightness is shown onthe information display while youadjust it. It goes out about 5 secondsafter you finish adjusting.

CONTINUED


Instrument Panel BrightnessInstrum

entsand

Controls

131


０９／０３／１３　１５：４４：００　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１３６　

2010 Pilot

The level of brightness is shown onthe multi-information display whileyou adjust it. It goes out 5 secondsafter you finish adjusting.

When the brightness reaches themaximum level, ‘‘BRIGHTNESSMAXIMUM LEVEL’’ appears on thedisplay.

On Touring models

Instrument Panel Brightness

132

０９／０３／１３　１５：４４：０５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１３７　

2010 Pilot

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up, down, in,and out.

Move the steering wheel up ordown, and in or out, so it pointstoward your chest, not towardyour face. Make sure you can seethe instrument panel gauges andindicators.

3.

4.

1.

2.

Steering Wheel AdjustmentInstrum

entsand

Controls

133

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

０９／０３／１３　１５：４４：１１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１３８　

2010 Pilot

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle. The valet key worksonly in the ignition and the driver’sdoor lock. You can keep the glovebox locked when you leave yourvehicle and the valet key at a parkingfacility.

The valet key does not contain abattery. Do not try to take it apart.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly Honda-approved key blanks.

Keys and Locks

134

KEYNUMBERTAG

MASTER KEYWITH REMOTETRANSMITTER

VALET KEY(Light Gray)

０９／０３／１３　１５：４４：１７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１３９　

2010 Pilot

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come onbriefly, then go off. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position, remove the key,reinsert it, and turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position again.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle inoperable.

If you have lost your key and youcannot start the engine, contact yourdealer.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine’s fuelsystem is disabled.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keychain) is near the ignition switchwhen you insert the key.

CONTINUED

Immobilizer SystemInstrum

entsand

Controls

135

０９／０３／１３　１５：４４：２４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１４０　

2010 Pilot

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Immobilizer System

136

Always take the ignition key with youwhenever you leave the vehicle alone.

０９／０３／１３　１５：４４：２８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１４１　

2010 Pilot

－

－

－

－

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key to the LOCK (0)position, the shift lever must be inPark, and you must push the key inslightly.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the key.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) or theACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

You will also see a ‘‘REMOVE KEY’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ).

The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

96

On Touring models

Ignition Switch

LOCK (0)

ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

START (III)

Instruments

andC

ontrols

137

０９／０３／１３　１５：４４：３６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１４２　

2010 Pilot

All doors and the tailgate can belocked from the outside by using thekey in the driver’s door lock. Tounlock only the driver’s door, insertthe key, turn the key, and release it.The remaining doors and the tailgateunlock when you turn the key asecond time within a few seconds.

The lock tab on any passenger’s doorlocks and unlocks that door.

To change the ‘‘KEY AND REMOTEUNLOCK MODE’’ setting, see page

.

To lock all doors and the tailgate,push the top of the master door lockswitch on either front door, pull thelock tab rearward on the driver’sdoor, or use the key on the outsidelock on the driver’s door.

Pushing the rear of either masterdoor lock switch will unlock all doorsand the tailgate. Pushing forward thelock tab on the driver’s doorsunlocks only that door.

When the vehicle speed reachesabout 10 mph (U.S.) and 15 km/h(Canada) or more, all the doors lockautomatically.

To change the ‘‘AUTO DOORUNLOCK’’ setting, see page .

When you shift to P after driving, thedriver’s door unlocks.

To change the ‘‘AUTO DOORLOCK’’ setting, see page .

119

117

116

On Touring models

Door Locks

138

Lock

Unlock

Lock

Unlock

０９／０３／１３　１５：４４：４５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１４３　

2010 Pilot

Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and open the driver’sdoor.

Your vehicle has customizablesettings for the doors and tailgate toautomatically lock and unlock. Thereare default settings for each of thesefeatures. You can turn off or changethe settings for these features asdescribed on the following pages.

When you customize the setting,make sure your vehicle is parkedsafely, the engine is off, and theparking brake is applied. Make allsettings before you start driving.

To change the ‘‘AUTO DOORLOCK’’ setting, see page .

To change the ‘‘AUTO DOORUNLOCK’’ setting, see page .

The auto door locking feature hasthree possible settings:

The auto door locking isdeactivated all the time.

The doors and tailgate lockwhenever you move the shift leverout of the Park (P) position.

The doors and tailgate lock whenthe vehicle speed reaches 9 mph(15 km/h).This is the default setting. 1.

2.116

117

CONTINUED

On Touring models

Except Touring models Except Touring modelsAuto Door Locking/Unlocking Auto Door Locking To turn off the Auto Door Lock

modes:

Door LocksInstrum

entsand

Controls

139

０９／０３／１３　１５：４４：５７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１４４　

2010 Pilot

Locks all doors and tailgate when theshift lever is moved out of the Park (P)position.


Release the switch, and within 5seconds, turn the ignition switchto the LOCK (0) position.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and make sure toclose the driver’s door.

Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Keep holding the switch until youhear another click (after about 5seconds).

Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door until you hear a click(after about 5 seconds).

Release the switch, and within 5seconds, turn the ignition switchto the LOCK (0) position. 4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

3. To program the Park Lock mode:

Door Locks

140

０９／０３／１３　１５：４５：０４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１４５　

2010 Pilot

Locks all doors and tailgate when thevehicle’s speed reaches about 9 mph(15 km/h).



Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Keep holding the switch until youhear another click (after about 5seconds).

Push and hold the brake pedal,and move the shift lever out of thePark (P) position.

Release the switch and, within 5seconds, turn the ignition switchto the ACCESSORY (I) position.Move the shift lever to the Park(P) position.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position.


The auto door unlocking feature hasfive possible settings:

The auto door unlocking isdeactivated all the time.

The driver’s door unlocks whenyou move the shift lever to thePark (P) position.This is the default setting.

All doors and tailgate unlock whenyou move the shift lever to thePark (P) position.

The driver’s door unlockswhenever you turn the ignitionswitch to the ACCESSORY (I)position.

All doors and tailgate unlockwhenever you turn the ignitionswitch to the ACCESSORY (I)position.

3.

4.

1.

2.

5.

6.

CONTINUED

To program the Drive Lock mode: Auto Door Unlocking

Door LocksInstrum

entsand

Controls

141

０９／０３／１３　１５：４５：１６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１４６　

2010 Pilot

Unlocks the driver’s door or all doorsand tailgate when the shift lever ismoved into the Park (P) position.




Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and open the driver’sdoor.

Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click,and after about 5 seconds, you willhear another click.


1.

2.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To program the Park Unlock mode:To turn off the Auto Door Unlockmodes:

Door Locks

142

０９／０３／１３　１５：４５：２５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１４７　

2010 Pilot

Unlocks the driver’s door or all doorsand tailgate when the ignition switch ismoved out of the ON (II) position.

all doors and tailgateunlock feature

driver’s door unlockfeature.


Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Continue to hold the switch:

Release the switch and, within 5seconds, turn the ignition switchto the ACCESSORY (I) position.Move the shift lever to the Park(P) position.


Push and hold the brake pedal,and move the shift lever out of P.


Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Continue to hold down the switch:

Or, until you hear two moreclicks (after about 10 seconds)to activate

.

Until you hear another click(after about 5 seconds) toactivate the driver’s door unlockfeature.

Or, until you hear two moreclicks (after about 10 seconds)to activate all doors and tailgateunlock feature.

Until you hear another click(after about 5 seconds) toactivate


4.

5.1.

2.

3.

6.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

To program the Ignition SwitchUnlock mode:

Door LocksInstrum

entsand

Controls

143

０９／０３／１３　１５：４５：３７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１４８　

2010 Pilot

With any door and the tailgate openand the key in the ignition, bothmaster door lock switches aredisabled. They are not disabled if allthe doors and the tailgate are closed.If you try to lock an open driver’sdoor by pulling the lock tab rearwardthe lock tab on the driver’s door popsout.

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position (lever isdown), the door cannot be openedfrom the inside regardless of theposition of the lock tab. To open thedoor, push the lock tab forward anduse the outside door handle.


To open the tailgate, press and holdthe switch, then lift up. To close thetailgate, use the inner handle to pullit down, then press down on the backedge.

Lockout Prevention Childproof Door Locks Tailgate

Door Locks, Tailgate and Glass Hatch

144

Lock

０９／０３／１３　１５：４５：４４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１４９　

2010 Pilot

The tailgate can be opened andclosed with the remote transmitter(see page ) or the switch in thedriver’s door pocket when both frontdoors are unlocked.

Keep the tailgate closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging thetailgate and to prevent exhaust gasfrom getting into the interior. See

on page.

If you push the same button orswitch again while the tailgate isopening or closing, you will hearthree beeps, and the tailgate will stopmoving, reverse direction, and stopat the fully opened or closed position.

Press and hold the tailgate button onthe remote transmitter or the switchfor about 1 second to open or closethe tailgate. Each time you press thebutton on the remote transmitter orthe switch, you will hear a beep, andsome front and rear lights will flash.

If the glass hatch is opened, remotetransmitter operation is canceleduntil it is closed.

61

151

CONTINUED

On Touring modelsPower Tailgate

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Tailgate and Glass HatchInstrum

entsand

Controls

145

POWER TAILGATE SWITCH

０９／０３／１３　１５：４５：５１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１５０　

2010 Pilot

Also check that passengers,especially children, do not have theirhands on the edge of the tailgate oron the tailgate sill. The auto reversefeature stops working when thetailgate is about to latch so the motorcan pull the tailgate shut.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected, goes dead, or the fuseis removed while the tailgate is fullyopen, the power tailgate needs to bereset. After connecting the batteryor installing the fuse, close thetailgate fully by hand.

The power tailgate may not open orclose under the these conditions:

The vehicle is parked on a steephill.

When the vehicle is swayed in astrong wind.

The power tailgate has an auto-reverse feature. If it meetsresistance while opening or closing,it will beep three times and reversedirection. However, the tailgate maynot reverse immediately. Alwaysmake sure passengers and objectsare clear of the tailgate beforeopening or closing it.

The tailgate can also be closed bypressing the button on the tailgate. Ifyou press the button again while thetailgate is closing, you will hear threebeeps, and the tailgate will stopmoving, reverse direction, and stopat the fully opened position.

Auto-Reverse

Tailgate and Glass Hatch

146

TAILGATE SWITCH Closing a power tailgate whileanyone is in the path of thetailgate can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure everyone is clearbefore closing the powertailgate.

０９／０３／１３　１５：４５：５９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１５１　

2010 Pilot

CONTINUED

When the tailgate or the roof iscovered with snow or ice.

Do not install any accessories on thetailgate. It may cause the tailgate tomalfunction. If there is snow or iceon the tailgate, make sure to removeit before you operate the tailgate.

If the power door lock system cannotunlock the tailgate, unlock itmanually.

Keep the tailgate closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging thetailgate and to prevent exhaust gasfrom getting into the interior. See

on page.

If there is a problem in the powertailgate system, you will see a‘‘CHECK POWER TAILGATE’’message on the multi-informationdisplay. Have the system checked byyour dealer.

With this message shown on themulti-information display, you canstill open or close the tailgatemanually.

If you push the tailgate releasebutton inside the handle while thetailgate is opening or closing, it willstop moving. You need to open orclose it the rest of the way manually.

The tailgate has sensors on bothsides. Be careful not to damage them.If the sensors are damaged, thepower tailgate does not functionproperly.

If you try to drive off with thetailgate open, a beeper sounds and a‘‘TAILGATE OPEN’’ message isshown on the multi-informationdisplay.

Place a cloth on the top side of thecover to prevent scratches, then usea small flat-tip screwdriver to removethe cover on the back of the tailgate.

61

Unlocking the Tailgate

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Tailgate and Glass HatchInstrum

entsand

Controls

147

０９／０３／１３　１５：４６：０８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１５２　

2010 Pilot

To open the glass hatch, press theglass hatch release button on thetailgate.

If you need to unlock the tailgatemanually, it means there is aproblem with the tailgate. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

Push the release lever to the right asshown.


If you cannot open the tailgate,remove the cover on the back of thetailgate (see page ). Make surethe shift lever is in the Park (P)position. Push the release lever tothe right as shown, then pull theouter handle to open the tailgate.

To close the glass hatch, lower it andpress on the handle until it latches.

147

Except Touring modelsOn Touring models


Glass Hatch

148

GLASS HATCH RELEASE BUTTON

０９／０３／１３　１５：４６：１６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１５３　

2010 Pilot

The rear wiper will not operate withthe glass hatch open. If you open theglass hatch while the rear wiper isoperating, the wiper will return to itsparked position (see page ). Thewiper will resume operation after theglass hatch is closed.

Keep the tailgate and the glass hatchclosed at all times while driving toavoid damaging the tailgate and theglass hatch, and to prevent exhaustgas from getting into the interior.See onpage .

You can also open the glass hatch bypressing the glass hatch releasebutton on the driver’s door or on theremote transmitter.

125

61



Carbon Monoxide Hazard Instruments

andC

ontrols

149

GLASS HATCH RELEASE BUTTON

０９／０３／１３　１５：４６：２１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１５４　

2010 Pilot

－

－

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Push ittwice to unlock the other doors.Some exterior lights will flash twicewhen you push the button. If you donot open any door or the tailgatewithin 30 seconds, they willautomatically relock.

To change the ‘‘KEY AND REMOTEUNLOCK MODE’’ setting, see page

.

To change the ‘‘SECURITYRELOCK TIMER’’ setting, see page

.

Press this button once tolock all doors and the tailgate. Someexterior lights will flash. When youpush LOCK twice within 5 seconds,you will hear a beep to verify that thedoors and tailgate are locked and thesecurity system has set. This buttondoes not work if any door or tailgateis not fully closed.

To change the ‘‘KEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGEMENT’’ setting,see page .120

119

121

On Touring models

On Touring models

Remote Transmitter

UNLOCK

LOCK

150

Except Touring models On Touring models

UNLOCKBUTTON

UNLOCKBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

TAILGATEBUTTON

GLASSHATCHRELEASEBUTTON

０９／０３／１３　１５：４６：２８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１５５　

2010 Pilot

－－

－

Press and hold thisbutton for about 1 second to attractattention; the horn will sound, andthe exterior lights will flash for about30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,press any other button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Panicmode does not work when the key isin the ignition switch.

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

When you press the UNLOCKbutton, the front and rear individualmap lights and the cargo area light,depending on their switch positions,will come on (see page ). If youdo not open any door or the tailgate,the lights stay on for about 30seconds, then go out. If you relockthe doors and the tailgate with theremote transmitter before 30seconds have elapsed, the lights willgo off immediately.

If you push the same button againwhile the tailgate is opening orclosing, three beeps sound, thetailgate stops moving, reversesdirection and stops in the fullyopened or fully closed position.

Press and hold theTAILGATE button to open or closethe power tailgate. When the tailgatebegins to move, you will hear a beep,and some front and rear lights willflash.

Press this button for about 1 secondto open the glass hatch. Even if theglass hatch is open, the tailgate canbe locked with the remotetransmitter.

176


On Touring models

Remote Transmitter

PANICTAILGATE

GLASS HATCH RELEASE

Remote Transmitter Care

Instruments

andC

ontrols

151

０９／０３／１３　１５：４６：３７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１５６　

2010 Pilot

Inside the transmitter, separatethe inner cover from the keypadby releasing the two tabs on thecover.

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doorsand the tailgate, replace the batteryas soon as possible.

Battery type: CR1616

To replace the battery:

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

Separate the transmitter by pryingits middle seam with yourfingernail.

3.

1.

2.

Remote Transmitter

Replacing the TransmitterBattery

152

BATTERY

SCREW

０９／０３／１３　１５：４６：４５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１５７　

2010 Pilot

＋




On Touring modelsRemove the old battery, and inserta new battery into the back of thecover with the side facing down.

Install the parts in reverse order.

An improperly disposed of batterycan hurt the environment.Always confirm local regulationsfor battery disposal.

When you unlock the door with yourremote, each remote activates thekeyless memory settings related tothat remote. The driver’s ID (Driver1 or Driver 2) is shown on the backof each remote.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

Remote Transmitter

Keyless Memory Settings

Instruments

andC

ontrols

153

TM

０９／０３／１３　１５：４６：５３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１５８　

2010 Pilot

－See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

Except LX models

On EX-L and Touring models

Except EX-L and Touring models

15 16

The controls for the poweradjustable front seats are on theoutside edge of each seat bottom.You can adjust the seats with theignition switch in any position. Makeall seat adjustments before you startdriving.

The passenger seat has the sameadjustments as the driver’s seat butwithout any height and lumbaradjustments.

The front passenger’s seat adjustsmanually.

Here are the settings activated withthe remote:

Driving position memory(see page ).

Customized settings(see page ).

When you unlock and open thedriver’s door with the remotetransmitter, the driver’s seat (exceptthe power lumbar feature) andoutside mirrors start to move to thepositions stored in memory. Theindicator in the related memorybutton to the remote comes on.

97

173

Front Seat Power Adjustments

Remote Transmitter, Seats

154

０９／０３／１３　１５：４７：０１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１５９　

2010 Pilot

－See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

Except EX-L and Touring models15 16

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

Moves the seat forwardand backward.

Moves the whole seat upand forward, or downand backward. The frontof the seat also tilts up ordown at the same time.

Moves the front of theseat up or down.

Raises or lowers the seat.

Adjusts the seat-backangle forward orbackward.

Increases or decreasesthe lumbar support.(Driver’s seat only)

CONTINUED

Seats

Front Seat Manual Adjustments

Instruments

andC

ontrols

155

０９／０３／１３　１５：４７：１１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１６０　

2010 Pilot

The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. To raise the seat,repeatedly pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat cushion. To lowerthe seat, push the lever downrepeatedly.

Once a seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make sure itis locked in position.

To adjust the seat forward orbackward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position, andrelease the bar. Try to move the seatto make sure it is locked in position.

To change the seat-back angle, pullup on the lever on the outside of theseat bottom.

On LX models

Seats

Driver’s Seat Manual HeightAdjustment

156

０９／０３／１３　１５：４７：１８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１６１　

2010 Pilot

CONTINUED

The head restraints adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust therestraint. Do not attempt to adjust itwhile driving. To raise it, pull upward.To lower the restraint, push therelease button sideways, and pushthe restraint down.

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from whiplash and otherinjuries.

They are most effective when youadjust them so the center of the backof the occupant’s head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning aboutimproperly positioning head restraints.

16

Seats

Adjusting the Head Restraint

Head Restraints

Instruments

andC

ontrols

157

RELEASE BUTTON

FRONT

SEAT-BACK

LEGS

CUSHION

０９／０３／１３　１５：４７：２５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１６２　

2010 Pilot

The driver’s and front passenger’sseats have active head restraints. Ifthe vehicle is struck severely fromthe rear, the occupant properlysecured with the seat belt will bepushed against the seat-back and thehead restraint will automaticallymove forward.

To remove a head restraint forcleaning or repair, pull it up as far asit will go. Push the release button,then pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

When reinstalling a head restraint,put the legs back in place. Thenadjust it to the appropriate heightwhile pressing the release button.

Make sure the head restraint locksin position when you reinstall it.

Seats

Active Head Restraints

Removing the Head Restraint

158

SECOND CENTER AND THIRD ROW

CUSHION

RELEASE BUTTONLEGS

Failure to reinstall the headrestraints can result in severeinjury during a crash.

Always replace the headrestraints before driving.

０９／０３／１３　１５：４７：３２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１６３　

2010 Pilot

To adjust the second row seatsforward and backward, pull up on thebar under the front edge of the seatcushion. Move the seat to thedesired position and release the bar.Try to move the seat to make sure itis locked in position.

This reduces the distance betweenthe restraint and the occupant’s head.It also helps protect the occupantsagainst whiplash and injuries to theneck and upper spine.

After a collision, the activatedrestraint should return to its normalposition.

If the restraints do not return to theirnormal position, or in the event of asevere collision, have the vehicleinspected by a Honda dealer.

For a head restraint system to workproperly:

Do not hang any items on the headrestraints, or from the restraintlegs.

Only use genuine Hondareplacement head restraints.

Install each restraint in its properlocation.

Do not place any object betweenan occupant and the seat-back.

CONTINUED

Seats

Adjusting the Second Row Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

159

０９／０３／１３　１５：４７：４１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１６４　

2010 Pilot

Reverse this procedure to return theseat to the upright position. Makesure the seat is locked securelybefore driving.

Make sure that the folded seat-backdoes not press against the frontpassenger’s seat, as this could causethe weight sensors to workimproperly.

The left and right halves can befolded separately.

To unlatch the detachable anchorbefore folding the seat-back, insertthe latch plate into the slot on theside of the anchor buckle (seepage ) and allow the seat beltto retract. Store the detachableanchor and seat belt latch plates inthe retractor housing.

Pull up the handle on the outsideof the seat-back.

Lower the head restraints to theirlowest positions.

Fold the seat-back forward.

To change the seat-back angle of theseats in the second row, pull up onthe handle on the outside of the seat-back, and push the seat-back.

2.

3.

4.

1.

162

Seats

Folding the Second Row Seats

160

HANDLE

０９／０３／１３　１５：４７：５０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１６５　

2010 Pilot

To get into the third row seats, pullup the lever on the side of thepassenger’s side second row seat-back. The seat-back will tilt forward,and then can be slid forward.

After you return the seat-back to theupright position, push the whole seatbackwards until it latches. Makesure the seat is fully latched beforesitting in it.

Use the latch plate to release theseat belt from the detachableanchor (see page ).

Lower the head restraints to theirlowest positions.

To fold the third row seat,the second row seat-back must befolded down or in the full up rightposition.

Unlock the seat-back by pullingthe handle. Push the seat-backforward.

Make sure the outer shoulder beltsare positioned in each holding slot onthe side panel whenever the thirdseat is folded.

1.

2.

3.

162

CONTINUED

Third Row Access Folding the Third Row Seat

SeatsInstrum

entsand

Controls

161

NOTE:

HANDLE

RELEASE LEVER

Third seat

０９／０３／１３　１５：４７：５９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１６６　

2010 Pilot

When the seats are returned to theupright position, these detachableanchors should be latched backproperly.

The seat belts in the second rowcenter seat and the third row seatsare equipped with detachableanchors.

To unlatch the detachable anchor,insert the latch plate into the slot onthe side of the anchor buckle. Storethe detachable anchor and seat beltlatch plates in the retractor housing.

Reverse this procedure to return theseat to the upright position. Makesure the seat is locked securelybefore driving. Reconnect the seatbelts to the detachable anchors.

Make sure all items in the cargo areaare secured. Loose items can flyforward and cause injury if you haveto brake hard (Seeon page ).404

Detachable Anchor

Carrying Cargo

Seats

162

LATCH PLATE

Using the seat belt with thedetachable anchor unlatchedincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Before using the seat belt,make sure the detachableanchor is correctly latched.

０９／０３／１３　１５：４８：０６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１６７　

2010 Pilot

Pull out the small latch plate and thelatch plate from each holding slot inthe ceiling, and pull out the seat beltto extend it.

Line up the triangle marks on thesmall latch plate and anchor bucklewhen reattaching the belt and buckle.

Tug on the seat belt to verify thatthe detachable anchor is securelylatched. Make sure the seat belt isnot twisted.

Pull out the outer shoulder beltsfrom the holding slots. Both of thethird-row holding slots should onlybe used when the seat belt isdetached.

SeatsInstrum

entsand

Controls

163

SMALL LATCH PLATE

LATCH PLATE

TRIANGLEMARKS

SECOND ROW AND THIRD ROWCENTER SEATS

SMALL LATCH PLATE

ANCHOR BUCKLE

０９／０３／１３　１５：４８：１２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１６８　

2010 Pilot

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. Because of the sensorsfor the side airbag cutoff system,there is no heater in the passenger’sseat-back. The ignition switch mustbe in the ON (II) position to use theheaters.

The outer second row seat cushionsand seat-backs are equipped withseat heaters. Turning the switch onthe driver side warms the outer seatbehind the driver’s seat only. Thepassenger side switch warms theouter seat behind the frontpassenger seat.

Push the right side of the switch, HI,to rapidly heat up the seat. After theseat reaches a comfortabletemperature, select LO by pushingthe left side of the switch. This willkeep the seat warm.

On EX-L, Touring models, and CanadianEX models

On Canadian Touring models

Seat Heaters

164

HI

Front seat Second row seatHEATERS

Passenger’sSeat

Driver’sSeat LOW

０９／０３／１３　１５：４８：１８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１６９　

2010 Pilot

－

CONTINUED

The windows will operate for up to10 minutes after you turn off theignition switch. Opening either frontdoor cancels this function.

To open either frontwindow fully, push the windowswitch firmly down to the seconddetent, then release it. The windowautomatically goes down all the way.To stop the window from going allthe way down, pull back on thewindow switch briefly.

In the HI setting, the heater turns offwhen the seat gets warm, and turnsback on after the seat’s temperaturedrops.

In the LO setting, the heater runscontinuously. It does not cycle withtemperature changes.

Follow these precautions when usingthe seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to raise or lower anywindow. To open a window, push theswitch down and hold it. Release theswitch when you want the window tostop. Pull back on the switch andhold it to close the window.

AUTO

Power Windows

Seat Heaters, Power WindowsInstrum

entsand

Controls

165

DRIVER’S WINDOWSWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

０９／０３／１３　１５：４８：２７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１７０　

2010 Pilot

－ If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or thedriver’s window fuse is removed, theAUTO function may be disabled. Ifthe AUTO function is disabled, thepower window system will need to bereset after reconnecting the batteryor installing the fuse.

Start the engine. Push down andhold the driver’s window switchuntil the window is fully open.

Pull and hold the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor about 2 seconds.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.

If either frontwindow senses any obstacle while itis closing automatically, it willreverse direction and then stop. Toclose the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

To close either front window fully,pull back the window switch firmlyto the second detent, then release it.The window automatically goes allthe way up. To stop the window fromgoing all the way up, push down onthe window switch briefly.

When you push the MAIN switch in,the switch is off, and the passengers’windows cannot be raised or lowered.To cancel this feature, push on theswitch again to get it to pop out.Keep the MAIN switch pushed inwhen you have children in thevehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thewindows unintentionally.

1.

2.

AUTO REVERSE

Power Windows

166

０９／０３／１３　１５：４８：３４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１７１　

2010 Pilot

Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

Turn the key clockwise, thenrelease it.

Turn the key clockwise again, andhold it. All four windows and themoonroof start to open. To stopthe windows and the moonroof,release the key.

To open:

You cannot close the windows or themoonroof with the remotetransmitter.

To open the windows andmoonroof further, press thebutton again (within 10 seconds ofstep 1) and hold it. If the windowsand the moonroof stop before thedesired position, repeat steps 1and 2.

Press the UNLOCK button asecond time, and hold it. All thedoors unlock, and all four windowsand moonroof start to open. Tostop the windows and moonroof,release the button.

Press the UNLOCK button onceto unlock the driver’s door.

To open the windows and themoonroof further, turn and holdthe key again (within 10 secondsof step 2).

To close:Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

Turn the key counterclockwise,then release it.

Turn the key counterclockwiseagain, and hold it. All fourwindows and the moonroof start toclose. To stop the windows andthe moonroof, release the key.

You can open all of the windows andthe moonroof (if equipped) from theoutside with the remote transmitter.

You can open and close the windowsand the moonroof (if equipped) withthe key in the driver’s door lock.

1.

2.

2.

3.

3.

1.

2.

3.

4.1.

CONTINUED

Opening/Closing the Windowsand Moonroof with the Key

Opening the Windows andMoonroof with the RemoteTransmitter

Power WindowsInstrum

entsand

Controls

167

０９／０３／１３　１５：４８：４７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１７２　

2010 Pilot

To tilt up the moonroof, push on thecenter of the moonroof switch. Tostop the moonroof from tilting upfully, push the switch briefly.

To close the moonroof fully, firmlypush the moonroof switch forward,then release it. The moonroofautomatically closes all the way. Tostop the moonroof from closing,push the switch briefly.

To open or close the moonroofpartially, pull back or push forwardthe moonroof switch lightly and holdit. The moonroof will stop when yourelease the switch.

To close the windows and themoonroof further, turn and holdthe key again (within 10 secondsof step 2).

Auto reverse does not work whenclosing the windows and moonroofwith the key.

If the windows and themoonroof stop before the desiredposition, repeat steps 2 and 3.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position before operating themoonroof switch on the ceilingconsole.

To open the moonroof fully, pullback the moonroof switch firmly.The moonroof opens all the way. Tostop the moonroof from openingfully, push the switch briefly.

4.


Moonroof

Power Windows, Moonroof

168

NOTE:

MOONROOF SWITCH

０９／０３／１３　１５：４８：５５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１７３　

2010 Pilot

－ You can open and close themoonroof for up to 10 minutes afteryou turn off the ignition switch.Opening either front door cancelsthis function.

To apply the parking brake, push thepedal down with your foot. Torelease it, pull the release handlefully. The parking brake indicator onthe instrument panel should go outwhen the parking brake is fullyreleased (see page ).

Auto reverse stops sensing when themoonroof is almost closed. Youshould always check that allpassengers and objects are awayfrom the moonroof before closing it.

If themoonroof runs into any obstaclewhile it is closing automatically, itwill reverse direction and then stop.To close the moonroof, remove theobstacle, then use the moonroofswitch again.

You can use the remote transmitteror the key to operate the moonrooffrom the outside. Refer to page

for details.16771

CONTINUED

Parking BrakeAUTO REVERSE

Operating the Moonroof with theRemote Transmitter or the Key

Moonroof, Parking BrakeInstrum

entsand

Controls

169

RELEASE HANDLE

PARKING BRAKE PEDAL

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or itsmotor.

０９／０３／１３　１５：４９：０４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１７４　

2010 Pilot

You will also see a ‘‘RELEASEPARKING BRAKE’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

The inside mirror can automaticallydarken to reduce glare. To turn onthis feature, press the button on thebottom of the mirror. The AUTOindicator comes on as a reminder.When it is on, the mirror darkenswhen it senses the headlights of avehicle behind you, then returns tonormal visibility when the lights aregone. Press the button again to turnoff this feature.

95

On LX and EX models

On Touring models


Mirrors

Parking Brake, Mirrors

170

AUTO BUTTONINDICATOR

SENSOR

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and hubs. A beeper will sound ifthe vehicle is driven with the parkingbrake on.

０９／０３／１３　１５：４９：１２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１７５　

2010 Pilot

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns theadjustment switch off to keep yoursettings.

When you shift to reverse with theignition switch in the ON (II)position, the rear view is shown onthe left side of the inside mirror. Formore information, see page .

1.

2.

3.

4.391

On EX-L models

Mirrors

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

Instruments

andC

ontrols

171

SELECTOR SWITCH

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

There is also a sensor on the back ofthe mirror. Items hung on the mirrormay block this sensor and af f ect itsperf ormance.

０９／０３／１３　１５：４９：２０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１７６　

2010 Pilot

Outside mirror positions can bestored in the driving positionmemory system (see page ).

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off. Pressing this button alsoturns the rear window defogger onand off.

To turn the feature off, place theswitch in the center position.

To tilt the passenger’s mirror,place the switch in the rightposition.

To tilt the driver’s mirror, placethe selector switch in the leftposition.

Both outside door mirrors have areverse tilt feature. When in reverse,the selected mirror will tilt downslightly to improve your view as youparallel park. Shifting out of reversewill return the mirror to its originalposition.

173

On Touring models


Mirrors

Reverse Tilt Door Mirror Heated Mirrors

172

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

０９／０３／１３　１５：４９：２７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１７７　

2010 Pilot

Adjust the seat to a comfortableposition (see page ).

Store a driving position only whenthe vehicle is parked.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. You cannot add anew driving position to thememory unless the ignition switchis in the ON (II) position. You canrecall a memorized position withthe ignition switch in any position.

Your vehicle has a memory featurefor the driver’s seat and outsidemirror positions.

Two seat and outside mirrorpositions can be stored in separatememories. You select a memorizedposition by pushing the appropriatebutton or using the appropriateremote transmitter (Driver 1 orDriver 2).

You can change the ‘‘MEMORYPOSITION LINK’’ setting on themulti-information display (see page

). Adjust the outside mirrors for bestvisibility (see page ).

Press and release the SET buttonon the control panel. You will heara beep. Immediately press andhold one of the memory buttons (1or 2) until you hear two beeps.The indicator in the memorybutton will come on. The currentpositions of the driver’s seat andoutside mirrors are now stored.

1.

2.

3.

4.

109

154

171

CONTINUED

On Touring models Storing a Driving Position inMemory

Driving Position Memory SystemInstrum

entsand

Controls

173

MEMORY BUTTONS

SET BUTTON

０９／０３／１３　１５：４９：３６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１７８　

2010 Pilot

Fail to press a memory buttonwithin 5 seconds.

To cancel the storing procedureafter pressing the SET button, doany of the following:

Pressing the SET button againwithin 5 seconds.

Readjusting the outside mirrorposition.

Readjust the seat position.

To select a memorized position, dothis:


Press the desired memory button(1 or 2) until you hear a beep, thenrelease the button.

Each memory button stores only onedriving position. Storing a newposition erases the previous settingstored in that button’s memory. Ifyou want to add a new position whileretaining the current one, use theother memory button.

All stored driving positions will belost if your vehicle’s battery goesdead or is disconnected.

The system will move the seat andoutside mirrors to the memorizedpositions. The indicator in theselected memory button will flashduring movement. When theadjustments are complete, you willhear two beeps, and the indicator willremain on.

1.

2.

Driving Position Memory System

Selecting a Memorized Position

174

０９／０３／１３　１５：４９：４５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１７９　

2010 Pilot

To stop the system’s automaticadjustment, do any of these actions:

Push any of the adjustmentswitches for the seat.Shift out of Park.Adjust the outside mirrors.

If desired, you can use theadjustment switches to change thepositions of the seat or outsidemirrors after they are in theirmemorized positions. If you changethe memorized position, theindicator in the memory button willgo out. To keep this driving positionfor later use, you must store it in thedriving position memory.

Press any button on the controlpanel: SET, 1, or 2.

Driving Position Memory SystemInstrum

entsand

Controls

175

０９／０３／１３　１５：４９：５１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１８０　

2010 Pilot

The light control switch has threepositions: OFF, Door Activated, andON.

The individual map lights come onwhen any door or the tailgate isopened, or when the remotetransmitter is used to unlock thedoors. When the doors and thetailgate are closed, each light canbe turned on and off by pushingthe lens.

The cargo area light comes onwhen the tailgate is opened if thelight control switch is in the dooractivated (center) position. Whenthe tailgate is closed, the cargoarea light can be turned on withthe switch in the light.

The individual door lights willoperate when a door is opened.

The individual map lights in thefront can be turned on and off bypressing the lenses.

The individual map lights in thesecond and third rows cannot beturned on.

When the switch is in the door activatedposition:

When the switch is in the OFF position:Light Control Switch

Interior Lights

176

OFF

ON

DOOR ACTIVATED POSITION

０９／０３／１３　１５：４９：５８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１８１　

2010 Pilot

When the light control switch is in theposition:

On Touring models

ONAfter all doors are closed tightly, thelights dim slightly, then fade out inabout 30 seconds.

Turn on the front row individual maplights by pushing the lens. Push thelens again to turn it off. With thelight control switch in the dooractivated position, the second rowand third row map lights can beturned on by pushing the lens. Pushthe lens again to turn it off.

To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIME’’ setting, see page

.

The lights also come on when thekey is removed from the ignitionswitch.

With any door or the tailgate leftopen, the lights stay on about 15minutes, then go out.

All the individual map lights come onand stay on as long as the switchremains in the ON position.

111

CONTINUED

Individual Map Lights

Interior LightsInstrum

entsand

Controls

177

FRONT

０９／０３／１３　１５：５０：０６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１８２　

2010 Pilot

The courtesy light between the frontmap lights comes on when you turnthe parking lights on. To adjust itsbrightness, turn the instrumentpanel brightness control dial on thedashboard (see page ).

The courtesy lights in all four doorscome on when you open any door.The light around the ignition switchonly comes on when you open thedriver’s door. After you close thedoor, the ignition switch light stayson for several seconds.

To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIME’’ setting, see page

.

The cargo area light has a three-position switch. In the OFF position,the light does not come on. In thecenter position, the light comes onwhen you open the tailgate or theglass hatch. In the ON position, thelight stays on continuously.

131

111

On Touring models

Individual Interior LightsCargo Area Light

Interior Lights

178

ON

OFF

COURTESY LIGHT

０９／０３／１３　１５：５０：１４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１８３　

2010 Pilot

＊

＊

＊ : If equipped

Interior Convenience ItemsInstrum

entsand

Controls

179

SUN VISORVANITY MIRROR

GROCERY HOOK

ARMREST/BEVERAGE HOLDER

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

SUNGLASSES HOLDERCONVERSATION MIRROR

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETINTEGRATED SUNSHADE

BEVERAGE HOLDERS

STORAGE COMPARTMENTS

GLOVE BOX

COAT HOOK

０９／０３／１３　１５：５０：１９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１８４　

2010 Pilot

To close, lower the armrest, andpush it down until it latches.

To open the front of the consolecompartment, squeeze the knob, andpush it forward. To close, squeezethe knob and slide the coverbackward.

To open the rear of the consolecompartment, pull up on the leverand lift the armrest.

Your vehicle has a multi-functioncenter console. It includes beverageholders, storage compartments, anarmrest, and a storage tray.

Interior Convenience Items

Center Console Console Compartments

180

LEVER

CONSOLE FRONT COMPARTMENT CONSOLE REAR COMPARTMENT

０９／０３／１３　１５：５０：２６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１８５　

2010 Pilot

CONTINUED

There is a removable partition in themain compartment area. Thepartition can be used to divide theforward compartment from thebeverage holder area, or can bestored to the rear of the beveragearea to create a deeper storage tray.

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Liquid can also spillfrom the door pocket beverageholders when you open or close thedoors. Use only resealablecontainers in the door pockets.

Spilled liquids can damage theupholstery, carpeting, and electricalcomponents in the interior.


Beverage Holders

Instruments

andC

ontrols

181

０９／０３／１３　１５：５０：３１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１８６　

2010 Pilot

To open the compartment, pull thelever and lift the lid. To close, lowerthe lid and push it down until itlatches.

The center seat-back in the secondrow is equipped with an armrest thatprovides the beverage holder. Pivotdown the seat-back to use them.

To open the beverage holder,squeeze the knob, and slide thecover forward.


Storage Compartment

182

BEVERAGE HOLDER

０９／０３／１３　１５：５０：３７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１８７　

2010 Pilot

To open the sunglasses holder, pushon the front edge. Make sure theholder is closed while you are driving.

Some larger styles of sunglassesmay not fit in the holder.

Each rear door has an integratedsunshade. To use a sunshade, holdthe tab on the top, and pull thesunshade all the way up. Insert theholes on the sunshade into the hookson the window frame.

Open the glove box by pulling up onthe handle. Close it with a firm push.Lock or unlock the glove box withthe master key.

The glove box light comes on whenthe parking lights are on.

CONTINUED

On Touring models


Sunglasses HolderIntegrated SunshadesGlove Box

Instruments

andC

ontrols

183

TAB

HOOK

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

Push

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

０９／０３／１３　１５：５０：４７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１８８　

2010 Pilot

To use the sun visor, pull it down.When using the sun visor for theside window, remove the support rodfrom the clip, and swing it out.

In this position, the sun visor can beadjusted by moving it on its slider.Do not use the extended sun visorover the inside mirror.Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle.

You may also store small items inthis holder. Make sure they aresmall enough to let the holder closeand latch, and that they are notheavy enough to cause the holder topop open while driving.

The sunglasses holder uses a convexmirror for its bottom panel. You cansee all the vehicle passengers in thismirror. To use the mirror, open thesunglasses holder fully, push it to thefirst detent, and release it.



Sun VisorConversation Mirror

184

Slide

SUN VISOR

０９／０３／１３　１５：５０：５５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１８９　

2010 Pilot

To use the vanity mirror on the backof the sun visor, pull up the cover.

These hooks are not designed forlarge or heavy items. Your vehicle has a seat under tray

located under the front passengerseat. Use the tray by pulling on thefront center edge of the tray.

On Touring models


Coat HooksVanity Mirror Seat Under Tray

Instruments

andC

ontrols

185

０９／０３／１３　１５：５１：０１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１９０　

2010 Pilot

Your vehicle has four accessorypower sockets. These are located onthe instrument panel, in the consolecompartment, back of the centerconsole box, or behind the third rowseat on the passenger’s side.

To use an accessory power socket,the ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

Each socket is intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).


Accessory Power Sockets

186

０９／０３／１３　１５：５１：０７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１９１　

2010 Pilot

CONTINUED

There is a 115 volt AC power outletinside the front consolecompartment. To use the AC poweroutlet, open the lids and open theoutlet cover. Insert the plug into thereceptacle slightly, turn it 90°clockwise, then push in the plug allthe way.

None of the sockets will power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement.

Always run the engine when you usethe AC power outlet.

The maximum capacity for thispower outlet is 115 volt AC at 100watts or less. If you use an appliancewhich requires more than 100 watts,it automatically stops supplying thepower. If this happens, turn theignition switch off and turn it onagain.

Make sure to put the socket coverback in place to prevent any smallforeign objects from getting into thesocket.

On vehicles with rear entertainmentsystem and on Touring models


AC Power Outlet

Instruments

andC

ontrols

187

REAR

０９／０３／１３　１５：５１：１５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１９２　

2010 Pilot

The AC power outlet is notdesigned for electric applianceswhich require high initial peakwattage such as cathode-ray tubetype televisions, refrigerators,electric pumps, etc. It is also notsuitable for devices that processprecise data such as medicalequipment or measuring instruments.Any appliances that require anextremely stable power supply suchas microcomputer-controlled electricblankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.,should not be connected to thisoutlet. The hooks on the floor of the cargo

area enable you to tie down itemsstored in the back. Make sure allstored items are secured beforedriving.

Additional storage space for largeitems can be accessed by strappingthe cargo floor to the seat back.


Cargo Hooks Cargo Floor StorageCompartment

188

NOTE:

HOOK

０９／０３／１３　１５：５１：２０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１９３　

2010 Pilot

The maximum load on the cargo netis 22 lbs on U.S. models, and 10 kgon Canadian models. This is shownon a label back of the cargo areafloor (see page ). To preventdamage to the cargo net, do notexceed the maximum load.

Make sure all items in the cargo areaare secured. Loose items can flyforward and cause injury if you haveto brake hard (Seeon page ).

When any of the third row seats arefolded down, do not place anyobjects on the cargo net. Make sureto store the cargo net under thecargo area floor. It could beunlatched during a crash.

Make sure to use the cargo netsecurely hooked.

The cargo net will separate thestorage area into two storage areas.On the upper area, you can storesmall and light items. You shouldplace heavy items in the lowerstorage area. You can store thecargo net under the cargo floor tomake a larger cargo area.

190

404

CONTINUED

On Touring models


Carrying Cargo

Cargo Net

Instruments

andC

ontrols

189

Do not use this cargo net if thethird row seats are folded down.

Objects placed on the cargo netcould be thrown forward duringa crash or sudden stop and hurtsomeone.

０９／０３／１３　１５：５１：２８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１９４　

2010 Pilot

To prevent damage, do not placemore than 22 lbs (10 kg) on thiscargo net.


190

０９／０３／１３　１５：５１：３２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１９５　

2010 Pilot

The standard audio system hasmany features. This sectiondescribes those features and how touse them.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

The heating and air conditioningsystem in your vehicle provides acomfortable driving environment inall weather conditions.

The security system helps to dis-courage vandalism and theft of yourvehicle.

The climate control system and theaudio system have a voice controlfeature. Refer to the navigationsystem manual for more information.

..............Vents, Heating and A/C . 192.........Using the Rear A/C Unit . 197

...............Climate Control System . 199..............Rear Climate Controls . 204

................................Audio System . 208

..........Playing the FM/AM Radio . 210................................Playing a Disc . 218

.......Disc Player Error Messages . 225

................................Audio System . 226..........Playing the FM/AM Radio . 227

................Playing the XM Radio . 236.................................Playing Discs . 242

...Disc Changer Error Messages . 251

................................Audio System . 252..........Playing the FM/AM Radio . 253

................Playing the XM Radio . 266.................................Playing Discs . 274

...Disc Changer Error Messages . 284..................Protecting Your Discs . 285

............................Playing an iPod . 288.................iPod Error Messages . 297

Playing a USB Flash Memory........................................Device . 298

USB Flash Memory Device Error...................................Messages . 307

............FM/AM Radio Reception . 308......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 310

................Remote Audio Controls . 311.................Radio Theft Protection . 313

..........................Setting the Clock . 314........Rear Entertainment System . 317

............................Security System . 349...............................Cruise Control . 350

.........................................Compass . 353HomeLink Universal

................................Transceiver . 357........HandsFreeLink . 361

................Parking Sensor System . 386...Rearview Camera and Monitor . 390

LX models

EX and EX-L models withoutnavigation system

Models with navigation systemBluetooth

On vehicles with navigation system

Except LX models

FeaturesF

eatures

191

０９／０５／２５　０９：５５：０６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１９６　

2010 Pilot

Vents, Heating, and A/C

192

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

FAN CONTROL BUTTONS

LX modelsTEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL

WINDSHIELDDEFROSTER BUTTON

RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

AIR CONDITIONING(A/C) BUTTON

MODE CONTROL BUTTONS

FAN CONTROLBUTTON


OFF BUTTON

ON/OFF BUTTON


MAX A/C BUTTON

REAR PASSENGERCOMPARTMENTTEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

０９／０３／１３　１５：５１：４４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１９７　

2010 Pilot

▲

▼

Press the button to increasethe fan speed and airflow. Press the

button to decrease it.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

When the indicator in the button ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.


Fan Control

Temperature Control

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button Recirculation Button

Features

193

０９／０３／１３　１５：５１：５３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１９８　

2010 Pilot

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and defroster vents atthe base of the windshield.

Air flows from the floorvents. When you select , thesystem automatically switches tofresh air mode.

When you switch to from, the A/C stays on, and you

can turn it on and off manually.

The system automaticallyturns on the A/C and switches toRecirculation mode. Air flows fromthe center and side vents in thedashboard.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Use the mode control buttons toselect the vents air flows from. Someair will flow from the dashboardcorner vents in all modes.

Pushing this button also turns thepower mirror heaters on and off.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page ).

/

130



Mode Control

Rear Window DefoggerButton

194

０９／０３／１３　１５：５２：０６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０１９９　

2010 Pilot

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red mark,turn off the A/C until the gaugereads normally.

The ventilation system draws inoutside air, circulates it through theinterior, then exhausts it throughvents near the rear side panels.

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. You will see A/C ON inthe display.Make sure the temperature is setto the lower limit.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectrecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

1.2.3.

1.

2.3.4.

82

CONTINUED


Using the A/CVentilation Using the Heater

Features

195

０９／０３／１３　１５：５２：１８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２００　

2010 Pilot

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theair conditioning, and setting the fanto maximum speed in fresh air mode.

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

Switch the fan on.Turn on the air conditioning.Select and fresh air mode.Adjust the temperature to yourpreference.

Set the fan to the desired speed, orhigh for faster defrosting.Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. TheA/C indicator will not come on if itwas off to start with.Adjust the temperature so theairflow feels warm.Select / to helpclear the rear window.To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the corner vents.

Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C.The A/C indicator does not comeon if it was off to start with.Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents byrotating the wheel next to each vent.This sends more warm air to thewindshield defroster vents. Once thewindshield is clear, select fresh airmode to avoid fogging the windows.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

When you switch to another modefrom , the A/C turns off. Butif it was on to start with, it stays on.

1.2.3.4.

1.

1.

2.

3.

4.

2.3.

5.

If the interior is very warm,


To Defog and Defrost To Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows

Dehumidify the Interior

196

０９／０３／１３　１５：５２：３０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２０１　

2010 Pilot

▲

▼

To turn the system completely off,press the ON/OFF button.

Keep the system completely offfor short periods only.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

The rear passengers can adjust thefan speed, temperature, and airflowof the rear A/C unit with the rearcontrol panel. Press the temperature control

button to increase the temperatureof airflow, and the button todecrease it. The temperature youadjust is shown in the system display.

CONTINUED


To Turn Everything Off

Using the Rear A/C Unit

Rear Control Panel

Temperature Control

Features

197


OFF BUTTON

REAR PASSENGERCOMPARTMENTTEMPERATURE CONTROLBUTTONS

FAN CONTROL BUTTON

０９／０３／１３　１５：５２：３９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２０２　

2010 Pilot

▲

▼

Press the fan control buttonto increase the fan speed and airflow.Press the button todecrease it. The level of the fanspeed is shown in the display.

When is selected, air flowsfrom the upper vents on the back ofthe center console.

When is selected, air flowsfrom the lower vents.

To shut off the rear A/C unit, pressthe OFF button until the systemshuts off.

To turn on the rear A/C unit,increase the fan speed and airflow.

Fan Control Mode Control


198

０９／０３／１３　１５：５２：４７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２０３　

2010 Pilot

Climate Control System

FRONT CONTROL PANEL

REAR CONTROL PANEL

Except LX models

Features

199

AUTO BUTTON

MODE BUTTON

MODEBUTTON

RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

FAN CONTROLBUTTONS

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER BUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

ON/OFF BUTTON

AUTO BUTTON

REAR PASSENGERCOMPARTMENTTEMPERATURE


FAN CONTROL BUTTON

RR (REAR) LOCK BUTTON


AIR CONDITIONING(A/C) BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDE TEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

FRONT PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURE CONTROL BUTTONS

０９／０３／１３　１５：５２：５３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２０４　

2010 Pilot

▲

▼

The automatic climate controlsystem in your vehicle maintains theinterior temperature you select. Thesystem also adjusts the fan speedand airflow levels.

The system automatically selectsthe proper mix of conditionedand/or heated air that will, asquickly as possible, raise or lowerthe interior temperature to yourpreference.

The driver’s side temperature, thepassenger’s side temperature andthe rear passenger compartmenttemperature can be set separately.Press the button of theappropriate temperature control toincrease the temperature of airflow.Press the button to decrease it.Each set temperature is shown in thedisplay. The rear temperature isshown in the display on the back ofthe center console.

The climate control system can alsobe operated by voice control. See thenavigation system manual forcomplete details.

Press the Auto button on the frontcontrol panel.

Set the desired temperature withthe temperature control buttons.You will see AUTO in the system’sdisplay.

You can set the driver’s sidetemperature, the passenger’s sidetemperature, and the temperatureof the rear passengercompartment separately.

1.

2.

3.

On vehicles with navigation systemUsing Automatic Climate ControlVoice Control System

Temperature Control


200

０９／０３／１３　１５：５３：０１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２０５　

2010 Pilot

When you press a fan control button,the fan is taken out of AUTO mode.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit ( ) or its upper limit( ), the system runs at fullcooling or heating only. It does notregulate the interior temperature.

In the Auto mode, the vehicle’sinterior temperature isindependently regulated for thedriver, front passenger, and rearpassengers according to eachadjusted temperature. The systemalso regulates each temperaturebased on the information of thesunlight sensor and the sun’sposition which is updatedautomatically by the navigation’sglobal positioning system (GPS). Forexample, if the driver’s side of thevehicle is getting too much sun, thesystem will adjust to a lowertemperature.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the temperatureof the rear passenger compartmentis synchronized to the driver’s sideset temperature. You will see SYNCon the system display of the rearcontrol panel. Changing thetemperature of the rear passengercompartment takes the system outof synchronized mode. This causesthe word SYNC in the display to goout and displays the reartemperature in the front display.When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position and see LOCKon the system display of the frontand rear control panels, thetemperature of the rear passengercompartment is not synchronized tothe driver’s side set temperature.

On vehicles with navigation system RR (Rear) Lock Button

Climate Control SystemF

eatures

201

０９／０３／１３　１５：５３：０８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２０６　

2010 Pilot

▲

▼

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in fully automaticmode. All other features remainautomatically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordAUTO in the display to go out.

Press the button to increasethe fan speed and airflow. Press the

button to decrease it.

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

When you turn the A/C off, thesystem cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set thetemperature control below theoutside temperature.

When the indicator in the button ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent through the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

The outside air intakes for theclimate control system are at thebase of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

To turn the system completely off,press the ON/OFF button.

Keep the system completely offfor short periods only.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

Semi-automatic OperationTo Turn Everything Off

Fan Control

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Recirculation Button


202

０９／０３／１３　１５：５３：１９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２０７　

2010 Pilot

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor and corner vents and thedefroster vents at the base of thewindshield.

This button directs the main airflowto the windshield for fasterdefrosting. It also overrides anymode selection you may have made.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. Forfaster defrosting, manually set thefan speed to high. You can alsoincrease airflow to the windshield byclosing the corner vents on thedashboard. To close the vents, rotatethe wheel under each corner vent.

When you turn off bypressing the button again, thesystem returns to its former settings.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger off and on (see page ).

Pushing this button also turns thepower mirror heaters on and off.

Use the mode control button toselect the vents the air flows from.Some air will flow from thedashboard vents in all modes.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the floorvents.

When the indicator in the button ison, the front passenger’stemperature cannot be set separatelyfrom the driver’s.

130

Windshield Defroster Button

Rear Window Defogger Button

Mode Control


eatures

203

０９／０３／１３　１５：５３：３２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２０８　

2010 Pilot

▲

▼

When this button is on, you will seeLOCK on the system display. Therear climate controls can only becontrolled by the front control panel.

Press the temperature controlbutton to increase the temperatureof airflow, and the button todecrease it. The temperature youadjust is shown in the system display.

Rear Climate Controls

RR (Rear) Lock Button Temperature Control


204

MODE BUTTONRR LOCK BUTTON

REAR CONTROL PANEL

AUTO BUTTON

OFF BUTTON

REAR PASSENGERCOMPARTMENTTEMPERATURE


FAN CONTROLBUTTON

０９／０３／１３　１５：５３：３９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２０９　

2010 Pilot

▲

▼

▲ ▼

Press the fan control buttonto increase the fan speed and airflow.Press the button todecrease it. The level of the fanspeed is shown in the display.

Each time you press the modebutton, the mode display changesfrom to .

When is selected, air flowsfrom the upper vents on the back ofthe center console.

When is selected, air flowsfrom the lower vents.

Pressing the AUTO button puts thesystem in automatic operation mode.The rear system automaticallyadjusts the fan speed and airflowlevels to maintain the selectedtemperature of the rear passengercompartment. You will see AUTO inthe display.

To shut off the rear climate controlsystem, press the OFF button untilthe system shuts off.

The temperatures of the driver’s sideand the front passenger’s side arecontrolled independently.

When the RR (REAR) LOCK buttonis off, the temperature of the rearpassenger compartment can becontrolled independently.

To adjust each temperature, presseither of the temperature controlbuttons ( or ) on the climatecontrol panel.

CONTINUED


Fan Control

Mode Control

Automatic Operation Triple Zone Temperature Control

Features

205

０９／０３／１３　１５：５３：５０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２１０　

2010 Pilot

When you set each temperature toits lower limit or its upper limit, it willbe displayed as ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’.


206

Rear Passenger Compartment

Passenger’s SideDriver’s Side

０９／０３／１３　１５：５３：５６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２１１　

2010 Pilot

The climate control system has twosensors: a sunlight sensor on top ofthe dashboard, and a temperatureand humidity sensor next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

Sunlight and TemperatureSensors


eatures

207

TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSORSUNLIGHT SENSOR

０９／０３／１３　１５：５４：０１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２１２　

2010 Pilot

An audio system is standard on allmodels. Read the appropriate pages(as shown below) to use yourvehicle’s audio system.

For vehicles with rear entertainmentsystem, see pages through .

For LX models, see pagesthrough .

For vehicles with navigation system,see pages through .

For vehicles without navigationsystem, see pages through .

225

226 251

252 307

317 348

210

Audio System

208

LX models EX and EX-L models without rearentertainment system

EX-L models with rear entertainment system

０９／０５／２５　０９：５５：１７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２１３　

2010 Pilot

Audio SystemF

eatures

209

Touring models without rear entertainment system Touring models with rear entertainment system

０９／０３／１３　１５：５４：１８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２１４　

2010 Pilot

Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX model)

210

SKIP BUTTONS

PRESET BUTTONS

FM BUTTON

AM BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

TITLE BUTTON

TUNE/SOUND KNOBFOLDER BAR

A.SEL (AUTO SELECT) BUTTON

０９／０３／１３　１５：５４：２３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２１５　

2010 Pilot

－

－

－The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thepower/volume knob or the AM orFM button. Adjust the volume byturning the power/volume knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button. On the FM band, ST willbe displayed if the station is broad-casting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

On the AM band, AM noisereduction turns on automatically.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, skip, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.

On the FM band, you can also usethe features provided by the radiodata system (RDS). For moreinformation on the RDS, see page

.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob to the right to tune toa higher frequency, and turn it to theleft to tune to a lower frequency.

The skip function searchesup and down from the currentfrequency to find a station with astrong signal. To activate it, presseither of the SKIP buttons ( or

), then release it.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.When the system finds a strongsignal, it will stop and play thatstation for about 10 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 10 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

213

CONTINUED

To Select a StationTo Play the FM/AM Radio

TUNE

SKIP

SCAN

Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX model)F

eatures

211

０９／０３／１３　１５：５４：３２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２１６　

2010 Pilot

－

－

－ If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

Each preset button canstore one frequency on AM and twofrequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. You can store one frequencyon FM1, and one frequency on FM2 with each preset button.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

Pick a preset button (1 6), andhold it until you hear a beep.

Use the tune, skip, scan, or RDSfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Press the A. SEL button. You will seeA. SEL flashing in the display, andthe system goes into scan mode forseveral seconds. It stores thefrequencies of six AM, and twelveFM stations in the preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button.

, press theA. SEL (auto select) button. Thisrestores the presets you originallyset.

For information on FM/AM radiofrequencies and reception, see page

.

If you aretraveling and can no longer receiveyour preset stations, you can use theauto select feature to find stations inthe local area.1.

2.

3.

4.

308

To turn off auto select

Preset AUTO SELECT


212

０９／０３／１３　１５：５４：４１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２１７　

2010 Pilot

On the FM band, you can select afavorite station and display theprogram service name provided bythe radio data system (RDS).

If the station you are listening to isnot an RDS station, the displaycontinues to show the frequencywith the PS name display function on.

To switch the function between onand off, press and release the TITLEbutton. With the system on, you willsee the ‘‘PS NAME ON’’ message onthe display. If the station you arelistening to is an RDS station, thedisplayed frequency switches to thestation name.

When you turn off this function bypressing the TITLE button, thedisplay shows ‘‘PS NAME OFF.’’The program service name display

function shows the name of thestation you are listening to. You canturn this function on or off.

CONTINUED


Radio Data System (RDS)

Program Service (PS) Name Display

Features

213

０９／０３／１３　１５：５４：４７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２１８　

2010 Pilot

－＋

SOFT: Adult hits and soft musicTOP 40: Top 40 hitsOLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldiesR & B: Rhythm and blues, and softrhythm and blues

INFO: News, information, sports,talk shows, foreign language,personality, public, college, andweather

JAZZ: JazzCLASSIC: Classical music

RELIGION: Programs concernedwith religion

If the system does not find a station,‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking forabout 5 seconds, then the systemgoes back to the last selected station.

With the FM band selected, you canselect the program categoryprovided by the RDS. Press eitherside of the FOLDER bar ( or )to display and select an RDScategory. The principal RDScategories are shown as follows;

ALL: All RDS category stationsROCK: Rock, classic rock and softrock musicCOUNTRY: Country music

This function searches up and downa frequency for the strongest signalfrom the frequencies that carry theselected RDS category information.This can help you to find a station inyour favorite category. To activate it,press and release either of the SKIPbuttons ( or ). You will seethe selected RDS category nameblinking while searching it. Whenthe system finds a station, theselected RDS category name will bedisplayed again for about 10 seconds.TRAFFIC: Traffic information

Press either side of the FOLDER barto select an RDS category. Thedisplay shows the selected RDScategory name for a few seconds.You can use the search or scanfunction to find radio stations on theselected RDS category. If you donothing while the RDS categoryname is displayed, the selectedcategory is canceled.


Radio Data System (RDS) Category RDS Program Search

214

０９／０３／１３　１５：５４：５９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２１９　

2010 Pilot

The scan function samples allstations with strong signals on theselected RDS category. To activate it,press and release the SCAN button.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal in the selectedRDS category. You will also see theselected RDS category nameblinking while searching it. When itfinds a strong signal, it will stop andplay that station for about 10 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willscan for the next strong station andplay it for 10 seconds. When it playsa station that you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.


You can use the RDS programsearch or scan function even if thePS name display function is off. Inthis case, the display shows afrequency in place of a PS name.


RDS Program SCAN

Features

215

０９／０３／１３　１５：５５：０５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２２０　

2010 Pilot

－

－

－

－

－

－

Adjusts the volume levelbased on the vehicle speed.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the TUNE knob toadjust the setting to your liking.

When the level reaches the center,you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.

The system will return to the audiodisplay about 10 seconds after youstop adjusting a mode.

Press the TUNE (SOUND) knobrepeatedly to display the BASS,TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE,SUBWOOFER, and SVC (speed-sensitive volume compensation)settings.

Adjusts the bass.

Adjusts the treble.

Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound.

Adjusts the side-to-side strength of the sound.

The SVC mode controls the volumebased on vehicle speed. The fasteryou go, the louder the audio volumebecomes. As you slow down, theaudio volume decreases.

The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVCHIGH. Turn the TUNE knob toadjust the setting to your liking. Ifyou feel the sound is too loud,choose low. If you feel the sound istoo quiet, choose high.

Adjusts thestrength of sound from thesubwoofer speaker.

Except SVC adjustment

Adjusting the Sound SVC

BASS

TREBLE

FADER

BALANCE

SUBWOOFER


Speed-sensitive VolumeCompensation (SVC)

216

０９／０３／１３　１５：５５：１５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２２１　

2010 Pilot

This function is set to MID as thedefault setting when the vehicleleaves the factory.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

131


Audio System Lighting

Features

217

０９／０３／１３　１５：５５：１９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２２２　

2010 Pilot

Playing a Disc (LX model)

218

SKIP BUTTONS

SCAN BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

CD BUTTON

FOLDER BAR

LOAD INDICATOR

TITLE BUTTON

EJECT BUTTON

TUNE/SOUND KNOB

RPT/RDM (REPEAT/RANDOM)BAR

A.SEL (AUTO SELECT) BUTTON

０９／０３／１３　１５：５５：２３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２２３　

2010 Pilot

－

－

－

－To load or play a disc, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position.

The specifications for compatibleMP3 files are:

Bitrate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps(MPEG1)8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)Compatible with variable bitrateand multi-sessionMaximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

This audio system can also playCD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed inMP3 or WMA formats. Whenplaying a disc in MP3, you will see‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMAformat, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in thedisplay. You can select up to 99folders, or up to 255 tracks/files.

You operate the disc player with thesame controls used for the radio. Toselect the disc player, press the CDbutton. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in thedisplay.

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)

If you have a disc that is acombination of CD-DA tracks andMP3/WMA files, you can choose theformat to listen by pressing andholding CD button until you hear abeep.

If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc isprotected by digital rightsmanagement (DRM), the audio unitdisplays UNSUPPORTED, and thenskips to the next file.

Video CDs and DVDs do not work inthis unit.

CONTINUED

To Play a Disc

Playing a Disc (LX model)F

eatures

219

NOTE:

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

０９／０３／１３　１５：５５：３４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２２４　

2010 Pilot

－

－

－

－

Insert a disc about halfway into thedisc slot. The drive will pull the discin the rest of the way to play it. Youoperate the disc player with thesame controls used for the radio.The number of the current track isshown in the display. When playing adisc in MP3 or WMA, the numbersof the current folder and file areshown. The system will continuouslyplay a disc until you change modes.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

The specifications for compatibleWMA files are:

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.

You can see the album, artist, andtrack name in the display. If a disc isrecorded in MP3 or WMA, you cansee the folder and file name, and theartist, album, and track tag.

Each time you press the TITLEbutton, the display shows you thetext, if the disc was recorded withtext data.

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHzBitrate:48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbpsCompatible with variable bitrateand multi-session.Maximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

When you press and release theTITLE button while a disc withouttext data is playing, you will see ‘‘NOINFO’’ on the display.

285

Text Data Display FunctionTo Load a Disc


220

０９／０３／１３　１５：５５：４２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２２５　

2010 Pilot

－

You can use the SKIP buttons whilea disc is playing to select passagesand change tracks (files in MP3/WMA mode).

Each time you press andrelease the SKIP button, theplayer skips forward to thebeginning of the next track (file inMP3 or WMA mode). Press andrelease the to skip backward tothe beginning of the current track.Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the or SKIPbutton.

The display shows up to about 14characters of selected text data (thefolder name, file name, etc.). If thetext data has more than 14characters, you will see the first 14characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold theTITLE button until the next 14characters are shown.

You will also see some text dataunder these conditions:

When a new folder, file, or track isselected.

When you change the audio modeto play a disc with text data or inMP3 or WMA.

When you insert a disc, and thesystem begins to play.

When playing a CD-DA with textdata, the album and track name areshown in the display. With a disc inMP3 or WMA, the display shows thefolder and file name.

If any letter is not available, it isreplaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.When the disc has no text data, youwill see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.

CONTINUED

To Change or Select Tracks/Files

SKIP


eatures

221

０９／０３／１３　１５：５５：５１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２２６　

2010 Pilot

－－

＋－

－

－In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode

Each time you press and release theRPT side of the bar, the modechanges from file repeat to folderrepeat, then to normal play.

This feature plays thetracks within a disc (the files in MP3or WMA mode) in random order. Toactivate random play, press andrelease the RDM side of the RPT/RDM bar. In MP3 or WMA mode,press the RDM side of the barrepeatedly to select RDM (within adisc random play). You will see RDMin the display. Press the RDM side ofthe bar for 2 seconds to return tonormal play.

Toselect a different folder, press eitherside of the FOLDER bar. Press the

side of the bar to skip to the nextfolder, and the side of the bar toskip to the beginning of the previousfolder.

To continuously replaya track (files in MP3 or WMA mode),press and release the RPT side ofthe RPT/RDM bar. You will see RPTin the display. Press and hold theRPT side for 2 seconds to turn it off.

This feature,when activated, replays all files inthe selected folder in the order theyare compressed. To activate folderrepeat, press the RPT side of theRPT/RDM bar twice. You will seeF-RPT in the display. The systemcontinuously replays the currentfolder. Press the RPT side of the baragain to turn it off. Pressing theRDM side of the bar, or selecting adifferent folder with the FOLDERbar also turns off the repeat feature.

RANDOM (Random within adisc)FOLDER SELECTION

REPEAT (TRACK/FILEREPEAT)

FOLDER-REPEAT


222

０９／０３／１３　１５：５５：５７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２２７　

2010 Pilot

－－－ In MP3 or WMA modeIn MP3 or WMA mode

The system plays the first file in thefirst folder for about 10 seconds. Ifyou do nothing, the system will thenplay the first files in the next foldersfor 10 seconds. After playing the firstfile of the last folder, the systemplays normally.

Pressing either of the SKIP buttonsalso turns off the scan feature.

Thisfeature, when activated, samples thefirst file of each folder on the disc.To activate folder scan, press theSCAN button twice. You will seeF-SCAN in the display.

Pressing either of the SKIP buttons,selecting a different folder with theFOLDER bar, or pressing the SCANbutton, also turns off the folder scan.

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom file scan to folder scan, then tonormal play.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays allfiles in the selected folder in randomorder. To activate folder random,press the RDM side of the RPT/RDM bar. You will see F-RDM in thedisplay. The system will then selectand play files randomly. Thiscontinues until you deactivate folderrandom by pressing and holding theRDM side of the bar again, or byselecting a different folder with theFOLDER bar.

Each time you press and release theRDM side of the bar, the modechanges from folder random play torandom play (within a disc randomplay), then to normal play.

The scan function samples all tracks(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc inthe order they are recorded on thedisc. To activate scan, press andrelease the SCAN button. You willsee SCAN in the display. You will geta 10 second sampling of each track/file on the disc. Press and hold theSCAN button until you hear a beepto get out of scan mode and play thelast track/file sampled.

F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN)FOLDER-RANDOMSCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)


eatures

223

０９／０３／１３　１５：５６：０５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２２８　

2010 Pilot

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the disc willstay in the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the disc will beginplaying where it left off.


.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe disc after 10 seconds and beginplaying.

You can also eject the disc when theignition switch is off.

To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM or FM button.Press the CD button again to switchback to the disc player.

285

Protecting Discs

To Stop Playing a Disc


224

０９／０３／１３　１５：５６：１１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２２９　

2010 Pilot

The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.For additional information ondamaged discs, see page .

The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out the disc.Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

Cause

The ejected disc will not be reloaded automatically.

Error Message Solution

286

Track/File format notsupported

Mechanical Error

Servo Error

Current track will be skipped. The nextsupported track or file plays automatically.Press the eject button and pull out the disc.Check the disc for serious damage, signs ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt(see page 286). Insert the disc again. If the codedoes not disappear, or the disc cannot beremoved, consult your dealer. Do not try toforce the disc out of the player.

Disc Player Error Messages (LX model)F

eatures

225

UNSUPPORTED

BAD DISCPLEASE CHECK

OWNER’SMANUAL PUSH

EJECTBAD DISC

PLEASE CHECKOWNER’SMANUAL

０９／０３／１３　１５：５６：１９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２３０　

2010 Pilot

Most audio system functions can becontrolled by standard buttons, bars,and knobs. In addition, you canaccess some functions by using theselector knob on the audio system.

The knob turns left and right. Use itto scroll through lists, or to makeselections or adjustments to a list ormenu item on the display. When youmake a selection, push the center ofthe selector (ENTER) to go to thatselection.

When the audio system is in XMRadio mode or playing discs, pushingthe selector (ENTER) knob switchesthe display between the normaldisplay and the extended display.The extended display has threesegments to display the detailedinformation.

Pressing the MENU button againwill also cancel the menu displaymode.

To select any setting such as theclock, sound adjusting, or thecompass, press the MENU button.To use any audio system function,the ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.You can select the item by turningthe selector knob. To go back to theprevious display, press the RETURNbutton.

Selector Knob Menu Display

Audio System (EX and EX-L models)

226

SELECTORKNOB

MENUBUTTON

RETURNBUTTON

Without rear entertainment system

０９／０３／１３　１５：５６：２６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２３１　

2010 Pilot

Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX and EX-L models)F

eatures

227

SELECTOR KNOB

FM BUTTON

AM BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

A.SEL (AUTO SELECT)BUTTON

EX models without rear entertainment system

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

AM/FMBUTTON



PRESET BUTTONS

SELECTOR KNOB

SCAN BUTTON

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

０９／０３／１３　１５：５６：３３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２３２　

2010 Pilot

－

－

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.


The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thePWR/VOL knob. Adjust the volumeby turning the same knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to are displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button, or AM/FM button. Onthe FM band, ST will be displayed ifthe station is broadcasting in stereo.Stereo reproduction in AM is notavailable.

On the FM band, you can also usethe features provided by the radiodata system (RDS). For moreinformation on the RDS, see page

.

The skip function searchesup and down from the currentfrequency to find a station with astrong signal. To activate it, pressand hold the or side of theSKIP bar until you hear a beep, thenrelease it.

Use the selector knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, or left to tune to alower frequency.

230

To Select a StationTo Play the Radio SKIP

TUNE

Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX and EX-L models)

228

０９／０３／１３　１５：５６：４１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２３３　

2010 Pilot

－

－－

If you aretraveling and can no longer receiveyour preset stations, you can use theauto select feature to find stations inthe local area.

Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A. SEL’’flashes in the display, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM and twelve FM stations inthe preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forthat preset button.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

Each preset button canstore one frequency on AM and twofrequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. You can store one frequencyon FM1, and one frequency on FM2 with each preset button.

Use the tune, skip, scan, or RDSfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Pick a preset button, and hold ituntil you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.When the system finds a strongsignal, it will stop and play thatstation for about 10 seconds.


1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

On vehicles without rear entertainmentsystem


AUTO SELECT

PresetSCAN

Features

229

０９／０３／１３　１５：５６：５０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２３４　

2010 Pilot

To switch the function between onand off, press and release the TITLEbutton. With the system on, you willsee the ‘‘PS NAME ON’’ message onthe display. If the station you arelistening to is an RDS station, thedisplayed frequency switches to thestation name.


, press theA. SEL (auto select) button. Thisrestores the presets you originallyset.


. The program service name displayfunction shows the name of thestation you are listening to. You canturn this function on or off.

308

To turn off auto select Radio Data System (RDS)



230

０９／０３／１３　１５：５６：５７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２３５　

2010 Pilot

－＋

With the FM band selected, you canselect the program categoryprovided by the RDS. Press eitherside ( or ) of the CATEGORYbar to display and select an RDScategory. The principal RDScategories are shown as follows:

ALL: All RDS category stationsROCK: Rock, classic rock and softrock music

If the station you are listening to isnot an RDS station, the displaycontinues to show the frequencywith the PS name display function on.

When you turn off this function bypressing the TITLE button, thedisplay shows ‘‘PS NAME OFF.’’

COUNTRY: Country musicSOFT: Adult hits and soft musicTOP 40: Top 40 hitsOLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldiesR & B: Rhythm and blues, and softrhythm and bluesRELIGION: Programs concernedwith religion

CLASSIC: Classical musicJAZZ: JazzINFO: News, information, sports,talk shows, foreign language,personality, public, college, andweather

Press either side of the CATEGORYbar to select an RDS category. Thedisplay shows the selected RDScategory name for about 10 seconds.You can use the search or scanfunction to find radio stations on theselected RDS category. If you donothing while the RDS categoryname is displayed, the selectedcategory is canceled.

TRAFFIC: Traffic information

CONTINUED

Radio Data System (RDS) Category


eatures

231

０９／０３／１３　１５：５７：０８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２３６　

2010 Pilot

You can use the RDS programsearch or scan function even if thePS name display function is off. Inthis case, the display shows afrequency in place of a PS name.





This function searches up and downa frequency for the strongest signalfrom the frequencies that carry theselected RDS category information.This can help you to find a station inyour favorite category. To activate it,press and release either side( or ) of the SKIP bar. Youwill see the selected RDS categoryname blinking while searching it.When the system finds a station, theselected RDS category name will bedisplayed again for about 10 seconds.


RDS Program SCANRDS Program Search

232

０９／０３／１３　１５：５７：１４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２３７　

2010 Pilot

＊＊

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

＊

Press the MENU button to displaythe sound settings. Turn the selectorknob to select an appropriate setting:BASS, TREBLE, FADER,BALANCE, SUBW (subwoofer),CENTER , Dolby PL (Prologic) II ,and SVC (speed-sensitive volumecompensation). Press the selector(ENTER) knob to enter the setting,then turn the selector knob to adjustthe setting.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the selector knob toadjust the setting to your liking.

Adjusts thestrength of sound from thesubwoofer speaker.

Adjusts the strength ofsound from the center speaker.

To return to the normal play, pushthe RETURN or MENU button afteryou stop adjusting a mode.

Adjusts the volume levelbased on the vehicle speed.

Adjusts the side-to-side strength of the sound.

Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound.

Adjusts the treble.

Adjusts the bass.

When the level reaches the center,you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.

: If equipped

CONTINUED

If equipped Except SVC adjustment

Adjusting the Sound SUBWOOFER

CENTER

SVC

BALANCE

FADER

TREBLE

BASS


eatures

233

０９／０３／１３　１５：５７：２４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２３８　

2010 Pilot

－Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories. ‘‘Dolby’’,‘‘ProLogic’’, and the double-D symbolare trademarks of DolbyLaboratories.


The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVCHIGH. Turn the selector knob toadjust the setting to your liking. Ifyou feel the sound is too loud,choose low. If you feel the sound istoo quiet, choose high.

This function is set to MID as thedefault setting when the vehicleleaves the factory.

DolbyPL (ProLogic) II signal processingcreates multi-channel surroundsound from 2 channel stereo audiosources. Dolby ProLogic II can onlybe activated when listening to DISC(CD-DA, MP3/WMA), XM Radio,and AUX. When ProLogic II is active,‘‘PL II’’ is shown in the audio display.

If equipped


Speed-sensitive VolumeCompensation (SVC)Dolby PL (ProLogic) II

234

０９／０３／１３　１５：５７：３０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２３９　

2010 Pilot

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

131


Audio System Lighting

Features

235

０９／０３／１３　１５：５７：３４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２４０　

2010 Pilot

Playing the XM Radio (EX-L and U.S. EX models)

236

PRESET BUTTONS

EX and EX-L models without rear entertainment system

SCAN BUTTON

CATEGORY BAR

SELECTOR KNOB A.SEL (AUTO SELECT)BUTTON


PRESET BUTTONS

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB


XM BUTTON XMBUTTON

CATEGORYBAR

SELECTOR KNOB

SCANBUTTON

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

０９／０３／１３　１５：５７：４１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２４１　

2010 Pilot

－

To listen to XM Radio, turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position, and press the

button. The last channel youlistened to will show in the display.Adjust the volume by turning thepower/volume knob.

Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM Radio anywhere in the UnitedStates, and Canada, except Hawaiiand Alaska. XM is a registeredtrademark of Sirius XM Radio , Inc.

Each time you press and release theTITLE button, the display changes inthe following sequence: name, title,and category.

You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist’s name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.

XM Radio receives signals from twosatellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, XM Radioallows you to view channel andcategory selections in the display.

To switch betweenchannel mode and category mode,either press and hold the TITLEbutton until the mode changes, orpress and release the selector knob.

In the channel mode, you can selectall of the available channels. In thecategory mode, such as Jazz, Rock,Classical, etc., you can select all ofthe channels within that category.

CONTINUED


Operating the XM Radio

MODE

Features

237

０９／０３／１３　１５：５７：４９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２４２　

2010 Pilot

－－＋－－Turn the selector knob tochange channel selections. Turn theknob right for higher numberedchannels and left for lowernumbered channels. In the categorymode, you can only select channelswithin that category.

You can also select a channel orcategory from the list by using theselector knob. Push the selectorknob (ENTER) to switch the displayto the list displayed with threesegments, then turn the knob toselect a channel or category. Pressthe selector knob (ENTER) to setyour selection.

Presseither side of the CATEGORY bar toselect another category.

The SCAN function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the stations within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN button. Thesystem plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want tocontinue listening to, press thebutton again.


TUNE CATEGORY ( or ) SCAN

238

０９／０３／１３　１５：５７：５３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２４３　

2010 Pilot

－

－

－

－

CONTINUED

You can store up to 12preset channels using the six presetbuttons. Each button stores onechannel from the XM1 band and onechannel from the XM2 band.

To store a channel:Press the XM button. Either XM1or XM2 will show in the display.

Use the selector knob,CATEGORY bar, or SCAN buttonto tune to a desired channel.

Pick the preset button you wantfor that channel. Press and holdthe button until you hear a beep.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can beselected. In channel mode, allchannels can be selected.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Press the XM button again. Theother XM band will show. Storethe next six channels using steps 2and 3.

Once a channel is stored, simplypress and release the proper presetbutton to tune to it.

The presets may be lost if yourvehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

XM is loading theaudio or program information.

The channelcurrently selected is no longerbroadcasting.

The encryptioncode is being updated. Wait until theencryption code is fully updated.Channels 0 and 1 should still worknormally.

3.

4.

5.

2.

1.


Preset XM Radio Display Messages

‘‘LOADING’’

‘‘OFF AIR’’

‘‘UPDATING’’

Features

239

０９／０３／１３　１５：５８：０４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２４４　

2010 Pilot

－

－

－

The signal iscurrently too weak. Move the vehicleto an area away from tall buildings,and with an unobstructed view of thesouthern horizon.

The selected channelnumber does not exist, or is not partof your subscription, or this channelhas no artist or title information atthis time.

There is a problemwith the XM antenna. Please consultyour dealer.

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator. Carryinglarge items on a roof rack can alsoblock the signal.

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’

‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘ANTENNA’’


240

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

０９／０３／１３　１５：５８：１０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２４５　

2010 Pilot

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.Driving in tunnels.Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.Large items carried on a roof rack.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XM Radioreception.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Radio. With the ignitionswitch in the ACCESSORY (I) or theON (II) position, push the power/volume knob to turn on the audiosystem, and press the button.A variety of music types and styleswill play.

If you decide to purchase XM radioservice, contact XM Radio at

, or at1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contactXM Canada at , or at1-877-209-0079. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number. To get yourradio I.D. number, press the

button, then turn theselector knob until ‘‘CH 000’’ appearsin the display. Your I.D. will appearin the display.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theXM Radio mode while you wait foractivation. This should take about 30minutes.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated,‘‘CATEGORY’’ or ‘‘CH’’ will appear inthe display, and you’ll be able tolisten to XM Radio broadcasts. XMRadio will continue to send anactivation signal to your vehicle forat least 12 hours from the activationrequest. If the service has not beenactivated after 36 hours, contact XMRadio.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

www.xmradio.com

www.xmradio.ca

Receiving XM Radio Service

Playing the XM Radio (EX-L and U.S. EX models)F

eatures

241

０９／０３／１３　１５：５８：２０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２４６　

2010 Pilot

Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models)

242

DISC SLOT

DISC LOADBUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

EX and EX-L models without rear entertainment system

MP3/WMA INDICATOR

DISC SLOT

DISC LOADBUTTON

SKIP BAR

CATEGORYBAR


MP3/WMA INDICATOR

CATEGORYBAR

SKIP BAR

EJECTBUTTON

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

EJECT BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON


SELECTOR KNOBSELECTOR KNOB

０９／０３／１３　１５：５８：２８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２４７　

2010 Pilot

－

－

－

－

This audio system can also playCD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed inMP3 or WMA format. When playinga disc in MP3, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ inthe display. In WMA format, ‘‘WMA’’will appear in the display. The disc,folder and track numbers aredisplayed. You can select up to 255folders or tracks.

To load or play discs, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position.

You operate the disc changer withthe same controls used for the radio.To select the disc changer, press theCD/AUX or CD button. You will see‘‘CD’’ in the display. The disc andtrack numbers, and the elapsed timeare shown in the display. You canalso select the displayed informationwith the TITLE button (see page

). The system will continuouslyplay a disc until you change modes.

The specifications forcompatible MP3 files are:

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1), 16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)Bitrate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps(MPEG1), 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps(MPEG2)Compatible with variable bitrateand multi-session.Maximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

If you have a disc that is acombination of CD-DA tracks andMP3/WMA files, you can choose theformat to listen by pressing andholding CD/AUX or CD button untilyou hear a beep.

Video CDs and DVDs do not work inthis unit.

245

CONTINUED

To Play a Disc

Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models)F

eatures

243


０９／０３／１３　１５：５８：３７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２４８　

2010 Pilot

－

－

－

－

Your vehicle’s in-dash disc changerholds up to six discs.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this unit.

When the disc load indicator turnsgreen and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in thedisplay again, insert the next discin the slot. Do not try to insert adisc until ‘‘LOAD’’ appears. Youcould damage the audio unit.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. If you are not loadingall six positions, the system beginsplaying the last disc loaded.

You can also load a disc into anempty position while a disc is playingby pressing the appropriate presetbutton. The system stops playing thecurrent disc and starts the loadingsequence. It then plays the disc justloaded.


Compatible with variable bitrateand multi-sessionMaximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc isprotected by digital rightsmanagement (DRM), the audio unitdisplays UNSUPPORTED, and thenskips to the next file.

Sampling frequency:22.05/32/44.1/48 kHzBitrate:48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps

To load more than one disc, pressthe LOAD button until you hear abeep and see ‘‘LOAD’’ in thedisplay. To load only one disc,press and release the LOADbutton.

The disc number for an emptyposition begins blinking.

Insert the disc into the disc slotwhen the green disc load indicatorcomes on. Insert it only abouthalfway; the drive will pull it in therest of the way. You will see‘‘BUSY’’ in the display while thedisc load indicator turns red andblinks as the disc is loaded.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Loading Discs


244

NOTE:

０９／０３／１３　１５：５８：４７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２４９　

2010 Pilot

CONTINUED

You can see the album, artist, andtrack name in the display. If a disc isrecorded in MP3 or WMA, you cansee the folder and file name, and thealbum, artist, and track tag.

With the folder name, you will seethe FOLDER indicator in the display.The TRACK indicator is shown withthe file or track name.

The display shows up to 16characters of selected text data (thefolder name, file name, etc.).

Each time you press the TITLEbutton, the display shows you thetext, if the disc was recorded withtext data.

When you press and release theTITLE button while a disc withouttext data is playing, you will see ‘‘NOINFO’’ on the display.

If the text data has more than 16characters, you will see the first 16characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold theTITLE button until the next 16characters are shown. You can seeup to 32 characters of the text data.

When you turn on the audio systemnext time, the system keeps yourselection with the TITLE button.

When playing a CD-DA with textdata, the album and track name areshown in the display. With a disc inMP3 or WMA, the display shows thefolder and file name.

When you insert a disc, and thesystem begins to play.

When you change the audio modeto play a disc with text data or inMP3 or WMA.

If you press and hold the TITLEbutton again, the display shows thefirst 16 characters again.

If any letter is not available, it isreplaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.When the disc has no text data, youwill see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.

You will also see some text dataunder these conditions:

When a new folder, file, or track isselected.

Text Data Display Function


eatures

245

０９／０３／１３　１５：５８：５８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２５０　

2010 Pilot

－

To select a different disc, use theappropriate preset buttons (1through 6). If you select an emptyposition, the system will go into theloading sequence (see page ).

Use the SKIP bar while a disc isplaying to select passages andchange tracks (files in MP3 or WMAmode).

In MP3 or WMA mode, use theCATEGORY bar to select folders onthe disc and use either side of theSKIP bar to change files.

Each time you press andrelease the side of the SKIP bar,the player skips forward to thebeginning of the next track (file inMP3 or WMA mode). Press andrelease the side of the bar toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current track. Press it again toskip to the beginning of the previoustrack.

To move rapidly within a track or file,press and hold either side ( or

) of the SKIP bar.

In MP3 or WMA mode, you can alsoselect a folder or track/file from thelist by using the selector knob. Pushthe selector knob (ENTER) toswitch the display to the listdisplayed with three segments, thenturn the knob to select a folder.Press the selector knob (ENTER) tochange the display to the track/filelist, then turn the same knob toselect a track/file. Press the selectorknob (ENTER) to set your selection.

244

To Change or Select Tracks/Files


SKIP

246

０９／０３／１３　１５：５９：０４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２５１　

2010 Pilot

－－－

－＋＋

－

－

－

This feature plays thetracks within a disc (the files in MP3or WMA mode) in random order. Toactivate random play, select the discrandom play from the menu items.You will see RANDOM in the display.Select the normal play mode toreturn to normal play.

This feature,when activated, replays all the filesin the selected folder in the orderthey are compressed in MP3 orWMA. To activate folder repeatmode, select the folder repeat modefrom the menu items. You will seeF-REPEAT in the display. Thesystem continuously replays thecurrent folder. Select the normalplay mode to turn it off. Selecting adifferent folder with theCATEGORY bar also turns off therepeat feature.

Toselect a different folder, press eitherside ( or ) of the CATEGORYbar. Press the side to skip to thenext folder, and press the side toskip to the beginning of the previousfolder.

Tocontinuously replay a track (file inMP3 or WMA mode), select thetrack repeat mode from the menuitems. You will see REPEAT in thedisplay. Select the normal play modeto turn it off.

Pressing either side of the SKIP baralso turns off the repeat feature.

This featurecontinuously replays the current disc.To activate disc repeat, select thedisc repeat mode from the menuitems. You will see D-REPEAT in thedisplay. Select the normal play modeto turn it off.

In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode

CONTINUED


RANDOM (Random within adisc)FOLDER REPEATFOLDER SELECTION

REPEAT (Track Repeat)

DISC REPEAT

Features

247

０９／０３／１３　１５：５９：１０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２５２　

2010 Pilot

－－－

This feature, whenactivated, samples the first file ineach folder on the disc in the orderthey are recorded. To activate thefolder scan feature, press andrelease the SCAN button repeatedly.You will see ‘‘F-SCAN’’ in the display.The system will then play the firstfile in the main folders for about 10seconds. If you do nothing, thesystem will then play the first file ineach folder for 10 seconds. When itplays a file that you want to continuelistening to, press and hold theSCAN button.

Pressing either side of the SKIP bar,or selecting a different disc (usingthe preset buttons) or folder (usingthe CATEGORY bar) turns off theSCAN or F-SCAN feature.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays thefiles within the current folder inrandom order, rather than in theorder they are compressed in MP3or WMA. To activate folder randomplay, select the folder random modefrom the menu items. You will seeF-RANDOM in the display. Thesystem will then select and play filesrandomly. This continues until youdeactivate folder random play byselecting the normal play mode, oryou select a different folder with theCATEGORY bar.

The SCAN functionsamples all the tracks on the disc inthe order they are recorded on thedisc (all files in the selected folder inMP3 or WMA mode). To activate thescan feature, press and release theSCAN button. You will see SCAN inthe display. You will get a 10 secondsampling of each track/file in thedisc/folder. Press and hold theSCAN button until you hear a beepto get out of scan mode and play thelast track sampled.

In MP3 or WMA modeIn MP3 or WMA modeF-SCANFOLDER RANDOM

SCAN


248

０９／０３／１３　１５：５９：１５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２５３　

2010 Pilot

－

CONTINUED

This feature, whenactivated, samples the first track oneach disc in order (the first file inthe main folder on each disc in MP3or WMA mode). To activate the discscan feature, press and release theSCAN button repeatedly untilD-SCAN shows in the display. Thesystem will then play the first track/file in the first main folder on thefirst disc for about 10 seconds. If youdo nothing, the system will then playthe following first track/file for 10seconds each. When it plays a track/file that you want to continuelistening to, press and hold theSCAN button again.

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom scan, disc scan, then to normalplay.

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom file scan, folder scan, disc scan,then to normal play.

You can also eject the disc when theignition switch is off.

When the first track on the last disc,or the first file in the last main folderon the last disc begins to play, thedisc scan mode will be canceled.Pressing either side of the SKIP baror selecting a different folder withthe CATEGORY bar also turns offthe scan feature.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe disc after 10 seconds and beginplaying.

To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM, FM, AM/FM,or XM (if equipped) button. Pressthe CD (CD/AUX on models withXM Radio) button again to switchback to the disc changer.

In MP3 or WMA mode

D-SCAN To Stop Playing a Disc


eatures

249

０９／０３／１３　１５：５９：２３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２５４　

2010 Pilot

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the disc willstay in the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the disc will beginplaying where it left off.

To remove the disc currently in play,press the eject button. When a disc isremoved from a slot, the systemautomatically begins the loadsequence so you can load anotherdisc in that position. If you do notremove the disc from the changerwithin 10 seconds, the disc willreload into the slot. Then the systemreturns to the previous mode (AM,FM, or XM Radio).

To remove a different disc from thechanger, first select it with theappropriate preset button. When thatdisc begins playing, press the ejectbutton. Continue pressing the ejectbutton to remove all the discs fromthe changer.


.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off. The disc thatwas last selected is ejected first.

285

Protecting Discs

Removing Discs from the In-dashDisc Changer


250

０９／０３／１３　１５：５９：２９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２５５　

2010 Pilot


If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.

For additional information ondamaged discs, see page .


CauseError Message Solution

286

High temperature


Mechanical Error

Servo Error

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Current track will be skipped. The nextsupported track or file plays automatically.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).Check the disc for serious damage, signs ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt(see page 286). Insert the disc again. If the codedoes not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot beremoved, consult your dealer. Do not try toforce the disc out of the player.

Disc Changer Error Messages (EX and EX-L models)F

eatures

251

HEAT ERROR

UNSUPPORTED



EJECTBAD DISC


０９／０３／１３　１５：５９：３５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２５６　

2010 Pilot

The selector can be pushed left,right, up, down, and in. Use theselector to scroll through lists, toselect menus, and to highlight menuitems. When you make a selection,push the center of the selector(ENTER) to go to that selection.

The knob turns left and right. Use itto make selections or adjustments toa list or menu on the screen.Most audio system functions can still

be controlled by standard buttons,dials, and knobs, but some functionscan only be accessed using theinterface dial. The interface dial hastwo parts, a knob and a selector.

The audio system can also beoperated by voice control. See thenavigation system manual forcomplete details.

On models with navigation systemInterface Dial Voice Control System

Audio System (Models with navigation system)

252

SELECTOR

KNOB

ENTER

０９／０３／１３　１５：５９：４２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２５７　

2010 Pilot

Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)F

eatures

253

INTERFACE DIAL

AUDIO DISPLAY PRESET BUTTONS

With rear entertainment systemWithout rear entertainment system

INTERFACE DIAL

FMBUTTON

AMBUTTON

SCANBUTTON


TUNE KNOB

AUDIOBUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

AUDIOBUTTON

AMBUTTON

FMBUTTON SCAN

BUTTON

TUNE KNOB

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

A.SEL (AUTOSELECT) BUTTON

０９／０３／１３　１５：５９：５１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２５８　

2010 Pilot

－ Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, or left to tune to alower frequency. To tune with theinterface dial, push the selectordown, and turn the knob to TUNE.Then press ENTER on the selector,and turn the knob to the desiredfrequency. To exit the TUNE mode,press ENTER on the selector.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position. Press the AUDIO button toview the audio control display. Turnthe system on by pressing thepower/volume knob, the AM, or FMbutton. Adjust the volume by turningthe power/volume knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to are shown onthe display. To change bands, pressthe AM or FM button. You can alsochange bands by pushing theinterface selector up. Each time youpush it up, the band will change toFM1, FM2, or AM. On the FM bands,STEREO will be shown on thenavigation screen and ST on theaudio display, if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.


You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, skip (seek), scan, thepreset buttons, and auto select.

TUNE

To Play the FM/AM Radio

To Select a Station

Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)

254

STEREO ICON

TUNE ICON

BAND

０９／０３／１３　１５：５９：５９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２５９　

2010 Pilot

－

－ To scan with the interface dial, pushthe selector down, and then push itto the right. You will see SCANflashing on the screen.

The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it finds astrong signal, it will stop and playthat station for about 10 seconds. Ifyou do nothing, the system will thenscan for the next strong station andplay it for 10 seconds. When it playsa station that you want to listen to,press the scan button again, or pushthe interface selector to the rightagain.

The SCAN functionsamples all stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it.

The SKIP (SEEK)function searches up and down fromthe current frequency to find astation with a strong signal. Toactivate it, press either side ( or

) of the SKIP bar or button,then release it. You can also activatethe SKIP function (SEEK isdisplayed on the screen) by pushingthe interface selector to the right orleft.

CONTINUED

SCAN

SKIP (SEEK)


eatures

255

SCAN ICON

０９／０３／１３　１６：００：０５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２６０　

2010 Pilot

－

－

If you aretraveling and can no longer receiveyour preset stations, you can use theauto select feature to find stations inthe local area.

Each preset button orpreset icon can store one frequencyon AM and two frequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo sets of FM frequencies withthe preset buttons (on-screenicons).Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.Press the preset button, and holdit until you hear a beep. You canalso store frequencies with theinterface dial. Select the preseticon you want to store thefrequency on, then press ENTERon the interface selector, and holdit for more than 2 seconds.Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

You will see ‘‘0’’ displayed if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button.If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons (icons) as previouslydescribed.

To turn off auto select, pressENTER on the interface selector orpress the A.SEL button again. Thisrestores the presets you originallyset.

Push the interface selector down toscroll down the screen, highlightA.SEL, then press ENTER on theinterface selector. You will seeA.SEL on the screen, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds.

You can also press the A.SEL button.You will see A.SEL on the screen,and the system goes into scan modefor several seconds. The systemstores the frequencies of six AM andtwelve FM stations in the presetbuttons.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To store a preset memory location:

On vehicles without rear entertainmentsystem

AUTO SELECT

Preset


256

A.SEL ICON

０９／０３／１３　１６：００：１５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２６１　

2010 Pilot

CONTINUED



.

To switch the function between onand off, press and release the TITLEbutton. With the system on, you willsee the ‘‘PS NAME ON’’ message onthe center display. If the station youare listening to is an RDS station, thedisplayed frequency switches to thestation name.The program service name display

function shows the name of thestation you are listening to. You canturn this function on or off.

308


Radio Data System (RDS)


Features

257

０９／０３／１３　１６：００：２１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２６２　

2010 Pilot

With the FM band selected, you canselect the program type provided bythe RDS. Press the AUDIO button todisplay the radio information on thescreen. Push down the selector onthe interface dial, then turn the knobto select RDS SEARCH icon. PressENTER to set your selection. Theprincipal RDS categories are shownas follows:

If the station you are listening to isnot an RDS station, the audio screenand the center display continue toshow the frequency.

INFO: News, information, sports,talk shows, foreign language,personality, public, college, andweather

JAZZ: JazzCLASSIC: Classical music

RELIGION: Programs concernedwith religion

R & B: Rhythm and blues, and softrhythm and blues

OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldiesTOP 40: Top 40 hitsSOFT: Adult hits and soft musicCOUNTRY: Country music

ROCK: Rock, classic rock and softrock music

ALL: All RDS category stations

TRAFFIC: Traffic information

When you turn off this function bypressing the TITLE button, thecenter display shows ‘‘PS NAMEOFF.’’


Radio Data System (RDS) Category

258

RDS SEARCH ICON

０９／０３／１３　１６：００：３２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２６３　

2010 Pilot

－＋

CONTINUED


Turn the selector to select an RDScategory. You can use the search orscan function to find radio stationson the selected RDS category bypressing the selector to the rightrepeatedly. Press ENTER to set yourselection. If you do nothing while theRDS category is selected, theselected category is canceled.

This function searches up and downa frequency for the strongest signalfrom the frequencies that carry theselected RDS category information.This can help you to find a station inyour favorite category. To activate it,press and release either side( or ) of the SKIP bar orbutton. You will also see the selectedRDS category name blinking in thecenter display while searching it.When the system finds a station, theselected RDS category name will bedisplayed again for about 10 secondsin the center display.

You can also select an RDS categorywith the CATEGORY bar. Presseither side ( or ) of theCATEGORY bar to display an RDScategory in the center display. Selecta category by pressing either side ofthe bar.


RDS Program Search

Features

259

RDS CATEGORY

０９／０３／１３　１６：００：３８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２６４　

2010 Pilot

To activate RDS program searchwith the interface dial, push theAUDIO button to display the FMradio information on the screen.Push the selector down, and turn theknob to select RDS SEARCH icon.Press ENTER on the selector. Thescreen shows you the RDS categorylist.

Turn the knob to the desired RDScategory.

While the RDS category is selected,move the selector knob to the rightto select SEEK in the upper rightcorner of the screen. Then pressENTER to activate the seek function.



RDS Program SCAN

260

RDS CATEGORY LIST

SEEK is selected.

SEEK ICON

０９／０３／１３　１６：００：４４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２６５　

2010 Pilot

Turn the knob to the desired RDScategory.

To activate RDS program scan withthe interface dial, push the AUDIObutton to display the FM radioinformation on the screen. Push theselector down, and turn the knob toselect RDS SEARCH icon. PressENTER on the selector. The screenshows you the RDS category list.

While the RDS category is selected,move the selector knob to the rightto select SCAN in the upper rightcorner of the screen. Then pressENTER to activate the scan function.


If the system does not find a station,‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking forabout 5 seconds, then the systemgoes back to the last selected station. You can use the RDS program

search or scan function even if thePS name display function is off. Inthis case, the display shows afrequency in place of a PS name.

CONTINUED


eatures

261

RDS CATEGORY LIST

SCAN is selected.

SEEK ICON

０９／０３／１３　１６：００：５２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２６６　

2010 Pilot

This function displays the radio textinformation of the selected RDSstation.

The display shows up to 64characters on the selected RDSstation.

If the selected RDS station has theradio text information, you will seethe text indicator on the screen.

To activate radio text display, usethe interface dial. Push the selectordown, and turn the knob to select theRADIO TEXT icon. Press ENTER onthe selector to enter the setting.

Radio Text Display


262

The text is displayedaccording to theinformation from RDS.

RADIO TEXT ICON

TEXT INDICATOR

０９／０３／１３　１６：００：５８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２６７　

2010 Pilot

BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, andFADER are each adjustable. You canalso adjust the strength of the soundcoming from the center andsubwoofer speakers. In addition, youcan set the Dolby PL (ProLogic) IIand Speed-sensitive volumecompensation (SVC).

Select the mode you want to adjustby turning the interface dial.

You can also adjust the sound bypushing the SOUND buttonrepeatedly. Each mode is shown inthe audio display as it changes. Turnthe TUNE knob to adjust the settingto your liking.

To adjust them, press the AUDIObutton, push the interface selectordown, and turn the interface knob toSOUND. Then press ENTER on theselector.

These adjustments can be made bythe SOUND button or the interfacedial.

CONTINUED

Adjusting the Sound


eatures

263

SOUND ICON

０９／０３／１３　１６：０１：０６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２６８　

2010 Pilot

－－－To adjust bassand treble, select BASS or TREBLE,and press ENTER on the interfaceselector. The current setting isshown on the display. Turn theinterface knob to the desired level,and enter your selection by pressingENTER on the interface selector.

Thesemodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.Fader adjusts the front-to-backstrength, while balance adjusts theside-to-side strength. To adjust faderand balance, select FADER orBALANCE, then press ENTER onthe interface selector. The currentsetting is shown on the screen. Turnthe interface knob to the desiredlevel, and enter your selection bypressing ENTER on the interfaceselector. To equalize the fader orbalance, turn the interface knob untilthe marks on the sound grid come tothe center of the adjustment bar.

Toadjust the strength of the soundfrom the center or subwooferspeaker, select it and press ENTERon the interface selector. Turn theinterface knob to the desired level,and enter your selection by pressingENTER on the interface selector.

BASS/TREBLE FADER/BALANCE CENTER/SUBWOOFER


264

０９／０３／１３　１６：０１：１０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２６９　

2010 Pilot

－ DolbyPL (ProLogic) II signal processingcreates multi-channel surroundsound from 2 channel stereo audiosources. Dolby ProLogic II can onlybe activated when listening to DISC(CD-DA, MP3/WMA), XM Radio,and AUX. When ProLogic II is active,‘‘PL II’’ is shown in the audio display.

To set this feature on or off, selectDolby PL II, and press ENTER onthe interface selector. Rotate theinterface dial to ON or OFF, andpress ENTER.

Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories. ‘‘Dolby’’,‘‘ProLogic’’, and the double-D symbolare trademarks of DolbyLaboratories.


The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVCHIGH. The default setting is MID.To change the SVC mode, selectSVC, then press ENTER on theinterface selector. The currentsetting is shown on the screen. Turnthe interface knob to the desiredlevel, and enter your selection bypressing ENTER on the interfaceselector. If you feel the sound is tooloud, choose low. If you feel thesound is too quiet, choose high.

Dolby PL (ProLogic) II Speed-sensitive VolumeCompensation (SVC)


eatures

265

０９／０３／１３　１６：０１：１６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２７０　

2010 Pilot

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)

266

INTERFACE DIAL



INTERFACE DIAL


TUNE KNOB

AUDIOBUTTON

XMBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

CATEGORYBAR

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

TUNE KNOB

CATEGORYBAR

AUDIOBUTTON

XMBUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

TITLEBUTTON

TITLEBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

０９／０３／１３　１６：０１：２５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２７１　

2010 Pilot

To listen to XM Radio, turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position. Push thepower/volume knob to turn on theaudio system, and press the

button. The last channel youlistened to will show in the display.Adjust the volume by turning thepower/volume knob.

Push the AUDIO button to displayXM information on the screen. Youcan operate the XM Radio systemwith the interface dial.

Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM Radio anywhere in the UnitedStates, and Canada, except Hawaiiand Alaska. XM is a registeredtrademark of Sirius XM Radio , Inc.

XM Radio receives signals from twosatellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, XM Radioalso allows you to view channel andcategory selections in the audiodisplay.

CONTINUED


Operating the XM Radio

Features

267

０９／０３／１３　１６：０１：３２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２７２　

2010 Pilot

－－ In the category mode, such as Jazz,Rock, Classical, etc., you cannavigate through all of the channelswithin that category. In the channelmode, you can select all of theavailable channels.

On the screen, you will see theselected CHANNEL (number),CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),and TITLE (music title).

Turn the TUNE knob tochange channel selections. Turn theknob right for higher numberedchannels and left for lowernumbered channels. You can alsochange channels with the interfaceselector, push down the interfaceselector to choose TUNE and pressENTER on the selector. Turn theinterface knob to the same directions.In the category mode, you can onlyselect channels within that category.

To switch between thecategory mode and channel mode,press and hold the TITLE buttonuntil the mode changes. TheCATEGORY or CHANNEL mode isdisplayed on the screen. To switchthe mode with the interface dial,push down the interface selector toselect AUDIO MENU, then turn theknob to select MODE, and pressENTER on the selector repeatedly.

Each time you press and release theTITLE button, the center displaychanges in the following sequence:NAME (artist name), TITLE (musictitle), and CHANNEL NAME(channel name).


TUNEMODE

268

０９／０３／１３　１６：０１：３７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２７３　

2010 Pilot

－－－＋

CONTINUED

The scan function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the channels within thatcategory are scanned. To activateSCAN, press the SCAN button. Toscan with the interface dial, scrolldown, and push the interfaceselector to the right. You will seeSCAN on the screen and audiodisplay.

The system plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want tocontinue listening to, push theinterface selector to the right againor press the SCAN button to cancel.

Press either side ofthe bar ( or ) to select anothercategory.


SCANCATEGORY

Features

269

０９／０３／１３　１６：０１：４１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２７４　

2010 Pilot

－ You can store up to 12preset channels using the six presetbuttons. Each button stores onechannel from the XM1 band and onechannel from the XM2 band.

To store a channel:

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can beselected. In channel mode, allchannels can be selected.

Use the tune or scan function totune to a desired channel.

Pick the preset button you wantfor that channel. Press and holdthe preset button until you hear abeep. You can also pick thenumber with the interface dial.Select your desired number andpress and hold ENTER on theinterface selector.

Press the button or scrollup again. The other XM band willbe shown. Store the next sixchannels using steps 2 and 3.

Once a channel is stored, pressand release the proper presetbutton to tune to it.

Press the button or scrollup by pushing the interfaceselector up. Either XM1 or XM2will be shown on the display.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.


Preset

270

XM BAND

０９／０３／１３　１６：０１：５１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２７５　

2010 Pilot

－

－

－

－

－

－

The signal iscurrently tooweak. Move thevehicle to an areaaway from tallbuildings, andwith anunobstructed viewof the southernhorizon.

The selected channelnumber does not exist, oris not part of yoursubscription, or thischannel has no artist ortitle information at thistime.

There is a problemwith the XMantenna. Pleaseconsult your dealer.

XM is loading theaudio or programinformation.

The channelcurrently selected isno longerbroadcasting.

The encryptioncode is beingupdated. Waituntil theencryption code isfully updated.Channels 0 and 1should still worknormally.

CONTINUED

XM Radio Display Messages ‘‘NO SIGNAL’’

‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘ANTENNA’’

‘‘LOADING’’

‘‘OFF AIR’’

‘‘UPDATING’’

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)F

eatures

271

０９／０３／１３　１６：０１：５８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２７６　

2010 Pilot

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator.


272

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

０９／０３／１３　１６：０２：０２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２７７　

2010 Pilot

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.Driving in tunnels.Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XM Radioreception.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Radio. With the ignitionswitch in the ACCESSORY (I) or theON (II) position, push the power/volume knob to turn on the audiosystem, and press the button.A variety of music types and styleswill play.

If you decide to purchase XM Radioservice, contact XM Radio at

, or at1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contactXM Canada at , or at1-877-209-0079. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number and

your credit card number. To get yourradio I.D. number, turn the TUNEknob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.Your I.D. will appear in the display.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theXM Radio mode while you wait foractivation. This should take about 30minutes.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated,‘‘CATEGORY’’ or ‘‘CH’’ will appear inthe display, and you’ll be able tolisten to XM Radio broadcasts. XMRadio will continue to send anactivation signal to your vehicle forat least 12 hours from the activationrequest. If the service has not beenactivated after 36 hours, contact XMRadio.


www.xmradio.com

www.xmradio.ca


Receiving XM Radio Service

Features

273

０９／０３／１３　１６：０２：１２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２７８　

2010 Pilot

Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)

274

INTERFACE DIAL



INTERFACE DIAL


AUDIOBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

CATEGORYBAR

TUNE KNOB

CATEGORYBAR

AUDIOBUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

TUNE KNOB

TITLE BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

SKIP BUTTONS

LOADBUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

CD/AUXBUTTONEJECT BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON

SKIP BAR

LOADBUTTON

CD BUTTON EJECT BUTTON

０９／０３／１３　１６：０２：２１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２７９　

2010 Pilot

Your vehicle’s audio system has anin-dash disc changer with the samecontrols used for the radio. Tooperate the disc changer, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position.

The disc changer can play these discformats:

When playing a disc in MP3, you willsee ‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMAformat, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in thedisplay.

The changer can also play MP3 orWMA format (see page ).

If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc isprotected by digital rightsmanagement (DRM), the audiosystem displays UNSUPPORTED inthe center display, and then skips tothe next file.

Video CDs and DVD discs will notwork in this unit.

Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixeddiscs are not playable.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

CD (CD-DA)CD-R/RWMP3/WMA

If you have a disc that is acombination of CD-DA tracks andMP3/WMA files, you can choose theformat to listen to by pressing andholding the CD/AUX button untilyou hear a beep.

The disc packages or jackets shouldhave one of these marks.

280

Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)F

eatures

275

NOTE:


０９／０３／１３　１６：０２：３４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２８０　

2010 Pilot

To load multiple discs in oneoperation:

With the ignition in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position, press and hold the LOADbutton until you hear a beep andsee ‘‘LOAD’’ in the upper display,then release the button.

‘‘NO DISC’’ is shown on the screenfor an empty position in thechanger. When the green loadindicator comes on and you see‘‘LOAD’’ in the audio display,insert the disc into the slot. Insertit only about halfway; the drive willpull it in the rest of the way.

Press and release the LOADbutton.

To load a single disc:

If you stop loading discs before allsix positions are filled, the systemwill wait for 10 seconds, stop the loadoperation, and begin playing the lastdisc loaded.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. If you are not loadingall six positions, the system willthen begin playing the last discloaded.

Insert a disc into the slot. Insert itonly about halfway; the drive willpull it in the rest of the way. Youwill see ‘‘BUSY’’ in the audiodisplay.

Do not try to insert a disc until‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could damagethe audio unit.

You can select the position to load adisc. Turn the interface knob orpress a preset button to select theposition, then press ENTER on theselector. This starts the loadingsequence. If you do not select theposition, the system loads the disc tothe first empty position in numericalorder.

If you press the LOAD button whilea disc is playing, the system will stopplaying that disc and start theloading sequence. It will then playthe disc just loaded.

When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in theaudio display again, insert the nextdisc into the slot.Do not try to insert a disc until‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You coulddamage the audio unit.

1.

1.

2.

3.

4.

2.


Loading Discs in the Changer

276

０９／０３／１３　１６：０２：４４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２８１　

2010 Pilot

When you play CD-TEXT, you willsee the track name, artist name, andalbum name on the screen. Whenyou play MP3/WMA discs, you willsee the track name and folder nameon the screen. If the disc was notrecorded with this information, it willnot be displayed.

To select a different disc, press thecorresponding number on the presetbuttons, or turn the interface knob tohighlight the desired disc, then pressENTER on the interface selector.

The player can play CD-TEXT, MP3,and WMA formats.

Select the changer by pressing theCD or CD/AUX button. The systemwill begin playing the last selecteddisc in the disc changer. You will seethe current disc position highlighted.

Each time you press the TITLEbutton, the center display changesfrom album name, to track name, toartist name, and then to normaldisplay that shows the track numberand the elapsed time. When playinga disc in MP3/WMA, the displaymode changes from folder name, tofile name, to artist tag, to album tag,to track tag, and then to normaldisplay.

If the disc does not carry album,track, or artist name, pressing theTITLE button shows ‘‘NO INFO.’’

Each time you press and release theside of the SKIP bar, button, or

push the interface selector to theright, the player skips forward to thebeginning of the next track. Pressand release the side of theSKIP bar, button, or push theinterface selector to the left to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press the side orpush the interface selector to the leftagain to skip to the previous track.To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold either side of the SKIP baror button.


To Play a Disc

To Change Tracks

Features

277

CURRENT DISC

０９／０３／１３　１６：０２：５２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２８２　

2010 Pilot

You can also choose a track directlyfrom a track list. Press ENTER onthe interface selector, and the tracklist screen will be shown. If there areno track names, track numbers aredisplayed. You will see the currenttrack is highlighted. Turn theinterface knob to select the desiredtrack, then press ENTER on theinterface selector.

To exit the track list display, pressthe AUDIO button, or push theinterface selector to the left.

When you press the SCAN button orscroll down and push the interfaceselector to the left, the next track ofthe current track plays for about 10seconds. You will see SCAN next toTRACK on the screen and audiodisplay. To listen to the rest of thetrack, press and hold the SCANbutton until you hear a beep or pushthe interface selector to the leftagain within 10 seconds.

When you press the SCAN buttonrepeatedly until you see D-SCAN inthe audio display, or push down theinterface selector to the right, thefirst track of the current disc playsfor about 10 seconds. You will seeSCAN next to DISC on the screenand D-SCAN in the audio display. Tolisten to the rest of the disc, pressand hold the SCAN button until youhear a beep, or push down theinterface selector to the right againwithin 10 seconds.

If you don’t, the system advances tothe next track, plays about 10seconds of it, and continues throughthe rest of the tracks the same way.

If you don’t, the system advances tothe next disc, plays about 10 secondsof its first track, and continuesthrough the rest of the discs thesame way. When the system reachesthe last disc, DISC SCAN is canceled,and that disc continues to play.


To Choose a Track

Track Scan

Disc Scan

278

CURRENT TRACK

０９／０３／１３　１６：０３：００　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２８３　

2010 Pilot

To replay the current trackcontinuously, press and release theRPT button, or use the interfaceselector to scroll down, selectTRACK REPEAT, and press ENTERon the interface selector. As areminder, you will see REPEAT nextto TRACK on the screen and RPT inthe audio display. To turn thisfeature off, press and hold the RPTbutton until you hear a beep, orhighlight TRACK REPEAT (if notalready highlighted), and pressENTER on the interface selectoragain.

To replay the current disccontinuously, press the RPT buttonrepeatedly until you see D-RPT inthe audio display, or use theinterface selector to scroll down,select DISC REPEAT, and pressENTER on the interface selector. Asa reminder, you will see REPEATnext to DISC on the screen andD-RPT in the audio display. To turnthis feature off, press and hold theRPT button until you hear a beep, orhighlight DISC REPEAT (if notalready highlighted), and pressENTER on the interface selectoragain.

To play the tracks of the current discin random order, press and releasethe RDM button, or use the interfaceselector to scroll down, selectTRACK RANDOM, and pressENTER on the interface selector. Asa reminder, you will see RANDOMnext to TRACK on the screen andRDM in the audio display. To turnthis feature off, press and hold theRDM button until you hear a beep,or highlight TRACK RANDOM (ifnot already highlighted), and pressENTER on the interface selectoragain.


Track Repeat Disc Repeat Random Play

Features

279

０９／０３／１３　１６：０３：０６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２８４　

2010 Pilot

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

To take the system out of disc mode,press the AM or FM button, the

button, AUX button, or CD/AUX button. To return to disc mode,press the CD button or CD/AUXbutton.

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or the ignitionswitch, play will continue at the samepoint when you turn it back on.

The CD changer can play CD-Rs andCD-RWs compressed in MP3 andWMA format. When playing a disc inMP3 or WMA, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ or‘‘WMA’’ on the center display. A disccan support more than 99 folders,and each folder can hold up to 255playable files.

When there are more than 99 foldersin a disc, the center display onlyshows two digits.


Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1), 16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)Bitrate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps(MPEG1), 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps(MPEG2)Compatible with variable bitrate

and multi-session.Maximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers


Sampling frequency:22.05/32/44.1/48 kHzBitrate:48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbpsCompatible with variable bitrateand multi-sessionMaximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

To play an MP3/WMA disc, use thedisc controls previously described,along with the following information.


To Stop Playing a Disc Playing an MP3/WMA Disc

280

０９／０３／１３　１６：０３：１７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２８５　

2010 Pilot

Changing and Selecting the Folders/Files

Using the interface selector, you cansee the list of all the files and folderswithin a disc. While playing a MP3/WMA disc, press the AUDIO button.The currently playing folder and fileinformation comes on the screen.

Push the selector to show the folderlist. Turn the selector knob,highlight the folder you want to seethe information within, and pressENTER.

While playing an MP3/WMA disc,you can select a folder within thedisc by pressing either side of thecategory bar. Each time you presseither side of the bar, the folder titleand its first file’s information appearin the center display in recordedorder.

CONTINUED


Changing the Folders

Features

281

MP3/WMA INDICATOR CURRENT FOLDER

０９／０３／１３　１６：０３：２５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２８６　

2010 Pilot

This feature, when activated,samples the first file of each folderfor 10 seconds. To scan a folder,press the SCAN button repeatedlyuntil you see F-SCAN in the audiodisplay. You will see SCAN next toFOLDER and F-SCAN in the audiodisplay.

To listen to the rest of the folder,press and hold the SCAN buttonuntil you hear a beep. If you do not,the system advances to the nextfolder, plays 10 seconds of it, andcontinues throughout the rest of thefolder the same way. When thesystem samples the first file of allfolders, folder scan is canceled, andthe last file played comes back.

You can see the list of all the files inthe selected folder. Turn the selectorknob, then press ENTER to set yourselection.

If the root folder has some additionalfolders in the lower layer, they willbe listed on the screen.

This feature, when activated, replaysall files in the selected folder. Toactivate folder repeat mode, pressthe RPT button repeatedly until yousee F-RPT in the audio display, oruse the interface selector to scrolldown, select FOLDER REPEAT byturning the interface knob, and pressENTER on the interface selector.You will see REPEAT next toFOLDER on the screen and F-RPTin the audio display. To turn thisfeature off, press and hold the RPTbutton until you hear a beep, orhighlight FOLDER REPEAT (if notalready highlighted), and pressENTER on the interface selectoragain.


Folder RepeatFolder Scan

282

CURRENT TRACK

０９／０３／１３　１６：０３：３２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２８７　

2010 Pilot

To remove a different disc from thechanger, first select it by pressingthe corresponding number on thepreset button or turning theinterface knob, and pressing ENTERon the interface selector. When thatdisc begins playing, press the ejectbutton.

When you press the eject buttonwhile listening to the radio, or withthe audio system turned off, the discthat was last selected is ejected.After that disc is ejected, pressingthe eject button again will eject thenext disc in numerical order. Bydoing this six times, you can removeall the discs from the changer.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off:To eject one disc, press and releasethe eject button.To eject all discs, press and hold theeject button.

This feature, when activated, playstracks in the current folder inrandom order. To activate folderrandom play, press the RDM button;or use the interface selector to scrolldown, select FOLDER RANDOM byinterface knob, and press ENTER onthe interface selector. You will seeRANDOM next to FOLDER on thescreen and F-RDM in the audiodisplay. To turn this feature off,press and hold the RDM button untilyou hear a beep, or highlightFOLDER RANDOM (if not alreadyhighlighted), and press ENTER onthe interface selector again.

To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press the eject button. Youwill see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the audio display.When you remove the disc from theslot, the system begins the loadsequence so you can load anotherdisc. If you do not load another disc,the load sequence is canceled, andthe system continues playing in theprevious mode.

If you do not remove the disc fromthe slot, the system will reload thedisc after 10 seconds.


Removing Discs from theChanger

Folder Random

Features

283

０９／０３／１３　１６：０３：４０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２８８　

2010 Pilot



For additional information ondamaged discs, see page .



286

High Temperature


Mechanical Error

Servo Error

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Current track will be skipped. The nextsupported track or file plays automatically.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).Check the disc for serious damage, signs ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt(see page 286). Insert the disc again. If the codedoes not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot beremoved, consult your dealer. Do not try toforce the disc out of the player.

Disc Changer Error Messages

284

HEAT ERROR

UNSUPPORTED



EJECTBAD DISC


０９／０３／１３　１６：０３：４７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２８９　

2010 Pilot

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,use only high quality discs labeledfor audio use.

When recording a CD-R orCD-RW, the recording must beclosed for it to be used by the discchanger.

When a disc is not being played,store it in its case to protect it fromdust and other contamination. Toprevent warpage, keep discs out ofdirect sunlight and extreme heat.

A new disc may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on therecording surface of the disc,causing skipping or other problems.Remove these pieces by rubbing theinner and outer edges with the sideof a pencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe disc changer.

Handle a disc by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the disc.These, along with contaminationfrom finger prints, liquids, and felt-tip pens, can cause the disc to notplay properly, or possibly jam in thedrive.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

Play only standard, round, 5-inch(12 cm) discs. Smaller or odd-shaped discs may jam in the driveor cause other problems.

Handle your discs properly toprevent damage and skipping.

General Information Protecting Discs

Protecting Your DiscsF

eatures

285


０９／０３／１３　１６：０３：５６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２９０　

2010 Pilot

The in-dash disc player/changer hasa sophisticated and delicatemechanism. If you insert a damageddisc as indicated in this section, itmay become stuck inside anddamage the audio unit.

Examples of these discs are shownto the right:

Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs

Damaged discs Poor quality discs

1.

2. 3.

Protecting Your Discs

Additional Information onRecommended Discs

286

Sealed With PlasticRing

Bubbled/Wrinkled

Using PrinterLabel Kit

Warped BurrsChipped/Cracked

With Label/Sticker

０９／０３／１３　１６：０４：０６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２９１　

2010 Pilot

Small, irregular shaped discs Discs with scratches, dirty discs

CD-R or CD-RW may not play dueto the recording conditions.

Scratches and fingerprints on thediscs may cause the sound to skip.

Recommended discs are printedwith the following logo. For therear entertainment system, seepage .

This audio unit cannot play a Dual-disc .

Audio unit may not play thefollowing formats.

4. 5.

344

Protecting Your DiscsF

eatures

287

Fingerprints, scratches, etc.

3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape

Arrow ShapeCan Shape

０９／０３／１３　１６：０４：１７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２９２　

2010 Pilot

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)

288

CATEGORY BAR

USB ICON

iPod ICON

MAP/GUIDE BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

CANCEL BUTTON

With rear entertainment system

CENTER DISPLAY

SKIP BAR

INTERFACE DIAL

CD/AUX BUTTON

０９／０３／１３　１６：０４：２３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２９３　

2010 Pilot

This audio system can operate theaudio files on the iPod with thesame controls used for the in-dashdisc changer. To play an iPod,connect it to the USB adapter cablein the console compartment by usingyour dock connector, then press theAUX button. The ignition switchmust be in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position. The iPod will alsobe recharged with the ignition switchin these positions.

iPods compatible with your audiosystem using the USB adapter cableare:

The system will only play songsstored on the iPod with iTunes.

iPod and iTunes are registeredtrademarks owned by Apple Inc.

You can select the AUX mode byusing the navigation system voicecontrol buttons, but cannot operatethe play mode functions.

Use only compatible iPods with thelatest software. iPods that are notcompatible will not work in this audiounit.

CONTINUED

ModeliPod Classic5 Gen.(2005 or later)iPod Classic(2007 or later)iPod nanoiPod nano 2generationiPod nano 3generationiPod touchiPhone

Software

Ver. 1.2 or more

Ver. 1.0 or more

Ver. 1.2 or moreVer. 1.1.2 or more

Ver. 1.0 or more

Ver. 1.1.1 or moreVer. 1.1.1 or more

th

nd

rd

To Play an iPod


Voice Control System

Features

289

０９／０３／１３　１６：０４：３１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２９４　

2010 Pilot

Do not connect your iPod using ahub.

Do not use an extension cablebetween the USB adapter cableequipped with your vehicle andyour dock connector.

We recommend backing up yourdata before playing it.

In AAC format, DRM (digital rightsmanagement) files cannot be played.If the system finds a DRM file, theaudio unit displays UNPLAYABLE,and then skips to the next file.

Unclip the USB connector bypivoting it, and pull out the USBadapter cable in the consolecompartment.

Do not keep the iPod in thevehicle. Direct sunlight and highheat will damage it.

1.

Connecting an iPod


290

NOTE:

USB ADAPTER CABLE

USB CONNECTOR

０９／０３／１３　１６：０４：３９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２９５　

2010 Pilot

Connect your dock connector tothe iPod correctly and securely.

Install the dock connector to theUSB adapter cable securely.

If the iPod indicator does not appearin the audio display, check theconnections, and try to reconnect theiPod a few times.

If the audio system still does notrecognize the iPod, the iPod mayneed to be reset. Follow theinstructions that came with youriPod, or you can find resetinstructions online at

The current file number and total ofthe selected playable files aredisplayed in the center display.Pressing the AUDIO button displaysthe artist, album and track (file)names on the navigation screen.

2.

3.

www.apple.com/ipod.

CONTINUED

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)F

eatures

291

USB ADAPTERCABLE

DOCK CONNECTOR

０９／０３／１３　１６：０４：４５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２９６　

2010 Pilot

－

You can also change files with theinterface dial. Press the AUDIObutton to show the audio controldisplay on the navigation screen.Push the selector to the right side toskip forward and to the left side toskip backward.

You can also select a file from any ofthe iPod menus: playlists, artists,albums and songs, by using theinterface dial. Press the AUDIObutton to display the audio controldisplay on the navigation screen.Push up the interface selector todisplay the iPod menu. Turn theknob on the interface dial to select adesired list.

Use the SKIP bar or button while aniPod is playing to select passages andchange files.

Each time you press andrelease the side of the SKIP baror button, the system skips forwardto the beginning of the next file.Press and release the side ofthe bar or button, to skip backwardto the beginning of the current file.Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous file.

To move rapidly within a file, pressand hold either side ( or )of the SKIP bar or button.

To Change or Select Files To Select a File from iPod Menu


SKIP

292

０９／０３／１３　１６：０４：５３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２９７　

2010 Pilot

Push ENTER on the selector todisplay the items on that list, thenturn the knob on the interface dial toselect a desired list. Pushing theselector up or down moves aselection to the top or bottom of thescreen items. Press ENTER to setyour selection.

If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on either theartists or albums list, all availablefiles on the selected list are played.

You can select any type of repeat andrandom mode on the audio menu.Press the AUDIO button to displaythe audio control screen, then pushdown the selector to display theaudio menu. Turn the knob on theinterface dial to select an audiomode: repeat, album random, andtrack random. Press ENTER to setyour selection.

Press the AUDIO button to go backto the normal audio playing display.Pressing the CANCEL button goesback to the previous screen, andpressing the MAP/GUIDE buttoncancels the audio control display onthe screen.

CONTINUED

To Select Repeat or Random Mode:


eatures

293

Push down the selector.

０９／０３／１３　１６：０４：５９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２９８　

2010 Pilot

－

－To cancel the selected mode, pressENTER again while the highlightedmode is selected on the audio controldisplay.

This featurecontinuously plays a file.To turn it off, press ENTER again.

This featureplays all available files from theselected items in the iPod menu list(playlists, artists, albums or songs)in random order. You will seeTRACK RANDOM on the screen.

To turn it off, have this modehighlighted and press ENTERagain.

Pressing either side of the SKIP baror button changes the file whilekeeping the repeat feature.

REPEAT

TRACK RANDOM


294

０９／０３／１３　１６：０５：０５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０２９９　

2010 Pilot

－

To turn it off, have this modehighlighted and press ENTER again.

You can also select another list fromthe iPod menu while keeping therandom function.

Available operating functions vary onmodels or versions. Some functionsmay not be available on the vehicle’saudio system.

This featureplays all available albums from theselected items in the iPod menu list(playlists, artists, albums or songs)in random order. The files in eachalbum are played in the recordedorder. You will see ALBUMRANDOM on the screen.

To play the radio, press the AM, FM,or XM button. Press the CD or CD/AUX button to switch to the discmode (if a disc is loaded).

CONTINUED

To Stop Playing Your iPod

ALBUM RANDOM


eatures

295

NOTE:

０９／０３／１３　１６：０５：１３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３００　

2010 Pilot

＊

＊

You can disconnect the iPod at anytime when you see ‘‘OK todisconnect’’ message in the iPoddisplay. Always make sure you see‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message in theiPod display before you disconnect it.Make sure to follow the iPod’sinstructions on how to disconnectthe dock connector from the USBadapter cable.

The displayed message mayvary on models or versions. Onsome models, there is nomessage to disconnect.

When you disconnect the iPod whileit is playing, the center display andthe audio screen (if selected) showNO DATA.

If you see an error message in thecenter display, see page .

If you reconnect the same iPod, thesystem may begin playing where itleft off, depending on what mode theiPod is in when it is reconnected.

:

297

Disconnecting an iPod iPod Error Messages


296

０９／０３／１３　１６：０５：１９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３０１　

2010 Pilot

If you see an error message in thecenter display while playing an iPod,find the solution in the chart to theright. If you cannot clear the errormessage, take your vehicle to yourdealer.


The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the iPod. Thereis a possibility that the files have been damaged.Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected.

iPod Error Messages (Models with navigation system)F

eatures

297

FILE ERROR

MEDIA ERROR

０９／０３／１３　１６：０５：２３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３０２　

2010 Pilot

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)

298

With rear entertainment system

INTERFACE DIAL

SKIP BAR

SCAN BUTTON

CD/AUX BUTTON

CENTER DISPLAY

AUDIO CONTROL DISPLAY

USB INDICATOR

CATEGORY BAR

MAP/GUIDE BUTTON

CANCEL BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

０９／０３／１３　１６：０５：３０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３０３　

2010 Pilot

＊

＊

This audio system can operate theaudio files on a USB flash memorydevice with the same controls usedfor the in-dash disc changer. To playa USB flash memory device, connectit to the USB adapter cable in theconsole compartment, then press theAUX button. The ignition switchmust be in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position.

Only AAC format files recordedwith iTunes are playable on thisaudio unit.

Do not keep a USB flash memorydevice in the vehicle. Directsunlight and high heat will damageit.

We recommend backing up yourdata before playing a USB flashmemory device.

Depending on the type andnumber of files, it may take sometime before they begin to play.

Depending on the software thefiles were made with, it may not bepossible to play some files, ordisplay some text data.

You can select the AUX mode byusing the navigation system voicecontrol buttons, but cannot operatethe play mode functions.

The recommended USB flashmemory devices are 256 MB orhigher. Some digital audio playersmay be compatible as well.

The audio system reads and playsthe audio files on the USB flashmemory device in MP3, WMA orAAC formats. Depending on theformat, the display shows MP3,WMA or AAC when a USB flashmemory device is playing. The USBflash memory device limit is up to700 folders or up to 65535 files.

Some USB flash memory devices(such as devices with security lock-out features, etc.) will not work inthis audio unit.

Do not use a device such as a cardreader or hard drive as the deviceor your files may be damaged.

Do not connect your USB flashmemory device using a hub.

Do not use an extension cable tothe USB adapter cable equippedwith your vehicle.

:

CONTINUED

To Play a USB Flash MemoryDevice

Voice Control System

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)F

eatures

299

NOTE:

０９／０３／１３　１６：０５：４１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３０４　

2010 Pilot

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－


Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)Bitrate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps(MPEG1)Supported standards:MPEG1 Audio Layer3MPEG2 Audio Layer3Partition:Top partition only


Maximum layers: 8

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHzBitrate:48 320/VBR kbps (Max 384)Supported standards:WMA version 7/8/9

Partition:Top partition onlyMaximum layers: 8

The specifications for compatibleAAC files are:

Sampling frequency:8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 kHzBitrate:48 320 kbpsSupported standards:MPEG4/AAC LCMPEG2/AAC LCPartition:Top partition onlyMaximum layers: 8

Some versions of MP3, WMA, orAAC format may not be supported. Ifan unsupported file is found, theaudio unit displays UNSUPPORTED,then skips to the next file.

In WMA or AAC format, DRM(digital rights management) filescannot be played. If the system findsa DRM file, the audio unit displaysUNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skipsto the next file.


300

０９／０３／１３　１６：０５：５５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３０５　

2010 Pilot

When the USB device is connectedand the USB mode is selected on theaudio system, the USB indicator isshown in the center display. It alsoshows the folder and file numbers.Pressing the AUDIO button displaysthe folder and file names, and theelapsed time in the navigation screen.

Unclip the USB connector bypivoting it, and pull out the USBadapter cable in the consolecompartment.

Connect the USB flash memorydevice to the USB adapter cablecorrectly and securely.

2.1.

CONTINUED

Connecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice


eatures

301

USB ADAPTER CABLE

USB CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLE

０９／０３／１３　１６：０６：０２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３０６　

2010 Pilot

－

－

＋－

You can also change files with theinterface dial. Press the AUDIObutton to show the audio controldisplay on the navigation screen.Push the selector knob to the rightside to skip to the beginning of thenext file, and to the left side to skipto the beginning of the current file.Pushing it to the left again skips tothe beginning of the previous file.

Use the SKIP bar or button while aUSB flash memory device is playingto select passages and change files.

Each time you press andrelease the side of the SKIP baror button, the system skips forwardto the beginning of the next file.Press and release the side ofthe bar or button, to skip backwardto the beginning of the current file.Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous file.

To move rapidly within a file, pressand hold either side ( or )of the SKIP bar or button.

To select adifferent folder, press and releaseeither side of the CATEGORY bar.Press the side to skip to the nextfolder, and press the side to skipto the beginning of the previousfolder.

To Change or Select Files


SKIP

Folder Selection

302

SKIP DIRECTION SKIP DIRECTION

０９／０３／１３　１６：０６：０９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３０７　

2010 Pilot

Push up the selector on the interfacedial to switch the display to thefolder list, then turn the knob on theinterface dial to select a folder.

Press ENTER to change the displayto the file list, then turn the knob onthe interface dial to select a file.Press ENTER to set your selection.

You can also select a folder or filefrom the list by using the interfacedial. Press the AUDIO button toshow the audio control display on thenavigation screen. To go back to the normal play

display, press the AUDIO button.Pressing the CANCEL button goesback to the previous screen andpressing the MAP/GUIDE buttoncancels the audio mode display.

CONTINUED

To Select a File from Folder and FileLists


eatures

303

０９／０３／１３　１６：０６：１６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３０８　

2010 Pilot

－

－

－

－

You can select any type of repeat,random and scan modes on the audiomenu screen. Press the AUDIObutton to show the audio controldisplay on the navigation screen.Push down the selector on theinterface dial to display the audiomenu items.

Turn the knob on the interface dialto select a play mode: folder random,track random, folder repeat, trackrepeat. Press ENTER to set yourselection.

To cancel the selected mode, pushdown the selector to display theaudio menu on the audio controldisplay. Turn the knob on theinterface dial to select the

highlighted play mode, then pressENTER to turn off that selectedmode.

This featurereplays all the files in the selectedfolder in the order they are stored.Pressing either side of theCATEGORY bar also turns off thisfeature.

Thisfeature plays the files in the selectedfolder in random order.

This featureplays all the files in random order.

This featurecontinuously plays a file. Pressingeither side of the SKIP bar or buttonalso turns off this feature.

To Select Repeat, Random or ScanMode:

FOLDER REPEAT

FOLDER RANDOM

TRACK RANDOM

TRACK REPEAT


304

０９／０３／１３　１６：０６：２４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３０９　

2010 Pilot

－－

You can also select the scan featurewith the SCAN button on the controlpanel.Press and release the SCAN button.Press and hold the SCAN button toget out of the scan mode and playthe last file sampled.

You can also select the folder scanfeature with the SCAN button on thecontrol panel. Press and release theSCAN button repeatedly.Press and hold the SCAN button toget out of the folder scan mode andplay the last file sampled.

This functionsamples all files in the selectedfolder in the order they are stored.To activate the scan feature, pushthe selector to the right. You will seeTRACK SCAN on the screen. Youwill also see SCAN on the centerdisplay and the file number blinking.You will get a 10 second sampling ofeach file in the folder. Push theselector to the right repeatedly to getout of the scan mode. The systemplays the last file sampled.

This functionsamples the first file in each folder inthe order they are stored. Toactivate the folder scan feature, pushthe selector to the right repeatedly.You will see FOLDER SCAN on thescreen. You will also see SCAN onthe center display and the foldernumber blinking. You will get a 10second sampling of the first file ineach folder. Push the selector to theright to get out of the scan mode.The system plays the last filesampled.

Pressing either side of theCATEGORY or SKIP bar or buttonalso turns off the feature.


TRACK SCAN FOLDER SCAN

Features

305

０９／０３／１３　１６：０６：２９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３１０　

2010 Pilot

You can disconnect the USB flashmemory device at any time even ifthe USB mode is selected on theaudio system. Make sure to followthe USB flash memory device’sinstructions when you remove it.

When you disconnect the USB flashmemory device while it is playing,the center display and the audioscreen (if selected) show NO DATA.

If you see an error message in thecenter display, see page .

To play the radio, press the AM, FM,or XM button. Press the CD or CD/AUX button to switch to the discmode (if a disc is loaded).

If you reconnect the same USB flashmemory device, the system willbegin playing where it left off.

307

To Stop Playing a USB FlashMemory Device

USB Flash Memory Device ErrorMessages

Disconnecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice


306

０９／０３／１３　１６：０６：３６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３１１　

2010 Pilot

If you see an error message in thecenter display while playing a USBflash memory device, find thesolution in the chart to the right. Ifyou cannot clear the error message,take your vehicle to your dealer.


The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flashmemory device. There is a possibility that the files have beendamaged.Appears when an unsupported USB flash memory device is connected.

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models with navigation system)F

eatures

307

FILE ERROR

MEDIA ERROR

０９／０３／１３　１６：０６：４０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３１２　

2010 Pilot

The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10 kHzapart (530, 540, 550). Stations on theFM band are assigned frequencies atleast 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,and atmospheric conditions.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

FM/AM Radio Reception

308

０９／０３／１３　１６：０６：４８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３１３　

2010 Pilot

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.


FM/AM Radio ReceptionF

eatures

309

０９／０３／１３　１６：０６：５３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３１４　

2010 Pilot

For more information, see page .

Auxiliary input jacks and headphoneconnectors for the rearentertainment system are on theback of the center consolecompartment.

The auxiliary input jack is inside thefront console compartment. Thesystem will accept auxiliary inputfrom standard audio accessories.

When a compatible audio unit isconnected to the jack, press the AUXor CD/AUX button to select it.

347

On vehicles with rear entertainmentsystem

Auxiliary Input Jack

310

Touring model is shown

０９／０３／１３　１６：０６：５９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３１５　

2010 Pilot

▲ ▼

＋－

＋－

＋

－

CONTINUED

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button, hold it untilthe desired volume is reached, thenrelease it.

If you are playing a disc, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you press the top( ) of the CH button. Press thebottom ( ) to return to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit again to return to the previoustrack. You will see the disc and tracknumbers in the upper display.

To search up and down from thecurrent frequency and find a stationwith a strong signal, press the top( ) or bottom ( ) of the button for1 second.

The MODE button changes themode.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press the top ( ) ofthe button, the system goes to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousstation.

Pressing the MODE buttonrepeatedly cycles through all present,connected media sources. Mediasources that are not present orconnected will not appear whencycling with the MODE button.

Pressing the MODE buttonrepeatedly cycles through allpossible media sources whether theyare present or not.

Except LX models


On vehicles without navigation system

Remote Audio ControlsF

eatures

311

VOL BUTTON CH BUTTON

MODE BUTTON

０９／０３／１３　１６：０７：０７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３１６　

2010 Pilot

＋

－

＋－

＋

－

＋

－

＋－

＋

－

If you are playing a DVD video, usethe channel button to changechapters. Each time you press thetop ( ) of the button, the systemgoes to the next chapter. Press thebottom ( ) to return to thebeginning of the current chapter.Press it again to return to theprevious chapter.

To go to the next disc, press the top( ) of the button for 1 second.Press the bottom ( ) for 1 secondto go back to the previous disc.When you play an MP3/WMA disc,press the top ( ) of the button for 1second to go to the next folder. Pressthe bottom ( ) for 1 second to goback to the previous folder.

If you are listening to XM Radio, usethe CH button to change channels.Each time you press the top ( ) ofthe button, the system goes to thenext preset channel. Press thebottom ( ) to go back to theprevious preset channel.To go to the next channel of thecategory you are listening to, pressthe top ( ) of the button for 1second. Press the bottom ( ) for 1second to go back to the previouschannel.

If you are playing a USB flashmemory device or iPod with the USBadapter cable, press and release thetop ( ) of the CH button to skipforward to the beginning of the nextfile. Press the bottom ( ) to skipbackward to the beginning to thecurrent file. Press it twice to returnto the previous file.



Remote Audio Controls

312

０９／０３／１３　１６：０７：１３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３１７　

2010 Pilot

Your vehicle’s audio system maydisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific five-digit code withthe preset buttons. Because thereare hundreds of numbercombinations possible from the fivedigits, making the system workwithout knowing the exact code isnearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system code numberand serial number. It is best to storethis card in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in this owner’smanual.

If you lose the card, you must obtainthe code number from your dealer.To do this, you will need the audiosystem’s serial number.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have ten tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in ten attempts, youmust then leave the system on for 1hour before trying again.

If your vehicle’s battery is discon-nected or goes dead, or the radiofuse is removed, the audio systemwill disable itself. If this happens,you will see ‘‘ ’’ in the audiodisplay the next time you turn on thesystem. Use the preset buttons toenter the five-digit code. The code islocated on the radio code cardincluded in your owner’s manual kit.When it is entered correctly, theradio will start playing.

The system will retain your AM andFM presets even if power isdisconnected.

Radio Theft ProtectionF

eatures

313

０９／０３／１３　１６：０７：２０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３１８　

2010 Pilot

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, press and holdthe CLOCK button, then press the R(reset) button to set the time back tothe previous hour. If the displayedtime is after the half hour, the sameprocedure sets the time forward tothe beginning of the next hour.

For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:001:52 will reset to 2:00

The navigation system receivessignals from the global positioningsystem (GPS), and the displayedtime is updated automatically by theGPS. Refer to the navigation systemmanual for how to adjust the time.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, you mayneed to set the clock.

To set the time, press the CLOCKbutton until you hear a beep. Thedisplayed time begins to blink.

Change the hours by pressing the H(hour) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time. Changethe minutes by pressing the M(minute) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time.

Press the CLOCK button again toenter the set time.


On Touring models

Setting the Clock

314

HOUR BUTTON(PRESET 4)

CLOCKBUTTON

EX and EX-L models

RESETBUTTON(PRESET 6)

HOURBUTTON(PRESET 4)

MINUTEBUTTON(PRESET 5)

MINUTE BUTTON(PRESET 5)

SELECTOR KNOBMENU BUTTON

EX-L model with rearentertainment system is shown.

LX models

CLOCK BUTTON

RESET BUTTON(PRESET 6)

０９／０３／１３　１６：０７：３１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３１９　

2010 Pilot

△

Turn the selector knob to select‘‘CLOCK ADJUST.’’

Press the selector knob (ENTER)to enter your selection. Thedisplay changes to the clockadjusting display.

Turn the selector knob to selectthe item which you want to adjust.Turning the selector knob willchange the selected item betweenthe clock display setting, hours,minutes, and SET. The selecteditem is indicated with in thedisplay.

You can also adjust the clock andswitch the clock display between 24-hours and 12-hours in the menumode.

To adjust the clock setting:

Press and release the MENUbutton. The display shows you themenu items.

You can adjust the clock settingwith the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

On EX and EX-L models

Setting the Clock

Adjusting the Clock with MENUButton

Features

315

０９／０３／１３　１６：０７：４１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３２０　

2010 Pilot

Turn the selector knob to countthe numbers up or down.

While setting the clock, pressingthe RETURN button will go backto the previous display.Pressing the MENU button againwill cancel this setting mode.

Press either the RETURN orMENU button to go back to thenormal display.

To set the time, turn the selectorknob and select the hours or theminutes, then press the knob toenter your selection. The displaychanges to the setting display.

Press the selector knob (ENTER)to enter your selection. Thedisplay will return to the clockadjusting display.

Turn the selector knob to changethe setting between 12H and 24H.

Press the selector knob (ENTER)to enter your selection. Thedisplay will return to the clockadjusting display.

To enter the clock setting, turnthe selector knob to select ‘‘SET,’’then press the knob. The displaywill return to the menu itemdisplay.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

11.

10.

Setting the Clock

316

MINUTE SETTING

０９／０３／１３　１６：０７：５１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３２１　

2010 Pilot

CONTINUED

Pressing the REAR CTRL OFFbutton disables rear control. Theindicator in the button comes on andyour passengers can no longeroperate the system with the rearcontrol panel. When the button ispressed, the ‘‘CTRL OFF’’ messageappears in the overhead screen to letyour passengers know that thecontrol panel is disabled.The rear system selects the source itwas last set to. If that source hasbeen removed (the DVD has beenejected from the player, for example),

you will see ‘‘DVD EJECT’’ in thedisplay. You should select anothersource or insert a DVD.Your vehicle is equipped with a rear

entertainment system that includes aDVD player for the enjoyment of therear passengers.

With this system, the rearpassengers can enjoy a differententertainment source (radio, discchanger, DVD player, XM Radio, oroptional CD changer/tape player)than the front seat occupants. Theaudio is broadcast through thesupplied wireless headphones.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position to operate the rearentertainment system.

When you turn on the system, therear speakers are automaticallyturned off if the rear system selectsa different entertainment sourcethan the front system. You will seethe Rear Speakers Off icon in theaudio display. The sound for the rearsystem is sent to the wirelessheadphones.

If you want to turn the rear speakerson again, press and hold the REARPWR button until the Rear SpeakersOff icon goes off.

The rear speakers areconnected to the front system, sothey will always play the source thatthe front system is set to.

Press the REAR PWR button. Theindicator on the REAR PWR buttonwill come on. The rear seatpassengers can then operate the rearsystem from the control panel in theceiling. The rear control panel canalso be detached and used as aremote control, by pushing theRELEASE button, and pulling theremote toward you.


To Turn On the System

Rear Speakers

Rear Entertainment SystemF

eatures

317

NOTE:

０９／０３／１３　１６：０８：００　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３２２　

2010 Pilot

Rear Entertainment System


318

Overhead Screen Unit

FRONT SOURCEBUTTON

REAR PWRBUTTON

REAR CTRL OFFBUTTON

REAR SOURCEBUTTON

０９／０３／１３　１６：０８：０５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３２３　

2010 Pilot

Open the overhead screen bypushing the OPEN button. Thescreen will swing down part-way.Pivot the screen the rest of the way.If you pivot the screen too farforward, past the second detent, thedisplay will turn off. Pivot the screenback to the second or first detent toturn the display back on. To closethe screen, pivot it up until it latches.

To operate the rear entertainmentsystem from the front panel, pressthe REAR SOURCE button. You willhear two beeps and the indicator inthe button comes on to show that thecontrol panel is enabled.

When REAR SOURCE is selected,the front entertainment systemaudio controls can also be used tooperate the rear entertainmentsystem in all modes.

If an audio CD is loaded into theupper slot, select the CD/AUXbutton. If a DVD or CD is loaded intothe lower slot, select the DVD button.

To play the radio, the buttons for thefront entertainment system have thesame functions.

The media that the rear passengersare listening to will then be heardfrom the front speakers.

If you do not operate the rearentertainment system from the frontpanel within 10 seconds, theindicator goes off and the FRONTSOURCE indicator comes onautomatically.

The DVD player in your rearentertainment system can play DVDvideo discs, audio CDs, video CDs,MP3/WMA discs and DTS CDs.

CONTINUED

To Select Rear Entertainmentfrom the Front Control Panel

Operating the DVD Player fromthe Front Control Panel


eatures

319

REAR CONTROL PANEL

OPEN BUTTON

OVERHEAD SCREEN

０９／０３／１３　１６：０８：１４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３２４　

2010 Pilot

－

－

Insert a DVD into the lower DVD/CD slot in the audio unit.

Push the DVD in halfway, the drivewill pull it in the rest of the way.

Press the button ifthe DVD does not start playingautomatically.

Press the button topause the DVD. Press the buttonagain or press PLAY to resume.Pause works only with the DVDplayer.

When the DVD menu is displayed,‘‘DVD MENU’’ and ‘‘Push tostart’’ appears. Press button toplay the DVD.


PLAY

PAUSE


320

PLAY/PAUSEBUTTON

SKIP BAR

EJECT BUTTON

０９／０３／１３　１６：０８：２２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３２５　

2010 Pilot

－－ Press the eject button toremove the DVD from the drive.

To return front panel control to thefront audio system, press theFRONT SOURCE button. You willhear a beep and the indicator in thebutton comes on. The indicator alsocomes on automatically when you donot operate the rear entertainmentsystem for 10 seconds.

To turn on the rear entertainmentsystem from the rear control panel,press the PWR button. Use the AM/FM button, XM button, CD button,or DVD/AUX button to select theentertainment source. The selectedsource will be shown in the display.Make sure the rear control operationhas not been disabled with the REARCTRL button on the front panel.When the audio system is off or thefront side rear power is off, the rearcontrol panel cannot be turned on.

Press and hold theside of the SKIP bar to move

forward; you will see the timeelapsed shown in the overheadscreen advances rapidly. Press andhold the side of the SKIP bar tomove backward; you will see thetime elapsed shown in the overheadscreen decreases. Release the barwhen the system reaches the pointyou want.

Each time you press the side ofthe SKIP bar and release it, thesystem skips forward to thebeginning of the next track orchapter. Press and release the

side of the SKIP bar to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press and release itagain to skip to the beginning of theprevious track or chapter.

EJECT

To Return to Front AudioControls

Using the Rear Control PanelSEEK/SKIP


eatures

321

０９／０３／１３　１６：０８：２９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３２６　

2010 Pilot

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

Use the , , , orbutton to highlight SEEK,

TUNE, AUTO SELECT, SCAN, orone of the preset radio stations onthe overhead screen. You can enterthe highlighted function by pressingthe ENT button. These functionshave the same features as those ofthe front audio system. You can alsouse the or buttons to seekup/down and or to tuneup/down.

You can also use the orbuttons to change categories

up/down and or to changechannels up/down within a category(in CATEGORY mode) or up/downfor all channels (in CH mode).

Use the , , , orbutton to highlight CATE (to

change categories), CHAN (tochange channels), MODE (to

change category or channel mode),SCAN, or one of the preset channelson the overhead screen. You canenter the highlighted function bypressing the ENT button. Thesefunctions have the same features asthose of the front audio system.

To Play the Radio from the RearControl Panel

To Play the XM Radio from theRear Control Panel


322

REAR CONTROL PANEL

０９／０３／１３　１６：０８：３７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３２７　

2010 Pilot

▲ ▼

▲

▲

▼

▼

▼▲

▲ ▼

While the overhead screen is closed,you can see the XM Radioinformation in the subsidiary displayin the ceiling. Pressing the DISPMODE button repeatedly changesthe subsidiary display from thechannel number, to the categoryname, to the music title, to the artistname, and to the channel name, andthen back to the channel number.

To change mode, press and hold theDISP MODE button for 5 seconds.

Use the , , , orbutton to highlight REPEAT,

RANDOM, SCAN, , (skip),, or (cue) on the overhead

screen. You can enter thehighlighted function by pressing theENT button. These functions havethe same features as those of thefront audio system.

If discs are loaded in the discchanger, select them by pressing theCD button.

To change the disc currently playing,use the , , , or

button to highlight yourselected disc icon, and press ENT.

If CDs are loaded in the CD changerand the overhead screen is not open,pressing the or button changesthe discs.

If an iPod or USB flash memorydevice is connected to the USBadapter cable in the consolecompartment, you can select files toplay.

For an iPod , use the , ,, or button to highlight

REPEAT, RANDOM, ,(skip), , or (cue) on

the overhead screen.

For a USB flash memory device, usethe , , , or

button to highlight REPEAT,RANDOM, SCAN, , (skip),

, or (cue) on the overheadscreen.


To Play a Disc in the 6-DiscChanger from the Rear ControlPanel

To Play an iPod or USB FlashMemory Device from the RearControl Panel

Features

323

０９／０３／１３　１６：０８：４７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３２８　

2010 Pilot

The video screen is for use by rearseat passengers only. The driver andfront seat passenger should not tryto view the screen while driving.

Open the overhead screen bypushing the OPEN button. Thescreen will swing down part-way.Pivot the screen the rest of the way.If you pivot the screen too farforward, past the second detent, thedisplay will turn off. Pivot the screenback to the second or first detent toturn the display back on. To closethe screen, pivot it up until it latches.

Press the button when youwant to pause the DVD. Press thisbutton again to go back to PLAY.

Press the button to skip to thebeginning of the next chapter. Pressthe button to return to thebeginning of the current chapter.

Press the button again quicklyto go to the previous chapter.

To move rapidly within a chapter,press and hold the or

button. The system willcontinue to move through thechapter. Press the button tomove forward, or the button tomove backward. Release the buttonwhen the system reaches the pointyou want.

To select the menu on the DVD,press the MENU/SCROLL button.Use the , , , and

buttons to move to the desiredmenu selection, then press the ENTbutton to enter your selection.

To Play a DVD from the RearControl Panel


324

REAR CONTROL PANEL

OPENBUTTON

OVERHEAD SCREEN

０９／０３／１３　１６：０８：５６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３２９　

2010 Pilot

When you press the MENUSCROLL button while a DVD isplaying, the DVD Menu appears.The menu options are TOP MENU,MENU, PLAY MODE, SEARCH,and NumInput.

To go to your selected menu, use theor button to highlight the

icon and press the ENT button. Toreturn to the DVD video screen,select EXIT.

When you select ‘‘TOP MENU’’, thescreen changes to the DVD’s titlemenu. This menu also appears whenyou press the MENU SCROLLbutton while a DVD is not playing.To go back to play, press theRETURN button.

Top Menu

When you press the DISP MODEbutton while a DVD is playing, thecurrent status of title, chapter,elapsed time, angle, subtitle, audio,and sound characteristics, with thepersonal surround logo are displayed.To return to the DVD video screen,press the DISP MODE button again.

CONTINUED


MENU SCROLL ButtonDISP MODE Button

Features

325

０９／０３／１３　１６：０９：０５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３３０　

2010 Pilot

▲▼

Menu Play Mode

When you select ‘‘MENU’’ with theor button, the screen

changes to the DVD’s title menu.

When you select ‘‘PLAY MODE’’with the or button, youcan change the DVD’s Audio,Subtitle or Angle setting.

To change the Audio setting,highlight ‘‘Audio’’ from the playmode menu with the or

button. A submenu of dubbedlanguages appears. You can selectanother language by pressing the

or button. The soundcharacteristics (Dolby Digital,LPCM, MPEG Audio, dts) recordedwith the selected language is alsodisplayed next to the language.

‘‘Audio’’


326

０９／０３／１３　１６：０９：１３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３３１　

2010 Pilot

▼ ▲

▼▲

▼ ▲

CONTINUED

‘‘Subtitle’’The selectable languages vary fromDVD to DVD, and this feature maynot be available on some DVDs.

Press the RETURN button or cursorback with the or button togo back to the top of the Play Modemenu. Press the RETURN buttonagain to exit completely.

After selecting your desired subtitle,press the RETURN button or cursorback with the or button togo back to the top of the Play Modemenu. Press the RETURN buttonagain to exit completely.

To change the DVD’s subtitle,highlight ‘‘Subtitle’’ from the playmode menu with the or

button. You can see theavailable subtitles with the or

button.


eatures

327

０９／０３／１３　１６：０９：２０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３３２　

2010 Pilot

▼ ▲

▲▼

‘‘Angle’’

When you highlight ‘‘Search’’ withthe or button, the ‘‘Jumpto chapter and title number input’’message appears. To select‘‘Chapter’’ or ‘‘Title’’ search, pressthe ENT button.

SearchIf there are no multiple anglesavailable on the DVD, you cannotchange from ‘‘Angle 1’’.

Press the RETURN button or cursorback with the or button togo back to the top of the Play Modemenu.

Press the RETURN button again toexit completely.

To change the view angle, highlight‘‘Angle’’ from the play mode menuwith the or button. Youcan see the available angle optionswith the or button.


328

０９／０３／１３　１６：０９：２８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３３３　

2010 Pilot

▲▼

CONTINUED

‘‘Title/Chapter Search’’

With ‘‘Title’’ highlighted, use theor button to jump to your

desired title and press the ENTbutton. When ‘‘Chapter’’ ishighlighted, follow the sameprocedure for the chapter search.

A numerical command can be issuedto a DVD by inputting a two digitnumber, and a button number can beselected on the screen.

Select the first digit number usingthe , , , or

button, and enter it by pressingthe ENT button. If you want tochange the number, select ‘‘DEL,’’and press the ENT button, thenselect and enter the new number.

When you highlight, ‘‘NumInput’’with the or button, the‘‘Jump to keypad’’ message appears.Press the ENT button to go to theNumInput selection screen.

Num Input


eatures

329

０９／０３／１３　１６：０９：３６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３３４　

2010 Pilot

▼ ▲

Select and enter the second digitnumber the same way. The cursorwill automatically move to the ‘‘ENT’’icon when you press the ENT button.Press the ENT button to enter thenumber command. To go back to theDVD screen, press the RETURNbutton or select EXIT and press theENT button.

When you press the SETUP buttonwhile a DVD is playing, the setupmenu appears. The menu options areDISP ADJUSTMENT, ASPECTRATIO, and PERSONALSURROUND.

To change a setup, use the orbutton to highlight your

selection and press the ENT button.To return to the DVD video screen,select EXIT.

To adjust the display, highlight ‘‘DispAdjust’’ from the setup menu withthe or button and pressthe ENT button. You can adjustthese display settings:

BrightnessContrastBlack LevelTintColor

Disp Adjust


SETUP Button

330

０９／０３／１３　１６：０９：４４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３３５　

2010 Pilot

▼ ▲▲▼

CONTINUED

Select the quality you want to adjustby pressing the or button.Adjust the setting by pressing the

or button. When you arefinished with your adjustment,cursor back to the top of the setupmenu, or press the RETURN buttonto exit.

The display changes as shown above.

Select ‘‘Yes,’’ and press the ENTbutton. You will see the message‘‘Default display settings applied’’ onthe display for 5 seconds.

If you want to set the display to thedefault setting, select ‘‘Reset’’ bypressing the or button, thenpress the ENT button.


eatures

331

０９／０３／１３　１６：０９：５２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３３６　

2010 Pilot

Select the ‘‘Aspect Ratio’’ by pressingthe or button, then pressthe ENT button.

The selectable setting menu isdisplayed, and the current setting ishighlighted in blue.

You can set the screen mode tothese settings:

NormalWideZoomFull

Select the desired setting bypressing the or button,then press the ENT button.

Aspect Ratio


332

０９／０３／１３　１６：０９：５８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３３７　

2010 Pilot

▲▼

CONTINUED

To change the Personal Surroundsetting, highlight ‘‘PERSONALSURROUND’’ from the setup menuwith the or button andpress the ENT button. The effectselection appears.

If you select ‘‘Off,’’ the logodisappears, and there will be nospecial sound effect.

Select ‘‘Cinema,’’ ‘‘Music,’’ or ‘‘Voice’’by pressing the or button,and enter your selection by pressingthe ENT button. The ‘‘PERSONALSURROUND’’ logo is displayed inthe upper right corner of the screen.

Personal Surround


eatures

333

０９／０３／１３　１６：１０：０４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３３８　

2010 Pilot

▼ ▲

When you press the SETUP buttonon the rear control panel when aDVD is not playing, the ‘‘INITIALSETTINGS’’ menu is displayed.

When you select ‘‘Language’’ withthe or button, the menushown above appears.

There are two selectable menus:‘‘Language’’ and ‘‘Others.’’

Menu Language

To return to the stop or prestopscreen, select ‘‘Exit’’ using the

or button, and then pressthe ENT, or the SETUP button.

To select the language used in theDISC menus, select ‘‘MenuLanguage’’ by pressing the orbutton.

INITIAL SETTINGS Menu INITIAL SETTINGS (Language)


334

０９／０３／１３　１６：１０：１３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３３９　

2010 Pilot

If you want another language thanthose listed, you need to enter thecode number of the desired language.Select ‘‘other,’’ and press the ENTbutton. The display changes asshown in the next column.

If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press theENT button, the display returns tothe initial screen of the ‘‘Language’’menu.

Select the desired language bypressing the or button.

The selectable languages are,English, French, Spanish, German,Italian, Dutch, Chinese, Korean, Thai,Japanese or others.

CONTINUED


eatures

335

０９／０３／１３　１６：１０：２０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３４０　

2010 Pilot

▼ ▲

Audio Language

If you select ‘‘Yes,’’ the displaychanges to the language code inputmode. Select the first number digitusing the , , , or

button, and press the ENTbutton to enter it. Repeat this until allfour digits are filled. When thefourth digit is entered, the cursorautomatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on thedisplay. Press the ENT button on thecontrol panel to enter the newlanguage code.

If you made a mistake entering anumber digit, select ‘‘DEL’’ on thedisplay with the , , ,or button, and press the ENTbutton on the control panel. Thenselect and enter the correct numberdigit as described. The displayreturns to the initial ‘‘Language’’menu screen.

You can select the dubbed languagebefore playing DVDs.Select ‘‘Audio Language’’ by pressingthe or button. You will see thesubmenu next to ‘‘Audio Language.’’

Follow the same instructions youused to set the menu language.


336

０９／０３／１３　１６：１０：２９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３４１　

2010 Pilot

▼ ▲

Subtitle Language

You can select the subtitle languagebefore playing DVDs.Select ‘‘Subtitle Language’’ bypressing the or button. You willsee the submenu next to the‘‘Subtitle Language.’’

Dynamic Range‘‘Dynamic Range’’ reduces thedifferences between the loud andquiet sound levels throughout thedisc. When this is on, the loudersounds are lowered, and quietersounds are increased.

When you select ‘‘Others’’ at the topof the ‘‘INITIAL SETTINGS’’ screen,the above menu appears on thescreen.

Follow the same instructions youused to set the menu language.

CONTINUED

INITIAL SETTINGS (Others)


eatures

337

０９／０３／１３　１６：１０：３７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３４２　

2010 Pilot

▼ ▲ ▼ ▲When you select the ‘‘DynamicRange’’ by pressing the orbutton, you will see the submenunext to the ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ asshown above.

Angle Mark

When you switch to another anglewhile playing a DVD, the angle markis displayed in the upper right cornerof the screen.

You can set the system to display ornot display this angle mark.To turn ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ on or off,

select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ by pressingthe or button.

Select ‘‘Angle Mark’’ by pressing theor button. The above submenu

appears. If you want the angle markto be displayed, select ‘‘ON’’ with the

or button.


338

ANGLE MARK

０９／０３／１３　１６：１０：４５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３４３　

2010 Pilot

When you select and enter ‘‘Yes,’’the display changes as shown above.To change the level, you need toenter your four digit password.Select the number for the first digitby pressing the , , , or

button, and enter it by pressingthe ENT button. Repeat this until allfour digits are filled. When you enterthe fourth number, the cursorautomatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on thedisplay. Press the ENT button on thecontrol panel.

You can place an auditory restrictionby changing the parental controllevel. The higher the level number,the lower the restriction.

Highlight ‘‘Parental Level’’ and pressENT button. You will see thesubmenu. If you select ‘‘No’’ andpress the ENT button, the screengoes back to the ‘‘Others’’ menu.

Parental Level

CONTINUED


eatures

339

０９／０３／１３　１６：１０：５３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３４４　

2010 Pilot

If the system does not recognize thepassword you entered, you will seethe above display. Repeat theparental control level steps until youenter the correct password.

If you enter the password correctly,you can then change the parentalcontrol level.

The password was set to ‘‘1111’’when the vehicle left the factory.

Changing the Password


340

０９／０３／１３　１６：１０：５９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３４５　

2010 Pilot

To change the password, select‘‘Password.’’ You will see the abovemenu displayed. Select ‘‘Yes’’ bypressing the or button,then press the ENT button.

If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press theENT button, the display returns tothe ‘‘Others’’ menu.

Select the first digit by pressing the, , , or button,

and enter it by pressing the ENTbutton. Repeat this until all fourdigits are entered. When you enterthe fourth number, the cursorautomatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on thedisplay. Press the ENT button on thecontrol panel.

If the system does not recognize thepassword you entered, you will seethe above display. Repeat thepassword setting steps until youenter the correct password.

CONTINUED


eatures

341

０９／０３／１３　１６：１１：０８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３４６　

2010 Pilot

▲If you forget the password, select‘‘Password,’’ and press the button10 times.

The display changes as shown above.If you want to use the defaultpassword (1111), select ‘‘Yes,’’ andpress the ENT button.

The message ‘‘Default passwordsetting applied’’ is displayed for5 seconds.

The rear control panel can bedetached from the ceiling unit andused as a remote control. To removeit from the ceiling unit, press therelease button. The control panel willswing down partway. Pivot it downfurther past the detent until itdetaches from the hinge. To reinstallit, reverse the procedure.


Remote Control

342

RELEASE BUTTON

０９／０３／１３　１６：１１：１４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３４７　

2010 Pilot

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to operate the rearentertainment system, have yourdealer replace the batteries as soonas possible.

Battery type: BR3032

An improperly disposed of batterycan hurt the environment.Always confirm local regulations forbattery disposal.





Replacing the Remote ControlBatteries

Features

343

COVER

０９／０３／１３　１６：１１：２１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３４８　

2010 Pilot

＃

There are various types of DVDsavailable. Some of them are notcompatible with your system.

The DVD player in your rearentertainment system can playDVDs and CDs bearing the abovemarks on their packages or jackets.

Those packages or jackets shouldalso bear the designation of ‘‘1’’ or‘‘ALL’’ region. DVD-ROMs cannot beplayed in this system.

The DVD player can also play discsrecorded in MP3/WMA formats andDTS CDs.

This product incorporates copyrightprotection technology that isprotected by U.S. patents and otherintellectual property rights.

Use of this copyright protectiontechnology must be authorized byMacrovision, and is intended forhome and other limited viewing usesonly unless otherwise authorized byMacrovision.

Manufactured under license underU.S. Patent ’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674;5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 &other U.S. and worldwide patentsissued & pending. DTS and DTSDigital Surround are registeredtrademarks and the DTS logos andSymbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc.

1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All RightsReserved.

Reverse engineering or disassemblyis prohibited.

The tips on how to handle andprotect DVDs are basically the sameas those for compact discs. Refer to‘‘Protecting Your CDs’’ on page .285

Playable DVDs

Protecting DVDs


344

０９／０３／１３　１６：１１：３１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３４９　

2010 Pilot



The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out the disc.

Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.


FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

Invalid region code

Invalid parentalcontrol level

Press the disc eject button, and remove the disc.Check for an error indication. Insert the discagain. If the code does not disappear or the disccannot be removed, consult your dealer.Press the disc eject button, and remove the disc.Check for an error indication. Insert the discagain. If the code does not disappear or the disccannot be removed, consult your dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.The disc is not playable in this unit. Eject thedisc, and insert a disc compatible with thissystem.Reinsert the disc, and increase the parentalcontrol level (see page 339).


DVD Player Error Messages

Features

345

CHECK DISC

MECH ERROR

HEAT ERROR

REGION ERR

PARENTAL CHECK

０９／０３／１３　１６：１１：３８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３５０　

2010 Pilot

Some state and local governmentagencies prohibit the use ofheadphones by the driver of a motorvehicle. Always obey applicable lawsand regulations.

The audio for the rear entertainmentsystem is sent to the wirelessheadphones that come with thesystem. When using the headphones,make sure you wear them correctly:L (left) and R (right) are marked onthe sides of the frame. Wearing theheadphones backwards may affectaudio reception, limiting the soundquality and range.

To use the headphones, pivot theearpieces outward. This turns themon. To adjust the volume, turn thedial on the bottom of the rightearpiece. When you remove theheadphones, the earpiecesautomatically pivot inward, and theheadphones turn off. When not inuse, store the headphones in thepocket of either front seat, or therear door lining pockets.

Wireless Headphones


346

VOLUME DIAL

０９／０３／１３　１６：１１：４３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３５１　

2010 Pilot

CONTINUED

Auxiliary input jacks and headphoneconnectors for the rearentertainment system are on theback of the center consolecompartment.

Remove the battery. Install the newbattery in the earpiece as shown inthe diagram next to the battery slot.Slide the cover back into place on theearpiece, then press down on theback edge to lock it in place.

Each headphone uses one AAAbattery. The battery is under thecover on the left earpiece. Toremove the cover, insert a coin in theslot and twist it slightly to pry thecover away from the earpiece. Pullthe cover outward, and pivot it out ofthe way. An improperly disposed of battery

can hurt the environment.Always confirm local regulations forbattery disposal.


Replacing Batteries Auxiliary Input Jacks

Features

347

COVER

BATTERYTAB

０９／０３／１３　１６：１１：５１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３５２　

2010 Pilot

There are three headphoneconnectors for the third seatpassengers. Each connector has itsown volume control.

The system will accept auxiliaryinputs from standard video gamesand video equipment.Some video game power suppliesmay cause poor picture quality.

V = Video jackL = Left audio jackR = Right audio jack


348

AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS

VOLUME DIALS

HEADPHONE CONNECTORS

０９／０３／１３　１６：１１：５７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３５３　

2010 Pilot

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, the hood, the tailgate, and theglass hatch. For the system toactivate, you must lock the doors,the tailgate and the glass hatch fromthe outside with the key, driver’slock tab, door lock master switch, orremote transmitter. The securitysystem indicator on the instrumentpanel starts blinking immediately toshow you the system is setting itself.

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights and taillights flashes ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the audio unit.This alarm continues for twominutes, then the system resets. Toreset an activated system before thetwo minutes have elapsed, unlockthe driver’s door with the key or theremote transmitter. Once the security system is set,

opening any door, the tailgate, theglass hatch, or the hood withoutusing the key or the remotetransmitter will cause the alarm toactivate. It will also activate if theradio is removed from the dashboardor the wiring is cut.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, the tailgate, the glasshatch, or any door is not fully closed.If the system will not set, check thatthe doors, the tailgate and the hoodare fully closed.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

Except LX models

Security SystemF

eatures

349


０９／０３／１３　１６：１２：０３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３５４　

2010 Pilot

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Push in the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel. The CRUISEMAIN indicator on the instrumentpanel comes on.

Press and release the SET/DECEL button on the steeringwheel. The CRUISE CONTROLindicator on the instrument panelcomes on to show the system isnow activated.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

The cruise control system can beleft on, even when it is not in use.

1.

2.

3.Using Cruise Control

Cruise Control

350

CRUISE BUTTON

CANCEL BUTTON SET/DECELBUTTON

RES/ACCELBUTTON

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

０９／０３／１３　１６：１２：１１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３５５　

2010 Pilot

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

Push on the accelerator pedal.Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed, then press the SET/DECEL button.

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your vehicle speedincreases going down a hill, use thebrakes to slow down. This will cancelthe cruise control. To resume the setspeed, press the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatoron the instrument panel will comeback on.

To increase the speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, your vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

If you need to decrease yourspeed quickly, use the brakes as younormally would.

Tap the brake pedal lightly withyour foot. The CRUISECONTROL indicator on theinstrument panel will go out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the SET/DECEL button.

Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

CONTINUED

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise ControlF

eatures

351

NOTE:

０９／０３／１３　１６：１２：２０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３５６　

2010 Pilot

Tap the brake pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Resting your foot on the brake pedalcauses cruise control to cancel.

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel.

When you push the CANCEL buttonor tap the brake pedal, the systemremembers the previously set speed.To return to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h), then pressand release the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatorcomes on. The vehicle accelerates tothe same speed as before.

Pressing the CRUISE button turnsthe system completely off and erasesthe previous cruising speed.

Even with cruise control turned on,you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Cruise Control

Resuming the Set SpeedCanceling Cruise Control

352

CANCEL BUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON

０９／０３／１３　１６：１２：２８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３５７　

2010 Pilot

CONTINUED

The compass may need to bemanually calibrated after exposure toa strong magnetic field. If thecompass seems to be continuallyshowing the wrong direction and isnot self-calibrating, or the compassdisplay is blinking with the CALindicator on, do the following.


Press and hold the MENU buttonfor about 5 seconds until you heara beep. The display shows you thecompass setting menu items.

Compass operation can be affectedby driving near power lines orstations, across bridges, throughtunnels, over railroad crossings, pastlarge vehicles, or driving near largeobjects that can cause a magneticdisturbance. It can also be affectedby accessories such as antennas androof racks that are mounted bymagnets.

If the compass display is blinkingand the CAL indicator is shown, thecompass is self-calibrating.

Press and hold the RPT buttonand TUNE/SOUND knob forabout 2 seconds until you hear abeep. The display shows you thecompass setting menu items.

1.

2.



On LX models

Compass

Compass CalibrationCompass Operation

Features

353

COMPASS COMPASS SETTING MENU ITEMS

０９／０３／１３　１６：１２：３８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３５８　

2010 Pilot

Turn the selector or TUNE/SOUND knob to select‘‘CALIBRATION.’’

Press the selector or TUNE/SOUND knob to enter yourselection. The display shows you‘‘PUSH CAL START.’’

While setting the compass,pressing the RETURN button (onEX and EX-L models) will go backto the previous display. Pressingthe MENU button will cancel thecompass setting mode.

Press the selector or TUNE/SOUND knob. The compassdisplay is blinking and the CALindicator is shown.

Drive the vehicle slowly in twocomplete circles.

When the calibration is successfullycompleted, the CAL indicator goesoff and the compass display will stopblinking and show an actual heading.

The audio system is not related tothe compass system. Even if thecompass system is calibrating, thedisplay returns to the normal displaywhich you last selected.

Do this procedure in an openarea, away from buildings, powerlines, and other vehicles.

5.

6.

4.3.

Compass

354

NOTE:

０９／０３／１３　１６：１２：４６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３５９　

2010 Pilot

In most areas, there is a variationbetween magnetic north and truenorth. Zone selection is required sothe compass can compensate for thisvariation. To check and select thezone, do this:


Find the zone for your area on themap (see page ). If the correctzone is not shown, turn theselector or TUNE/SOUND knobto cycle the zone lists up or down.

Press and hold the MENU buttonfor about 5 seconds until you heara beep. The display shows you thecompass setting menu items.

Press and hold the RPT buttonand TUNE/SOUND knob forabout 2 seconds until you hear abeep. The display shows you thecompass setting menu items.

Turn the selector or TUNE/SOUND knob to select ‘‘ZONE.’’Press the selector knob to enteryour selection. The display showsyou the currently selected zonenumber.

If necessary, press the RETURNbutton (on EX and EX-L models)to return to the previous display.Pressing the MENU button willcancel the compass setting mode.

Once the correct zone is displayed,press the selector or TUNE/SOUND knob. The display thenreturns to normal.

4.

1.

2.

3.

5.

356

CONTINUED


On LX models

Compass

Compass Zone Selection

Features

355

ZONE NUMBER

０９／０３／１３　１６：１２：５６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３６０　

2010 Pilot

The audio system is not related tothe compass system. Even if thecompass system is in the zonesetting mode, the display returns tothe normal display which you lastselected.

Compass

356

Zone Map

０９／０３／１３　１６：１３：００　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３６１　

2010 Pilot

The HomeLink UniversalTransceiver built into your vehiclecan be programmed to operate up tothree remote controlled devicesaround your home, such as garagedoors, lighting, or home securitysystems.

Before programming yourHomeLink to operate a garage dooropener, confirm that the opener hasan external entrapment protectionsystem, such as an ‘‘electronic eye,’’or other safety and reverse stopfeatures.

If your garage door wasmanufactured before April 1, 1982,you may not be able to programHomeLink to operate it. These unitsdo not have safety features thatcause the motor to stop and reverseit if an obstacle is detected duringclosing, increasing the risk of injury.

Do not use HomeLink with anygarage door opener that lacks safetystop and reverse features.

CONTINUED

Except LX models General Safety Information

HomeLink Universal TransceiverF

eatures

357

０９／０３／１３　１６：１３：０６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３６２　

2010 Pilot

－

×

If you justreceived your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button.To do this, press and hold the twooutside buttons on the HomeLinktransceiver for about 20 seconds,until the red indicator flashes.Release the buttons, then proceed tostep 1.

Refer to the safety information thatcame with your garage door openerto test that the safety features arefunctioning properly. If you do nothave this information, contact themanufacturer of the equipment.Before programming HomeLink to agarage door or gate opener, makesure that people and objects are outof the way of the device to preventpotential injury or damage.When programming a garage dooropener, park just outside the garage.

Units manufactured between April 1,1982 and January 1, 1993 may beequipped with safety stop andreverse features. If your unit doesnot have an external entrapmentprotection system, an easy test toconfirm the function andperformance of the safety stop andreverse feature is to lay a 2 4under the closing door. The doorshould stop and reverse uponcontacting the piece of wood.As an additional safety feature,garage door openers manufacturedafter January 1, 1993 are required tohave external entrapment protectionsystems, such as an electronic eye,which detect an object obstructingthe door.

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Training HomeLinkImportant Safety PrecautionsBefore you begin

358

０９／０３／１３　１６：１３：１３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３６３　

2010 Pilot

If you are training the second or third buttons, go directly to step 1.

CONTINUED

HomeLink Universal TransceiverF

eatures

359

０９／０３／１３　１６：１３：２６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３６４　

2010 Pilot

HomeLink is a registeredtrademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.




HomeLink Universal Transceiver

360

０９／０３／１３　１６：１３：３１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３６５　

2010 Pilot

－

－

Bluetooth

handsfreelink.honda.com

www.honda.ca,

HandsFreeLink (HFL)allows you to place and receivephone calls using voice commands,without handling your cell phone.

Press andrelease to give a command or answera call.

Press andrelease to end a call, go back to theprevious command, or cancel thecommand.

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list ofcompatible phones, pairingprocedures, and special featurecapabilities:

In the U.S., visitor call (888) 528-7876.

In Canada, visit or call(888) 9-HONDA-9.

CONTINUED

On models with navigation systemHFL Buttons

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

Using HFL

HFL Talk button

HFL Back button

Features

361

HFL BACK BUTTON

NAVI VOICECONTROLBUTTONS

HFL TALK BUTTON

０９／０３／２３　１４：１５：１１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３６６　

2010 Pilot

Try to reduce all backgroundnoise. If the microphone picks upvoices other than yours,commands may be misinterpreted.

Many commands can be spokentogether. For example, you cansay ‘‘Call 123-456-7890’’ or ‘‘DialPeter.’’

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton each time you want tomake a command. After the beep,speak in a clear, natural tone.

When HFL is in use, navigationvoice commands cannot berecognized.

To change the volume level ofHFL, use the audio system volumeknob or the steering wheel volumecontrols.

Air or wind noise from thedashboard and side vents andwindows may interfere with themicrophone. Adjust or close themas necessary.


Voice Control Tips

362

MICROPHONE

０９／０３／２３　１４：１５：１９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３６７　

2010 Pilot

CONTINUED

To hear general HFL information,including help on pairing a phoneor setting up the system, say‘‘Tutorial.’’

For help at any time, including alist of available commands, say‘‘Hands free help.’’

As an incoming call notification, youwill see the following display:

Some phones may send battery,signal strength, and roaming statusinformation to HFL.

The Bluetooth icon will alsoappear on the center display when aphone is linked.


Help Features Information Display

Features

363

PHONE DIALING

BATTERY LEVELSTATUS

SIGNAL STRENGTH

HFL MODE

ROAM STATUS

０９／０３／２３　１４：１５：３０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３６８　

2010 Pilot

A notification that there is anincoming call, or HFL is in use, willappear on the navigation screenwhen the audio system is on.

When there is an incoming call, orHFL is in use, ‘‘HANDS FREELINK’’ will appear on the centerdisplay.


364

０９／０３／２３　１４：１５：３５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３６９　

2010 Pilot

＃＃＃＃

CONTINUED


How to Use HFL

Features

365

‘‘Phone Setup’’

‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial’’

‘‘Pair’’

‘‘Edit’’

‘‘Delete’’

‘‘Jim Smith’’

‘‘Set PairingCode’’

The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

‘‘List’’

‘‘Status’’

‘‘Next Phone’’

‘‘123-555- ’’

Press HFLTalk button

Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.

Pair a phone to the system (See page 368)

Edit the name of a paired phone (See page 369)

Delete a paired phone from the system (See page 369)

Hear a list of all phones paired to the system (See page 369)

Hear which paired phone is currently linked to the system(See page 370)

Search for another previously paired phone to link to (See page 370)

Set the pairing code to a ‘‘Fixed’’ or ‘‘Random’’ number(See page 370)

Enter desired phone number (See page 371)

Once a phonebook entry is stored, you can say a name here.(See page 371)

０９／０３／２３　１４：１５：４４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３７０　

2010 Pilot


366

‘‘Redial’’

‘‘Transfer’’

‘‘Mute’’

‘‘Send’’

‘‘Phonebook’’

‘‘Store’’

‘‘Edit’’

‘‘Delete’’

‘‘ReceiveContact’’

‘‘List’’



Redial the last number called (See page 372)

Transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL (See page 374)

Mute your voice to the person at the other end of the call (See page 374)

Send numbers or names during a call (See page 374)

Store a phonebook entry (See page 375)

Edit the number of an existing phonebook entry (See page 375)

Delete a phonebook entry (See page 376)

If your phone supports this function, use this to transfer contacts fromyour phone to HFL (See page 376)

Hear a list of all stored phonebook entries (See page 376)

０９／０３／２３　１４：１５：５１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３７１　

2010 Pilot

＊

＊

CONTINUED

Bluetooth HandsFreeLinkF

eatures

367

‘‘Change Language’’

‘‘Hands Free Help’’

‘‘SystemSet up’’

‘‘Tutorial’’

‘‘Clear’’

‘‘Auto Transfer’’

‘‘Call Notification’’

‘‘Security’’

‘‘Change Passcode’’



: Canadian models

Apply a security passcode to the system that must be input at each keycycle to access the system (See page 381)

Change your security passcode (See page 382)

Set how you would like to be notified of an incoming call(See page 382)

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when youenter the vehicle (See page 382)

Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries and securitypasscode (See page 383)

Change language from English to French (See page 384)

Hear a tutorial for general rules on using the system (See page 363)

Hear a list of available commands and additional information describing each command(See page 363)

０９／０３／２３　１４：１５：５９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３７２　

2010 Pilot

To use HFL, you need to pair yourBluetooth-compatible cell phone tothe system.

This command group is available forpaired cell phones.

You cannot pair your phone whilethe vehicle is moving.

Your phone must be in discoveryor search mode to pair. Refer toyour phone’s manual.

Up to six phones can be paired.

Your phone’s battery may drainfaster when it is paired to HFL.

If after three minutes your phoneis not ready to pair or a phone isnot found, the system will time outand return to idle.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton. If you are pairing a phonefor the first time, HFL will giveyou information about the pairingprocess. If it is not the first phoneyou are pairing, say ‘‘

’’ and say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts and putyour phone in discovery or searchmode. HFL will give you a 4-digitpairing code and begin searchingfor your phone.

When your phone finds aBluetooth device, select HFL fromthe options and enter the 4-digitcode from the previous step.

Follow the HFL prompts andname the newly paired phone.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Phone Setup

Phonesetup Pair

Phone pairing tips

To pair a cell phone:


368

０９／０３／２３　１４：１６：１２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３７３　

2010 Pilot

Say ‘‘ .’’

Say ‘‘ ’’ after the prompts.

If there is more than one phonepaired to the system, HFL will askyou which phone’s name you wantto change. Follow the HFLprompts and rename the phone.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton before a command.


Say ‘‘ .’’


HFL will ask you which phone youwant to delete. Follow the HFLprompts to continue with thedeletion.


HFL will read out all the pairedphone’s names.


Say ‘‘ .’’1.

2.

3. 3.

1.

2.1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Phone setup

Edit

Phone setup

DeleteList

Phone setup

To hear the names of all pairedphones:

To rename a paired phone: To delete a paired phone:


eatures

369

０９／０３／２３　１４：１６：２７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３７４　

2010 Pilot


Say ‘‘ .’’


HFL will tell you which phone islinked to the system.


Say ‘‘ .’’Say ‘‘ .’’


Say ‘‘ ’’ after theprompts.

HFL disconnects the linked phoneand searches for another pairedphone.

Once another phone is found, it islinked to the system. HFL willinform you which phone is nowlinked.

If no other phones are found orpaired, HFL will inform you that theoriginal phone is linked again.


If you want HFL to create arandom code each time you pair aphone, say ‘‘ .’’ If you wantto choose your own 4-digit code tobe used each time, say ‘‘ ’’and follow the HFL prompts.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

4.


To hear which paired phone iscurrently linked:

To change from the currently linkedphone to another paired phone:

To change the pairing code setting:

Phone setup

Status

Phone setupPhone setup

Next phoneSet pairing code

Random

Fixed

370

０９／０３／２３　１４：１６：４４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３７５　

2010 Pilot

CONTINUED

You can make calls using any phonenumber or a name in the HFLphonebook. You can also redial thelast number called.


Say ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe phone number you want to dial.

Follow the HFL prompts toconfirm the number and say‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’

Once connected, you will hear theperson you called through the audiospeakers.


Follow the HFL prompts toconfirm the name and make thecall.

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe name stored in the HFLphonebook that you want to call.

Say ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, whichmeans, the maximum range betweenyour phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10meters).

During a call, HFL allows you to talkup to 30 minutes after you removethe key from the ignition switch.However, this may weaken thevehicle’s battery.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.


Making a Call

Call Dial

Call Dial

Call Dial

To make a call using a phonenumber:

To make a call using a name in theHFL phonebook:

Features

371

０９／０３／２３　１４：１６：５８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３７６　

2010 Pilot

Select ‘‘.’’

Press the INFO button, then select‘‘ .’’

Select a phonebook you want tochoose a phone number from.

If the phonebook you select is PIN-protected, you will need to enter thePIN to access it. See page formore information.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton and say ‘‘ .’’

1.

2.

3.

379


Search ImportedPhonebook

Cellular Phonebook

Redial

To redial the last number called byHFL:

To make a call from an importedphonebook:

372

０９／０３／２３　１４：１７：１０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３７７　

2010 Pilot

Select the name. All the phonenumbers stored for that name willbe listed.

When you receive a call, an incomingcall notification (if activated) willplay and interrupt the audio systemif it is on.

Press the HFL Talk button to answerthe call, or the HFL Back button tohang up.

If your phone has Call Waiting, pressand release the HFL Talk button toput the original call on hold andanswer the incoming call.

To return to the original call, pressthe HFL Talk button again. If youdon’t want to answer the incomingcall, disregard it and continue withyour original call. If you want to hangup the original call and answer thenew call, press the HFL Back button.

To search for a specific name in thephonebook, enter the keyword foreither the first or last name.

To display all names in thephonebook, select the ‘‘ ’’ option.

If you choose ‘‘,’’ the phone

number will be stored in HFL, sothat you can call it using HFL’s nametag by voice.

Select the phone number, andHFL begins dialing.

4.

5.


Receiving a Call

ListStore in

HandsFreeLink

Call Waiting

Features

373

０９／０３／２３　１４：１７：２３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３７８　

2010 Pilot

＃

You can transfer a call from HFL toyour phone, or from your phone toHFL.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton and say ‘‘ .’’

You can mute your voice to theperson you are talking to during acall.

HFL allows you to send numbers ornames during a call. This is usefulwhen you call a menu-driven phonesystem.To mute your voice during a call,

press and release the HFL Talkbutton and say ‘‘ .’’

To unmute your voice, press andrelease the HFL Talk button and say‘‘ ’’ again.


To send a pound ( ), say‘‘pound.’’ To send a star (*), say ‘‘star.’’

Follow the HFL prompts to sendthe tones and continue the call.

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe name or number you want tosend.

Say ‘‘ .’’1.

2.

3.


Transferring a Call

Transfer

Muting a Call Send Numbers or Names Duringa Call

Mute

MuteSend

To send a name or number during acall:

374

NOTE:

０９／０３／２３　１４：１７：３６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３７９　

2010 Pilot

You can store up to 50 names withtheir associated numbers on HFL.The numbers you store can be notonly phone numbers but other types,such as account numbers orpasswords, which can be sent duringa menu-driven call.


Say ‘‘ .’’


Say a name you want to list as yourphonebook entry.

Say the number you want to storefor the name entry.

Follow the HFL prompts and say‘‘ ’’ to store the entry.

Avoid using duplicate nameentries.

Avoid using ‘‘home’’ as a nameentry.

It is easier for HFL to recognize amultisyllabic or longer name. Forexample, use ‘‘Peter’’ instead of‘‘Pete,’’ or ‘‘John Smith’’ instead of‘‘John.’’


Say ‘‘ .’’


Follow the HFL prompts and saythe name entry you want to edit.

When asked, say the new numberfor that name.

Follow the HFL prompts tocomplete the edit.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED


To store a phonebook entry:

To edit the number stored in a name:

Phonebook

Store

Enter

NOTE:

Phonebook

Edit

Phonebook

Features

375

０９／０３／２３　１４：１７：５５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３８０　

2010 Pilot



Say ‘‘ .’’


Say the name you want to deleteand follow the HFL prompts tocomplete the deletion.

Say ‘‘ .’’


HFL begins reading the names inthe order they were stored.

If you hear a name you want to call,immediately press the HFL Talkbutton and say ‘‘ .’’


Follow the HFL prompts, select anumber from your cell phone, andsend it to HFL.


Say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts andname the number, or say‘‘ ’’ if it is not the numberyou want to store.

Follow the HFL prompts if youwant to store another number.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

5.


Phonebook

Delete

Phonebook

List

Call

Receive contact

Phonebook

Discard

To delete a name: To list all names in the phonebook: To store a specific phone numberfrom your cell phone directly to theHFL phonebook (available on somephones):

376

０９／０３／２３　１４：１８：１０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３８１　

2010 Pilot

(available on some phones)

handsfreelink.honda.com

www.honda.ca,

If you selectfrom the Information screen menu,you will see four HFL options.

In the U.S., visitor call (888) 528-7876.

In Canada, visit or call(888) 9-HONDA-9.

The entire phonebook data of thecell phone that is linked to HFL canbe imported to the navigation system.

Select ‘‘,’’ and HFL will begin

importing the phonebook. Select‘‘ ’’ after the import is completed.

Once a phonebook has beenimported, you can search the phonenumbers by the person’s name.

Select ‘‘,’’ and a list of imported

phonebooks will be displayed.

Select a phonebook from the list.

For a list of cell phones that arecompatible with this feature:

CONTINUED


Cellular Phonebook

Cellular Phonebook

Import CellularPhonebook

OK

Search CellularPhonebook

Import Cellular Phonebook: Search Imported Phonebook:

Features

377

IMPORTED PHONEBOOK

IMPORTED DATE

PIN ICON

０９／０３／２３　１４：１８：２７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３８２　

2010 Pilot

Select a person from the list. Up tothree category icons are displayed inthe left side of the list:

Select the person’s number you wantto call, and press the HFL Talkbutton.

These category icons indicate howmany numbers are stored for thename. If a name has more than threecategory icons, ‘‘…’’ is displayed.

If the phonebook is PIN-protected,you will need to enter the 4-digit PIN.

To search for a specific name in thephonebook, enter the keyword foreither the first or last name.

To display all names in thephonebook, select the ‘‘ ’’ option.


List

378

Preference

Home

Mobile

Work

Pager

Fax

Car

Voice

Other

０９／０３／２３　１４：１８：４４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３８３　

2010 Pilot

Select ‘‘,’’ and a list of imported

phonebooks will be displayed.

After making a selection, thefollowing screen will appear.

Select ‘‘ ,’’ then ‘‘ ’’ to completethe deletion.

You can add, change, or remove aPIN number from any phonebook.

You can delete any importedphonebook.

Select a phonebook you want todelete. If the phonebook is PIN-protected, you will need to enter the4-digit PIN number.

If you have selected a phonebookwithout a PIN, you will see the abovedisplay.

Enter the new 4-digit PIN. You willhave to re-enter the PIN forconfirmation.

CONTINUED


Delete ImportedPhonebook

Yes OK

PIN NumberDelete Imported Phonebook:

To add a PIN:

Features

379

０９／０３／２３　１４：１８：５７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３８４　

2010 Pilot

Select ‘‘ ,’’ then select‘‘ ’’ after you enterthe current PIN.

Enter the new 4-digit PIN number.You will be asked to re-enter the PINfor verification.

The display will change as shownabove.

Select the phonebook you want. Thedisplay will change as shown above.

Enter the current PIN for thisphonebook.


To remove a PIN:To change the PIN to a new number:PIN number

Do not use PIN

380

０９／０３／２３　１４：１９：０７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３８５　

2010 Pilot

This command group allows you tochange or customize HFL basicsettings.


Say ‘‘ .’’Say ‘‘ ’’after the prompts.Follow the HFL prompts and saythe 4-digit passcode you want toset.Follow the HFL prompts toconfirm the number.

Once a passcode is set, youwill need to enter it to use HFL eachtime you start the vehicle. If youforget the code, your dealer will haveto reset it for you, or you will have toclear the entire system (see page

).1.2.3.

4.

383

CONTINUED

System Setup

System setupSecurity


To set a 4-digit passcode to lock theHFL system for security purposes:

Features

381

NOTE:

０９／０３／２３　１４：１９：１６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３８６　

2010 Pilot

＊

＊

If you get into the vehicle while youare on the phone, the call can beautomatically transferred to HFLwith the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position.


Say ‘‘ .’’Say ‘‘ ’’ after theprompts.HFL will let you know if autotransfer is on or off, depending onthe previous setting. Follow theHFL prompts to change thesetting.


Say ‘‘ .’’Say ‘‘ ’’ after theprompts.Follow the HFL prompts and saythe new 4-digit passcode.Follow the HFL prompts toconfirm the number.


Say ‘‘ .’’Say ‘‘ ’’ after theprompts.Follow the HFL prompts and say‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’ Youcan also say ‘‘ ’’ for no audibleincoming call notification.

The default setting is a ring tone.

2.

3.

4.

1.2.

3.1.2.

3.

1.

:

System setupAuto transfer

System setupChange passcode

System setupCall notif ication

Ring tone PromptOff


To change your security pass code: To select either a ring tone or aprompt as the incoming callnotif ication :

To activate or deactivate the autotransfer function:

382

０９／０３／２３　１４：１９：３２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３８７　

2010 Pilot

This operation clears the passcodes,paired phones, all names in the HFLphonebook, and all importedphonebook data.


Say ‘‘ .’’


Follow the HFL prompts tocontinue to complete the clearingprocedure.


Say the language you want tochange to in that language.

Follow the HFL prompts.

You can also clear the system whenyou have forgotten the passcode andcannot access HFL. When HFL asksyou for the passcode, say ‘‘

.’’ Paired phones, all names inthe HFL phonebook and all importedphonebook data will be lost.

1.

2.

3.

2.

1.

Canadian models only

System setup

Clear

Quick Language Selection

Systemclear


To clear the system:

To quickly change the language:

Features

383

０９／０３／２３　１４：１９：４４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３８８　

2010 Pilot


Say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts tochange the language to English orFrench.

The name and logos areregistered trademarks owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use ofsuch marks by Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. is under license. Othertrademarks and trade names arethose of their respective owners.

If you have not named your pairedphone in the language you justselected, HFL will ask you to name itin the current language.

When French is your currentlyselected language, you can give voicecommands in French.1.

2.

BluetoothCanadian models only


Change Language

Change language

Wireless Technology

To change the system languagebetween English and French:

Bluetooth

384

０９／０３／２３　１４：１９：５３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３８９　

2010 Pilot





eatures

385

０９／０３／２３　１４：１９：５８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３９０　

2010 Pilot

All obstacles may not always besensed. Even when the system is on,you should look for obstacles nearyour vehicle to make sure it is safe topark.

Your vehicle has a parking sensorsystem. The system lets you knowthe approximate distance betweenyour vehicle and most obstacleswhile you are parking. When thesystem is on and your vehicle isnearing an obstacle, you will hear abeeper and see system messages onthe multi-information display.

To activate the system, push theswitch on the dashboard with theignition in the ON (II) position. Theindicator in the switch comes onwhen the system is on. To turn thesystem off, push the switch again.

The system has two front cornersensors, two rear corner sensors,and two rear center sensors.The rear center sensors work whenthe shift lever is in reverse (R).

The corner sensors do not workwhen the shift lever is in drive (D),and the vehicle speed is more than 5mph (8 km/h).

On Touring models

Parking Sensor System

386

PARKING SENSOR SYSTEM SWITCH

０９／０３／１３　１６：１７：２８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３９１　

2010 Pilot

Example shown: Obstacle is at the left front of the vehicle

When you turn the system on, allindicators will appear on the multi-information display, and a beepersounds once.

When the system senses an obstacle,the appropriate indicator comes on,and a beeper sounds as shown in thefollowing tables.

Distance

Beeper

Upper leftindicator stays on

Short beeps ContinuousbeepVery short beeps



Indicator

About 18-24 in(45-60 cm)

About 14-18 in(35-45 cm)

About 14 in(35 cm) or less

CONTINUED

Corner Sensor OperationMulti-Information DisplayMessages and Beeper Operation

Parking Sensor SystemF

eatures

387

０９／０３／１３　１６：１７：３９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３９２　

2010 Pilot

Distance

Beeper

Bottomindicator stays on



Indicator


ContinuousbeepsShort beeps Very short beepsLong beeps

About 24-40 in(60-100 cm)

About 18-24 in(45-60 cm)

About 14-18 in(35-45 cm)

About 14 in(35 cm) or less

Rear Center Sensor Operation

Parking Sensor System

388

０９／０３／１３　１６：１７：４８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３９３　

2010 Pilot

The system may not functionproperly under these conditions:

The sensors are covered withsnow, ice, mud, etc.

When the vehicle is on a roughroad, on grass, or on a hill.

After the vehicle has been sittingout in hot or cold weather.

The range of the corner sensors andthe rear center sensors are limited.Each corner sensor is capable ofsensing an obstacle only when yourvehicle is 24 in (60 cm) or closer.The rear center sensor senses anobstacle that is behind your vehicle40 in (100 cm) or closer.

Do not put any accessories on oraround the sensors.

If the system develops a problem,you will see a ‘‘CHECK PARKINGSENSOR SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display, and abeeper sounds continuously. Veryoften, a sensor covered with mud, ice,snow, etc. is the cause of thismessage. Check the sensors first. Ifthe message stays on or the beeperdoes not stop, have the systemchecked by your dealer.

CONTINUED

Parking Sensor SystemF

eatures

389

Within about 24 in (60 cm) Within about 40 in (100 cm)

０９／０３／１３　１６：１７：５８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３９４　

2010 Pilot

For the best picture, always keep therearview camera clean, and do notcover the camera lens. To avoidscratching the lens when you clean it,use a moist, soft cloth.

Since the rearview camera displayarea is limited, you should alwaysback up slowly and carefully, andlook behind you for obstacles.

When the system is affected bysome electrical equipment ordevices generating an ultrasonicwave.

When operating the vehicle in badweather.

The system may not sense thin orlow objects, or sonic-absorptivematerials such as snow, cotton, orsponge.The system cannot sense objectsdirectly under the bumper.

Whenever you shift to reverse (R)with the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, the rear view is shownon the navigation system screen. Onvehicle without navigation system,the rear view is shown on the leftside of the inside mirror.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Canadian Owners:

This ISM device complies with CanadianICES-001.


Parking Sensor System, Rearview Camera and Monitor

Rearview Camera and Monitor

390

０９／０３／１３　１６：１８：０７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３９５　

2010 Pilot

Monitor brightness is adjustedautomatically by sensors. If you usethe monitor continuously at hightemperature, the monitor willgradually dim.

The inside mirror will be hot whenyou use the monitor for an extendedperiod of time.

If a bright light (such as sunlight) isshining on the inside mirror, theimage may be difficult to see.

You can turn the monitor on and offby pressing the monitor off buttonwhen the shift lever is in reverse.The monitor turns on everytime youshift to reverse, even if you turned itoff the last time.

When in reverse, the navigationbuttons are locked out, except theinterface dial on the dashboard. Turnthe knob clockwise to make thecamera image brighter, and counter-clockwise to darken the image.

On Touring models On EX-L models

Rearview Camera and MonitorF

eatures

391

SENSOR

MONITOR OFF BUTTON

REARVIEW MONITOR

０９／０３／１３　１６：１８：１３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３９６　

2010 Pilot

392

０９／０３／１３　１６：１８：１６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３９７　

2010 Pilot

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 394.................Fuel Recommendation . 394

.........Service Station Procedures . 395....................................Refueling . 395

.....Tighten Fuel Cap Message . 396Opening and Closing the

.......................................Hood . 397...................................Oil Check . 398

.............Engine Coolant Check . 398...............................Fuel Economy . 399

...Accessories and Modifications . 402.............................Carrying Cargo . 404

Before DrivingB

eforeD

riving

393

０９／０３／１３　１６：１８：１９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３９８　

2010 Pilot

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

Do not tow a trailer.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 87 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy metallic rappingnoise that can lead to engine damage.

We recommend quality gasolinescontaining detergent additives thathelp prevent fuel system and enginedeposits.In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contactyour dealer for service.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10% ethanol byvolume and up to 15% MTBE byvolume. Do not use gasolinecontaining methanol.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

Premium fuel is recommended whentowing in certain conditions (seepage ).

For further important fuel-relatedinformation for your vehicle, orinformation on gasoline that does notcontain MMT, visit Owner Link at

. In Canada, visitfor additional

information on gasoline.

446

owners.honda.comwww.honda.ca

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

394

０９／０５／２５　０９：５５：３０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０３９９　

2010 Pilot

CONTINUED

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank equalizes.Place the cap in the holder on thefuel fill door.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Thisleaves some room in the fuel tankfor the fuel to expand withtemperature changes.

eventhough the tank is not full, there maybe a problem with your vehicle’s fuelvapor recovery system. The systemhelps keep fuel vapor from goinginto the atmosphere. Try filling atanother pump. If this does not fix theproblem, consult your dealer.

Park with the driver’s side closestto the service station pump.

Open the fuel fill door by pullingon the handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.

1.

2.

3.

4.

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking offRefueling

Service Station ProceduresB

eforeD

riving

395

HOLDER

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE HANDLE FUEL FILL CAP

TETHER

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

０９／０３／１３　１６：１８：４０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４００　

2010 Pilot

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once.

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

If you do not properly tighten thecap, you will see a ‘‘CHECK FUELCAP’’ message on the informationdisplay (see page ).

If you do not properly tighten thecap, you will see a ‘‘TIGHTENFUEL CAP’’ message on the multi-information display (see page

).

If the system still detects a leak inthe vehicle’s evaporative emissionssystem, the malfunction indicatorlamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fillcap was not already tightened, turnthe engine off, and check orretighten the fuel fill cap until itclicks at least once. The MIL shouldgo off after several days of normaldriving once the cap is tightened orreplaced. If the MIL does not go off,have your vehicle inspected by adealer. For more information, seepage .

Your vehicle’s on board diagnosticsystem will detect a loose or missingfuel fill cap as an evaporative systemleak. The first time a leak is detecteda ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ messageappears on the multi-informationdisplay. Turn the engine off, andconfirm the fuel fill cap is installed. Ifit is, loosen it, then retighten it untilit clicks at least once. The messageshould go off after several days of

normal driving once you tighten orreplace the fuel fill cap. To scroll toanother message, press the INFObutton. The ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’message will appear each time yourestart the engine until the systemturns the message off.

5.

6.

86

396

522


On Touring models

On Touring modelsTighten Fuel Cap Message

Service Station Procedures

396

０９／０３／１３　１６：１８：４８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４０１　

2010 Pilot

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood near the center.Slide your hand to your left untilyou feel the hood latch handle.Push this handle up until itreleases the hood. Lift up the hood.

If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,or if you can open the hood withoutlifting the handle, the mechanismshould be cleaned and lubricated.

Holding the grip, pull the supportrod out of its clip. Insert the endinto the designated hole in thehood.

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop. Make sure itis securely latched.

1. 2. 3.


Opening and Closing the Hood

Before

Driving

397

LATCH CLIP

SUPPORT RODGRIP

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

０９／０３／１３　１６：１８：５６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４０２　

2010 Pilot

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orange loop).

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto its hole.

1.

3.

2.

4.

472

467

475

Oil Check

Adding Engine Oil

Engine Coolant Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks


398

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

MIN MAX

DIPSTICK RESERVE TANK

０９／０３／１３　１６：１９：０６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４０３　

2010 Pilot

－－

－－

Fuel economy is not a fixed number.It varies based on driving conditions,driving habits and vehicle condition.Therefore, it is not possible for oneset of estimates to predict fueleconomy precisely for all drivers inall environments.

Represents urbandriving in light traffic. A range ofmiles per gallon achieved is alsoprovided.

The EPA fuel economy estimatesshown in the example to the rightare a useful tool for comparisonwhen buying a vehicle. EPAestimates include:

Represents a combination of city andhighway driving. The scalerepresents the range of combinedfuel economy for other vehicles inthe class.

Represents amixture of rural and interstatedriving, in a warmed-up vehicle,typical of longer trips in free-flowingtraffic. A range of miles per gallon

achieved is also provided.

Provides an estimated annual fuelcost, based on 15,000 miles in theU.S. or 20,000 km in Canada per year

multiplied by the cost per gallon(based on EPA fuel cost data)divided by the combined fueleconomy.

For more information on fueleconomy ratings and factors thataffect fuel economy, visit

(Canada: Visit)

www.fueleconomy.gov www.vehicles.gc.ca

Actual Mileage and EPA FuelEconomy Estimates Comparison.

City MPGCombined Fuel Economy

Highway MPGEstimated Annual Fuel Cost

Fuel EconomyB

eforeD

riving

399

Combined FuelEconomy

(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)

Estimated AnnualFuel Cost

City MPG Highway MPG

０９／０３／２３　１４：２０：１０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４０４　

2010 Pilot

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Aggressive driving (hardacceleration and braking)Excessive idling, accelerating andbraking in stop-and-go trafficCold engine operation (enginesare more efficient when warmedup)Driving with a heavy load or theair conditioner runningImproperly inflated tires

The following factors can lower yourvehicle’s fuel economy:

A properly maintained vehiclemaximizes fuel economy. Poormaintenance can significantly reducefuel economy. Always maintain yourvehicle according to the maintenancemessages displayed on theinformation display (see

on page ).For example:

An underinflated tire increases‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reducesfuel economy.

It puts a heavierload on the engine, increasing fuelconsumption.

Inparticular, a build-up of snow ormud on your vehicle’s undersideadds weight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fueleconomy.

Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking increase fuelconsumption.

Aerodynamic drag has a big effecton fuel economy at speeds above45 mph (75 km/h). Reduce yourspeed and you reduce the drag.Trailers, car top carriers, roofracks and bike racks are also bigcontributors to increased drag.

If your vehicle has amanual transmission, you canboost your fuel economy by upshifting as early as possible.

Idlingresults in 0 miles per gallon (0 kmsper liter).

467

Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscositymotor oil, displaying the APICertif ication Seal (see page

).

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Maintain proper tire inflation

Avoid carrying excess weight inyour vehicle

Keep your vehicle clean

Drive moderately

Observe the speed limit

Always drive in the highest gearpossible

Avoid excessive idling

472

Vehicle Maintenance

Drive Efficiently

Fuel Economy

400

０９／０３／１３　１６：１９：２９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４０５　

2010 Pilot

－

－

Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.Reset trip counter to zero.Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.Follow one of the simple calculations above.

The A/Cputs an extra load on the enginewhich makes it use more fuel. Usethe fresh-air ventilation whenpossible.

Combine several short trips intoone. A warmed-up engine is morefuel efficient than a cold one.

Direct calculation is therecommended source of informationabout your actual fuel economy.Using frequency of fill-ups or takingfuel gauge readings are NOTaccurate measures of fuel economy.Fuel economy may improve over thefirst several thousand miles.

1)2)3)4)

Checking Your Fuel Economy

Measuring Techniques

Minimize the use of the airconditioning system

Plan and combine trips

Calculating Fuel Economy

Fuel EconomyB

eforeD

riving

401

Miles drivenGallons of

fuelMiles per

Gallon

100 Kilometers L per 100 kmLiter

０９／０３／１３　１６：１９：３８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４０６　

2010 Pilot

Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withproper operation of your vehicle.

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows. Accessories installed inthese areas may interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags, anti-lock brakes, andtire pressure monitoring system.

If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake it unsafe. Before you make anymodifications or add any accessories,be sure to read the followinginformation.

Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Although non-Honda accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability.

524

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

402

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

０９／０３／１３　１６：１９：４７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４０７　

2010 Pilot

Some examples are:

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Lowering your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Non-Honda wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents and will not becompatible with the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS).

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components withnon-Honda components couldseriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Modifying Your Vehicle

Accessories and ModificationsB

eforeD

riving

403

０９／０３／１３　１６：１９：５５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４０８　

2010 Pilot

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Glove box

Rear cargo area, including thesecond and third row seats whenfolded flatConsole compartmentStorage compartment

Door and seat-back pockets

Roof-rack (if equipped)

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Carrying Cargo

404

GLOVE BOX

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

SEAT-BACK POCKETS

CARGO AREA/UNDERFLOOR STORAGE WELL

DOOR POCKETS

STORAGE COMPARTMENTS

０９／０３／１３　１６：２０：０４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４０９　

2010 Pilot

－

－ ×Label Example

See Tire And Loading Informationlabel attached to the driver’sdoorjamb.

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, andaccessories, and the tongue load ifyou are towing a trailer.

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit

Locate the statement ‘‘Thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’splacard.

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amountequals 1,400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb. passengers in yourvehicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs.(1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

The maximum load for your vehicleis 1,322 lbs (600 kg).

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

CONTINUED

Load Limits

Carrying CargoB

eforeD

riving

405

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

０９／０３／１３　１６：２０：１５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４１０　

2010 Pilot

In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all occupants, accessories,cargo, and trailer tongue load mustnot exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). Bothare on a label on the driver’sdoorjamb.

Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

Carrying Cargo

406

Passenger Weight(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)



Max Load (1,322 lbs)



Cargo Weight(1,022 lbs)

Cargo Weight(722 lbs)

Cargo Weight(572 lbs)

０９／０３／１３　１６：２０：２６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４１１　

2010 Pilot

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunderneath and interfere with theproper operation of the seats, thesensors under the seats, or thedriver’s ability to operate thepedals.

If you carry any items on a roofrack, be sure the total weight ofthe rack and the items does notexceed 165 lbs (75 kg).

If you use an accessory roof rack,the roof rack weight limit may belower. Refer to the informationthat came with your roof rack.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the cargo area, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible. Tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

If you fold down the second orthird row seats, tie down itemsthat could be thrown about thevehicle during a crash or suddenstop.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

Keep all cargo below the bottomof the windows. If it is higher, itcould interfere with the properoperation of the side curtainairbags.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing thetailgate or the glass hatch, exhaustgas can enter the passenger area.To avoid the possibility of

, follow theinstructions on page .61

Carrying Cargo in the PassengerCompartment

Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Areaor on a Roof Rack

carbonmonoxide poisoning

Carrying CargoB

eforeD

riving

407

０９／０３／１３　１６：２０：３４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４１２　

2010 Pilot

The four hooks on the side panelscan be used to install a net forsecuring items. Each hook isdesigned to hold up to 50 lbs (23 kg)of weight.

The separation net can be used tohold back soft, lightweight itemsstored in the cargo area. Heavyitems should be tied down, as the netmay not prevent them from beingthrown about the vehicle in a crashor a sudden stop.

The cargo cover can be used tocover the cargo area behind the thirdrow seats. When the third row seatsare folded down, the cargo cover canbe extended over the larger area. Donot install the cover over the largerarea if the third row seats are notfolded down.

Your vehicle also has groceryhook(s) on the side panels and onthe back of the third row seats in thecargo area.They are designed to hold lightitems. Heavy objects may damagethe hook.

Cargo HooksOptional Separation Net

Optional Cargo Cover

Carrying Cargo

408

CARGOHOOKS

GROCERY HOOK

０９／０３／１３　１６：２０：４２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４１３　

2010 Pilot

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate theautomatic transmission. It alsoincludes important information onparking your vehicle, the brakingsystem, the VTM-4 system, thevehicle stability assist (VSA )system, the tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS), and facts you needif you are planning to tow a trailer ordrive off-highway.

........................Driving Guidelines . 410

........................Preparing to Drive . 410.......................Starting the Engine . 411

Check Starter System.................................Message . 412

..............Automatic Transmission . 413..............................VTM-4 System . 418

...........................................Parking . 419Tire Pressure Monitoring System

......................................(TPMS) . 420.............................Braking System . 428

...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 429Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ),

aka Electronic Stability........Control (ESC), System . 431

...........................Towing a Trailer . 434Off-Highway Driving

..................................Guidelines . 449

DrivingD

riving

409

０９／０３／１３　１６：２０：４６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４１４　

2010 Pilot

Because your vehicle rides higheroff the ground, it has a high centerof gravity that can cause it to rollover if you make abrupt turns. Utilityvehicles have a significantly higherroll over rate than other types ofvehicles.

To prevent rollovers or loss ofcontrol:

Take corners at slower speedsthan you would with a passengervehicle.

Avoid sharp turns and abruptmaneuvers whenever possible.

Do not modify your vehicle in anyway that would raise the center ofgravity.

Do not carry heavy cargo on theroof.

Your vehicle has higher groundclearance that allows you to travelover bumps, obstacles, and roughterrain. It also provides goodvisibility so you can anticipateproblems earlier.

You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood is fully closed.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Your vehicle is equipped with a four-wheel drive (4WD) system. Whenthe system senses a loss of front-wheel traction, it automaticallytransfers some power to the rearwheels. This gives you bettertraction and mobility.

You still need to exercise the samecare when accelerating, steering, andbraking that you would in a two-wheel drive vehicle.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.154See page for off-highway driving

guidelines.

4WD models only

449

Driving Guidelines, Preparing to Drive

Driving Guidelines Preparing to Drive

410

０９／０３／１３　１６：２０：５９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４１５　

2010 Pilot

CONTINUED

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, thenrelease the ignition switch. You donot need to hold the ignitionswitch in the START (III) positionto start the engine. Depending onthe outside temperature, the

starter motor runs for about 6 to 9seconds until the engine starts.

If you hold the ignition switch inthe START (III) position for morethan 7 seconds, the starter motor,depending on the outsidetemperature, runs for about 10 to25 seconds until the engine starts.

If the engine does not start, wait atleast 10 seconds before tryingagain.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Apply the parking brake.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

Your vehicle’s starter system has anauto control mode. When you turnthe ignition switch to the START(III) position, this feature keeps theengine’s starter motor running untilthe engine starts. Follow theseinstructions to start the engine:

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel, and themessages on the informationdisplay or multi-informationdisplay (depending on models)(see pages , , , and

).

Make sure the doors, the tailgate,and the glass hatch are securelyclosed and locked. 1.

2.

3.

4.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

170

133

17

67 82 8395

Preparing to Drive, Starting the Engine

Starting the Engine

Driving

411

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperlycoded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. Formore inf ormation, see page .135

０９／０３／１３　１６：２１：１１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４１６　

2010 Pilot

If this message is on, the ignitionswitch has to be held in theSTART (III) position manuallyuntil the engine starts. Theignition switch can be held in thatposition up to 15 seconds.

Even though you may be able tostart the engine manually withoutthe auto control mode of the startersystem, have your dealer inspectyour vehicle.

If there is a problem with the startersystem, you will see a ‘‘CHECKSTARTER SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display whenthe ignition switch is turned to theON (II) position. You will also seethis message when the auto controlmode of the starter system has aproblem.

On Touring models

Starting the Engine

Check Starter System Message

412

U.S.

Canada

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

０９／０３／１３　１６：２１：１９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４１７　

2010 Pilot

CONTINUED

These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates apossible problem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem with theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of apossible problem with thetransmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECKTRANSMISSION’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

). To shift from any position, pressfirmly on the brake pedal and therelease button on the side of theshift lever. You cannot shift out ofPark when the ignition switch is inthe LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)position.

96

On Touring models

Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting

Automatic TransmissionD

riving

413

０９／０３／１３　１６：２１：２７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４１８　

2010 Pilot

－

－

－

Use neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from neutral toanother gear.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. The shift lever must be inPark before you can remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

Press the brakepedal and the release button on thefront of the shift lever to shift fromPark to reverse. To shift fromreverse to neutral, come to acomplete stop, and then shift. Pressthe release button before shiftinginto reverse from neutral.

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and the release button on theshift lever. Make sure your foot is offthe accelerator pedal.

416

Do this:Press the brake pedal and theshift lever release button.

Press the shift lever releasebutton.

Move the shift lever.

Press the D button.

To shift from:P to R

R to PN to RD to 22 to 11 to 22 to DD to NN to DR to ND to DD to D

33

3

Automatic Transmission

Neutral (N)

Shift Lock Release

Reverse (R)

Park (P)

414

０９／０３／１３　１６：２１：３３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４１９　

2010 Pilot

－－－

CONTINUED

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear (1 through 5) for yourspeed and acceleration. You maynotice the transmission shifting up athigher engine speeds when theengine is cold. This helps the enginewarm up faster.

To use D , press theD button when the shift lever is inthe ‘‘D’’ position. This position is simi-lar to D, except only the first threegears are selected instead of all five.Use D when towing a trailer in hillyterrain, or to provide engine brakingwhen going down a steep hill. D canalso keep the transmission fromcycling between third and fourthgears in stop-and-go driving.

This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop.

Use second gear:For more power when climbing.To increase engine braking whengoing down steep hills.For starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow.When driving downhill with atrailer.

33

3

3


Drive (D) Drive (D ) Second (2)3

Driving

415

０９／０３／１３　１６：２１：４１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４２０　

2010 Pilot

－If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pressing the releasebutton does not work.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

Set the parking brake.

To shift from second tofirst, press the release button on theside of the shift lever. This positionlocks the transmission in first gear.By upshifting and downshiftingthrough 1, 2, D , and D, you canoperate the transmission much like amanual transmission without aclutch pedal.

1.

2.

3

Engine Speed Limiter Shift Lock ReleaseFirst (1)


416

０９／０３／１３　１６：２１：４８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４２１　

2010 Pilot

Insert the built-in key into the shiftlock release slot.

Put a cloth on the edge of the shiftlock release slot cover to preventscratches. Use a small flat-tipscrewdriver or metal fingernail fileto carefully pry up the edge of thecover and remove it from the slot.

Push down on the key while youpress the release button on theshift lever and move the shift leverout of Park to neutral.

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by a dealer.

Remove the key from the shiftlock release slot, then install thecover. Make sure the notch on thecover is on the underside.Insert the key back into theignition switch, press the brakepedal, and restart the engine.

3. 4.

5.

6.

Automatic TransmissionD

riving

417

COVER

RELEASE BUTTON

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

０９／０３／１３　１６：２１：５６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４２２　

2010 Pilot

The vehicle must be stopped withthe engine running.

doany of the following:

Press the VTM-4 LOCK button.

Move the shift lever to D or D .Move the shift lever to first (1),second (2), or reverse (R) gear.


Press the VTM-4 LOCK button.The indicator in the button comeson.

The VTM-4 Lock will temporarilydisengage when the vehicle speedexceeds 18 mph (30 km/h). Theindicator in the button will remain on.

To get unstuck, apply light pressureto the accelerator pedal. Do not spinthe front tires for more than a fewseconds. Because of the amount oftorque applied to the rear tires, theyshould not spin. This is normal. Ifyou are not able to move the vehicle,stop and reverse direction.

If more traction is needed when yourvehicle is stuck, or is likely tobecome stuck, you can use theVTM-4 LOCK button to increasetorque to the rear wheels.

The variable torque management4WD (VTM-4) system automaticallytransfers varying amounts of enginetorque to the rear wheels underlower traction conditions.

1.

2.

3.3

4WD models only To Engage the VTM-4 Lock To Disengage the VTM-4 Lock,

VTM-4 System

418

Do not continuously spin the f ront tiresof your vehicle. Continuously spinningthe f ront tires can cause transmissionor rear dif f erential damage.

Do not use the VTM-4 LOCK button ondry, paved roads. Driving on dry,paved roads with VTM-4 Lock ON maydamage the rear dif f erential whenmaking a turn. Strange noise andvibration can also result.

０９／０３／１３　１６：２２：０８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４２３　

2010 Pilot

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly, oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

Set the parking brake before you putthe transmission in Park. This keepsthe vehicle from moving and puttingpressure on the parking mechanismin the transmission. If the vehicle is facing downhill,

turn the front wheels toward thecurb.

Make sure the moonroof (ifequipped) and the windows areclosed.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.in the cargo area or take themwith you.

Turn off the lights.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

Check the indicator on theinstrument panel to verify that thesecurity system is set.

Lock the doors and the tailgate.Make sure the glass hatch isclosed securely.

Except LX models

Parking Tips

ParkingD

riving

419

０９／０３／１３　１６：２２：１７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４２４　

2010 Pilot

－

When the low tire pressure indicatoris on, one or more of your tires issignificantly underinflated. Youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure as indicated onthe vehicle’s tire information placard.

If you think you can safely drive ashort distance to a service station,proceed slowly, and inflate the tire tothe recommended pressure shownon the driver’s doorjamb.

If the tire is flat, or if the tirepressure is too low to continuedriving, replace the tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

If you cannot make the low tirepressure indicator go out afterinflating the tires to the specifiedvalues, have your dealer check thesystem as soon as possible.

Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Because tire pressure varies bytemperature and other conditions,the low tire pressure indicator maycome on unexpectedly.

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor (not including the spare tire).If the air pressure of a tire becomessignificantly low while driving, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure indicator to come on.

508

Low Tire PressureIndicator

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Except Touring models

420

０９／０３／１３　１６：２２：２５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４２５　

2010 Pilot

－

For example, if you check and fillyour tires in a warm area, then drivein extremely cold weather, the tirepressure will be lower thanmeasured and could be underinflatedand cause the low tire pressureindicator to come on. Or, if youcheck and adjust your tire pressurein cooler conditions, and drive intoextremely hot conditions, the tiremay become overinflated. However,the low tire pressure indicator willnot come on if the tires areoverinflated.

Refer to page for tire inflationguidelines.

Although your tire pressure ismonitored, you must manually checkthe tire pressures monthly.

This indicator comes on and stays onif there is a problem with the tirepressure monitoring system.

If this happens, the system will shutoff and no longer monitor tirepressures. Have the system checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

If the low tire pressure indicator orTPMS indicator comes on, the VSAsystem automatically turns on even ifthe VSA system is turned off bypressing the VSA OFF switch (seepage ). If this happens, youcannot turn the VSA system off bypressing the VSA OFF switch again.

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when cold, andset to the recommended inflationpressure as specified on the tireinformation label and in the owner’smanual (see page ).

When you restart the vehicle withthe compact spare tire, the TPMSindicator may also come on and stayon after driving several miles(kilometers).

The appropriate tire indicator andlow tire pressure indicator comes onif a tire becomes significantlyunderinflated. See

on page .

496

497

432

74


Low TirePressure Indicator

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator


Driving

421

０９／０５／２５　０９：５５：４３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４２６　

2010 Pilot

－




If you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure indicator will come on.Replace the flat tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

Each wheel (except the compactspare tire wheel) is equipped with atire pressure sensor mounted insidethe tire behind the valve stem. Youmust use TPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by your dealer orqualified technician.

After you replace the flat tire withthe compact spare tire, the low tirepressure indicator stays on. This isnormal; the system is not monitoringthe spare tire pressure. Manuallycheck the spare tire pressure to besure it is correct. After several miles(kilometers) driving with thecompact spare tire, the TPMSindicator comes on and the low tirepressure indicator goes off.

The low tire pressure indicator orthe TPMS indicator will go off, afterseveral miles (kilometers) driving,when you replace the spare tire withthe specified regular tire equippedwith the tire pressure monitor sensor.

Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Have the flat tire repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible.

508

Changing a Tire with TPMS


422

０９／０３／１３　１６：２２：４２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４２７　

2010 Pilot

－

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor. If the air pressure of a tirebecomes significantly low, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure/TPMS indicator in theinstrument panel to come on. If thishappens, you will see which tire islosing pressure on the multi-information display along with a‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’message.

If you think you can safely drive ashort distance to a service station,proceed slowly to the station, theninflate the tire to the recommendedpressure.

If the tire is flat, or if the tirepressure is too low to continuedriving, replace the tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Because tire pressure varies bytemperature and other conditions,the low tire pressure/TPMSindicator may come on unexpectedly.

When the low tire pressure/TPMSindicator is on, one or more of yourtires is significantly underinflated.You should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure as indicatedon the vehicle’s tire informationplacard.

It is possible that the pressuresshown on the multi-informationdisplay and the pressures youmanually measure are slightlydifferent.If the difference is significant or youcannot make the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator and message on themulti-information display go out afterinflating the tires to the specifiedvalues, have your dealer check thesystem as soon as possible.

509

CONTINUED

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Touring modelsD

riving

423

０９／０３／１３　１６：２２：５１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４２８　

2010 Pilot

－

Although your tire pressure ismonitored, you must manually checkthe tire pressures monthly.

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when thevehicle is cold, and set to therecommended inflation pressure asspecified on the vehicle placard andin the owner’s manual (see page

).

To select the tire pressure monitor,press the INFO button several timeswith the ignition switch in the ON(II) position.

You will see the above display on themulti-information display when alltire pressures are normal.

For example, if you check and fillyour tires in a warm area, then drivein extremely cold weather, the tirepressure will be lower thanmeasured and could be underinflatedand cause the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on. Or, ifyou check and adjust your tirepressure in cooler conditions, anddrive into extremely hot conditions,the tire may become overinflated.However, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come on ifthe tires are overinflated.

Refer to page for tire inflationguidelines.

If there is a problem with the TPMS,this indicator begins to flash. It stopsflashing after approximately 1minute, then stays on. You will alsosee a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ).96

497

496


Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Touring models

424

０９／０３／１３　１６：２２：５８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４２９　

2010 Pilot

－

CONTINUED

To see the inflation pressures of allfour tires, press the SEL/RESETbutton. The display changes asshown above.

Each tire pressure is shown in PSI(U.S. models) or in kPa (Canadianmodels).

Each tire has its own pressuresensor. If the air pressure of a tirebecomes significantly low, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure/TPMS indicator in theinstrument panel to come on. If thishappens, you will see which tire islosing pressure on the multi-information display along with a‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’message.


riving

425

U.S. models Canadian models

０９／０３／１３　１６：２３：０５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４３０　

2010 Pilot

－

If there is a problem with the TPMS,the tire pressure monitor shows a‘‘SYSTEM FUNCTION ERROR’’message and the tire pressurereadings are not displayed. If thishappens, you will first see a systemwarning message ‘‘CHECK TPMSSYSTEM’’ on the multi-informationdisplay.

If there is a problem with the TPMS,you will see the above message onthe multi-information display.

If you see this message, the systemis off and is not monitoring the tirepressures. Have the system checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

Also, the low tire pressure/TPMSindicator begins to flash, then stayson (see page ).

If any of the tires has low pressure,the tire pressure monitor also showsthe above message to warn youabout the low tire pressure when youselect the display by pressing theINFO button several times.Following this display, press theSEL/RESET button to see each tirepressure. When you continue drivingafter installing the spare tire, you willalso see this message on the multi-information display. 423

TPMS System Failure

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Touring models

426

０９／０３／１３　１６：２３：１２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４３１　

2010 Pilot

－

If the low tire pressure/TPMSindicator comes on, or the multi-information display shows a‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message,the VSA system automatically turnson even when the VSA system isturned off by pressing the VSA OFFswitch (see page ). If thishappens, you cannot turn the VSAsystem off by pressing the VSA OFFswitch again.

When you restart the vehicle withthe compact spare tire, the TPMSsystem message will also bedisplayed on the multi-informationdisplay after several miles(kilometers) driving.

If you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure/TPMS and tire monitorindicators will come on. Replace theindicated flat tire with the compactspare tire (see page ).

After the flat tire is replaced with thespare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator stays on whiledriving. After several miles(kilometers) driving, this indicatorbegins to flash, then stays on again.You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TPMSSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display. This is normal;the system cannot monitor the sparetire pressure. Manually check thespare tire pressure to be sure it iscorrect.

This indicator and the warningmessage on the multi-informationdisplay will go off, after several miles(kilometers) driving, when the sparetire is replaced with the specifiedregular tire equipped with the tirepressure monitor sensor.Each wheel is equipped with a tirepressure sensor mounted inside thetire behind the valve stem. You mustuse TPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always have

your tires serviced by your dealer ora qualified technician.Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Have the flat tire repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible.

432

508CONTINUED

Changing a Tire with TPMS


riving

427

０９／０３／１３　１６：２３：２０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４３２　

2010 Pilot

－

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.

Your vehicle is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The emergencybrake assist system increases thestopping force when you depress thebrake pedal hard in an emergencysituation. The anti-lock brake system(ABS) helps you retain steeringcontrol when braking very hard.

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, reduces their effectiveness andreduces brake pad life. In addition,fuel economy can be reduced. It alsokeeps your brake lights on all thetime, confusing drivers behind you.




Braking System

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Touring models, Braking System

428

０９／０３／１３　１６：２３：２７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４３３　

2010 Pilot

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andmay hear some noise. This is normal:it is the ABS rapidly pumping thebrakes. On dry pavement, you willneed to press on the brake pedalvery hard before the ABS activates.However, you may feel the ABSactivate immediately if you are tryingto stop on snow or ice.

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the wheels fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

The electronic brake distribution(EBD) system, which is part of theABS, also balances the front-to-rearbraking distribution according tovehicle loading.

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

All four brakes have audible brakewear indicators.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

You should never pump the brake pedal.

Braking System, Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)Braking System Design

Brake Wear Indicators

Driving

429

０９／０３／１３　１６：２３：３５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４３４　

2010 Pilot

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

It only helps with steeringcontrol during braking.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the EBD system may alsobe shut down.

If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

If the indicator comes on whiledriving, test the brakes as instructedon page .

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABSSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

If this happens, you will also see‘‘CHECK ABS SYSTEM’’ and‘‘CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM’’messages on the multi-informationdisplay.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

The VSA indicator will come onalong with the ABS indicator.

523

52395

On Touring models

On Touring models

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

ABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle.

Important Safety Reminders

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

ABS Indicator

430

０９／０３／１３　１６：２３：４５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４３５　

2010 Pilot

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output andby selectively applying the brakes.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times. There may alsobe some noise from the VSAhydraulic system. You will also seethe VSA activation indicator blink.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA activation indicator blink.

If this indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, and turn off theengine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays on or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

The main function of theVSA system is generally known asElectronic Stability Control (ESC).The system also includes a tractioncontrol function.

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON (II) position, there may be aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSASYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

CONTINUED

On Touring models

VSA Activation Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), SystemD

riving

431

NOTE:

０９／０３／１３　１６：２３：５５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４３６　

2010 Pilot

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

In certain unusual conditions whenyour vehicle gets stuck in shallowmud or fresh snow, it may be easierto free it with the VSA temporarilyswitched off. When the VSA systemis off, the traction control system isalso off. You should only attempt tofree your vehicle with the VSA off ifyou are not able to free it when theVSA is on.

Immediately after freeing yourvehicle, be sure to switch the VSA onagain. We do not recommend drivingyour vehicle with the VSA andtraction control systems switched off.

This switch is under the driver’s sidevent. To turn the VSA system on andoff, press and hold it until you hear abeep.

When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.

If the low tire pressure indicator orTPMS indicator comes on, seepage .

If the low tire pressure/TPMSindicator comes on, see page .Or, if the multi-information displayshows a ‘‘CHECK TPMSSYSTEM’’ message with theindicator flashing, see page .

In this case, you cannot turn off theVSA using the OFF switch again.

Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

420

423

96


On Touring models

VSA OFF Switch

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

432

０９／０３／１３　１６：２４：０４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４３７　

2010 Pilot

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

Your vehicle is equipped with a hillstart assist feature to help preventthe vehicle from rolling on steepinclines as you move your foot fromthe brake pedal to the accelerator.

This feature starts operating a fewseconds after you are in any drivegear position (when faced uphill) orin reverse (when faced downhill).This feature requires that thevehicle has come to a complete stopbefore it can work.

Hill start assist may not hold aheavily loaded vehicle, such as whenyour vehicle is connected to a trailer,or prevent your vehicle from rollingdownhill on a very steep or slipperyslope.

502

VSA and Tire Sizes Hill Start Assist

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), SystemD

riving

433

０９／０３／１３　１６：２４：１１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４３８　

2010 Pilot

The maximum allowable weight ofthe trailer and everything in or on itdepends on the number of occupantsin your vehicle and the type of trailerbeing towed (see page ).

Towing a trailer that is too heavy canseriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

Be sure to read thesection on page

if you plan to tow off pavedsurfaces.

Your vehicle has been designedprimarily to carry passengers andtheir cargo. You can also use it totow a trailer if you carefully observethe load limits, use the properequipment, and follow the guidelinesin this section.

Avoid towing a trailer during yourvehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km)(see page ).394

449

438

Towing a Trailer

Load Limit

Off-HighwayDriving Guidelines Total Trailer Weight

Break-In Period

434

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

０９／０３／１３　１６：２４：１９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４３９　

2010 Pilot

＊＊

＊

＊

The weight that the tongue of a fullyloaded trailer puts on the hitchshould be 5 to 10 percent of the totaltrailer weight for boat trailers, and 8to 15 percent of total trailer weightfor all other trailers. (See page

for limits for your towingsituation). Too much tongue loadreduces front-tire traction andsteering control. Too little tongueload can make the trailer unstable

and cause it to sway.

The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, allaccessories, all cargo, and thetongue load is:

The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, allaccessories, all cargo, and thetongue load must not exceed:

on the front axle

on the front axle

on the rear axle

2 : LX models1 : Except LX models

on the rear axle

438

4WD models:

2WD models:

4WD models:

2WD models:

2

1

Towing a Trailer

Tongue Load

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):

Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):

Driving

435

5,952 lbs (2,700 kg)

6,096 lbs (2,765 kg)

2,921 lbs (1,325 kg)

3,362 lbs (1,525 kg)3,251 lbs (1,475 kg)

2,921 lbs (1,325 kg)

3,196 lbs (1,450 kg)

０９／０３／１３　１６：２４：２８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４４０　

2010 Pilot

The best way to confirm that allloads are within limits is to checkthem at a public scale. For publicscales in your area, check your localphone book, or contact your trailerdealer or rental agency forassistance.

To help ensure a safe drive to a scale,or if you cannot get to a public scale,we recommend that you estimateyour total trailer weight and tongueload as described next.

Add the weight of your trailer (asquoted by the manufacturer) witheverything in or on the trailer. Thencheck the tables on page tomake sure you do not exceed thelimit for your conditions.

The maximum allowable weight ofthe fully loaded vehicle and trailerwith the proper hitch is:

The GCWR must be reduced 2percent for every 1,000 feet (305meters) of elevation.

438

4WD models:

2WD models:

Estimating LoadsGross Combined Weight Rating(GCWR):

To Estimate the Total Trailer Weight

Towing a Trailer

436

9,579 lbs (4,345 kg)

8,466 lbs (3,840 kg)

０９／０３／１３　１６：２４：３６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４４１　

2010 Pilot

Estimatedtongue load is:

150 lbs (68 kg)250 lbs (114 kg)350 lbs (159 kg)

Park the vehicle on level ground.

Measure and record the distancefrom the ground to the bottom ofthe trailer hitch.

Connect the fully loaded trailer tothe hitch.

Measure again from the ground tothe same spot on the bottom of thehitch.

Subtract the second measurementfrom the first measurement, thenrefer to the following table.

Estimatedtongue load is:

150 lbs (68 kg)250 lbs (114 kg)350 lbs (159 kg)450 lbs (205 kg)

If the difference is more than 1 ¾inch, you have too much load on thetongue. Redistribute the load orremove cargo as needed.

If thedifference is:

5/8’’1 1/4’’1 3/4’’

If thedifference is:

5/8’’1 1/4’’1 3/4’’2 1/4’’

If the difference is more than 2 ¼inch, you have too much load on thetongue. Redistribute the load orremove cargo as needed.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

2WD models 4WD models

Towing a Trailer

To Estimate the Tongue Load

Driving

437

０９／０３／１３　１６：２４：４５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４４２　

2010 Pilot

＊

＊＊

＊

＊＊

－－

＊

＊＊

Towing is Not Recommended

Number ofOccupants

2345678

Maximum Total Trailer Weight Maximum Tongue Load

Towing is Not Recommended

Number ofOccupants

2345678

Maximum Total Trailer Weight Maximum Tongue Load

2WD models

4WD models

Towing a Trailer

438

Total Trailer Weight and Tongue Load Limits:

3,500 lbs (1,588 kg)3,300 lbs (1,497 kg)3,100 lbs (1,406 kg)3,000 lbs (1,361 kg)2,800 lbs (1,270 kg)2,000 lbs (907 kg)

350 lbs (159 kg)300 lbs (136 kg)230 lbs (104 kg)200 lbs (91 kg)150 lbs (68 kg)100 lbs (45 kg)

4,500 lbs (2,041 kg)4,300 lbs (1,950 kg)4,100 lbs (1,860 kg)4,000 lbs (1,814 kg)3,800 lbs (1,724 kg)2,000 lbs (907 kg)

450 lbs (204 kg)400 lbs (181 kg)330 lbs (150 kg)270 lbs (122 kg)190 lbs (86 kg)100 lbs (45 kg)

The corresponding weight limits assume occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back, each occupant weighs 150 lbs (68kg), and each has 15 lbs (7 kg) of cargo in the cargo area. Any additional weight, including cargo or accessories, reduces the maximumtrailer weight and maximum tongue load. Never exceed the gross axle weight ratings (see page ).Recommended tongue load should be 5 10% of the total trailer weight for boat trailers, and 8 15% of the total trailer weight for all othertrailers.

435

０９／０３／１３　１６：２４：５３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４４３　

2010 Pilot

To accurately check your loads atthe public scale, the vehicle andtrailer should be fully loaded, and alloccupants should stay in the vehiclewhile the attendant watches thescale.

Check the front gross axle weight.Limit: 2,921 lbs (1,325 kg)

Check the gross vehicle weight.Limit (4WD models): 6,096 lbs(2,765 kg)Limit (2WD models): 5,952 lbs(2,700 kg)

If you cannot weigh the rear axledirectly, you can calculate the reargross axle weight by subtractingthe weight in step 1 from theweight in step 2.Limit (4WD models): 3,175 lbs(1,440 kg)Limit (2WD models): 3,031 lbs(1,375 kg)

Check the rear gross axle weight.Limit (4WD models): 3,362 lbs(1,525 kg)Limit (2WD models): 3,196 lbs(1,450 kg)

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Checking Loads

Towing a TrailerD

riving

439

０９／０５／２５　０９：５５：５０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４４４　

2010 Pilot

Calculate the tongue load.Subtract the weight in step 6 fromthe weight in step 7.Limit: See page .Recommended: see page .Range: 5-10% for boat trailers

8-15% for other trailers

Check the weight of the unhitchedtrailer. Limit: See page .

Check the weight of the hitchedtrailer. Write this number down.

Check the gross combined weight.Limit (4WD models): 9,579 lbs(4,345 kg)Limit (2WD models): 8,466 lbs(3,840 kg)Remember, maximum grosscombined weight should bedecreased 2% for every 1,000 feet(305 meters) of elevation.

7.

8.

6.5.438

438435

Towing a Trailer

440

０９／０３／１３　１６：２５：０８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４４５　

2010 Pilot

CONTINUED

There are two common types oftrailer brakes: surge and electric.Surge brakes are common for boattrailers, since the brakes will get wet.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electronically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

Read the trailer manufacturer’sinstructions, and select theappropriate draw bar for the heightof the trailer you will be towing.

A weight distributing hitch is notrecommended for use with yourvehicle, as an improperly adjustedweight distributing hitch may reducehandling, stability, and brakingperformance.

Towing generally requires a varietyof supplemental equipment. Toensure the best quality, werecommend that you purchaseHonda equipment whenever possible.

Your dealer offers trailer packagesthat include a ball mount, hitch plug,and hitch pin. A wiring harness kit isalso available from your dealer.

Honda recommends that any trailerwith a total trailer weight of 1,000 lbs(450 kg) or more has its own brakes.

See your trailer dealer or rentalagency for more information oninstalling electric brakes.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in this section. Also makesure that all equipment is properlyinstalled and maintained, and that itmeets federal, state, province,territory, and local regulations.

Towing a Trailer

Trailer BrakesHitch

Weight Distributing Hitch

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Driving

441

０９／０５／２５　０９：５７：１０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４４６　

2010 Pilot

Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and hitch,and that they cross under the tongueand can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but do not let thechains drag on the ground.

This device is recommended if yourtrailer tends to sway. Your trailermaker can tell you what kind of swaycontrol you need and how to install it.

Many states and provinces requirespecial exterior mirrors when towinga trailer. Even if they don’t, youshould install special mirrors if youcannot clearly see behind you, or ifthe trailer creates a blind spot.

Use this illustration to identify eachterminal in the trailer brakecontroller connector.

A factory installed, 4-pin grayconnector is located under theinstrument panel near the top of theparking brake pedal. This connectorhas all of the circuits required toinstall most electric trailer brakecontrollers. A jumper harness toadapt your electric trailer brakecontroller to the vehicle is includedwith the optional Genuine Hondatrailer hitch kit. To obtain a trailerhitch kit, see your dealer.

Have a qualified mechanic installyour trailer brake controllerfollowing the trailer brake controllermanufacturer’s instructions. Failureto properly install the trailer brakecontroller may increase the distanceit takes for you to stop your vehiclewhen towing a trailer.

Towing a Trailer

Safety Chains

Sway Control

Trailer Mirrors

442

GROUND(BLACK)

BRAKE(20A)(BLUE)

ELECTRIC BRAKE(BROWN/WHITE)

STOP(SKY BLUE)

０９／０３／１３　１６：２５：２７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４４７　

2010 Pilot

＋

Your vehicle is equipped with aconnector to install an optional trailerlighting connector that mates withyour vehicle. You can get thisoptional connector from your dealer.

Refer to the above illustration forwiring information.

Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with federal, state, province/territory, and local regulations.Check trailer light requirements forthe areas where you plan to tow, anduse only equipment designed foryour vehicle.

When towing a trailer, werecommend that you carry a full-sizespare wheel and tire for your vehicleand trailer. When replacing thecompact spare with a full size spare,remove the plastic spacer (see page

). Store the plastic spacer andcompact spare together. Reinstallthe spacer before once again stowingthe compact spare.

See page for proper tire size,page for how to store a full sizewheel and tire, and page forinformation on changing a flat tire.

Remember to unhitch the trailerbefore changing a flat. Ask yourtrailer sales or rental agency whereand how to store the trailer’s sparetire.

501

502515

509

CONTINUED

Towing a Trailer

Trailer LightsSpare Tires

Driving

443

GROUND(BLACK)

LEFT TURN SIGNALAND BRAKE LIGHTS(RED)

TAILLIGHTS(GREEN)

RIGHT TURN SIGNALAND BRAKE LIGHTS(WHITE)


BACK-UP LIGHTS(YELLOW)

GROUND(BLACK)

B CHARGE(BLUE)

０９／０３／１３　１６：２５：３６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４４８　

2010 Pilot

The 7-pin trailer connector is neededfor the trailer lights. To connect theconnector, do this:

Make sure the connector and thesocket are free of dirt, moisture,or other foreign material.

Open the socket lid by pulling it up.

Your vehicle has a class 3 trailerhitch as standard equipment.

We recommend that you have yourdealer install a Honda wiring harnessand converter. This harness hasbeen designed for your vehicle.

If you use a non-Honda trailerlighting harness and converter, youcan get the connector and pins thatmate with the connector in yourvehicle from your dealer.

Since lighting and wiring vary withtrailer type and brand, you shouldalso have a qualified mechanic installa suitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer.

The jumper harness and trailerbrake fuse are stored in the glovebox.

Also see page for trailer-relatedinformation.

1.

2.

441

On Touring models

Towing a Trailer

Connecting the Trailer ConnectorsTowing Equipment

444

TRAILER HITCH

7-PIN TRAILER CONNECTOR

LID

7-PIN TRAILER CONNECTOR

SOCKET

RETAININGTAB

RETAININGTAB

7-PIN TRAILERCONNECTOR

０９／０３／１３　１６：２５：４６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４４９　

2010 Pilot

＋

Refer to the above illustrations forwiring information.

The trailer jumper harness is used toinstall the controller for the electrictrailer brakes. For more information,see on page .

Insert the connector securely intothe socket.

Hook the retaining tab on theinner side of the lid against theretaining tab of the connector toprevent disconnection duringoperation.

Insert the trailer brake fuse into thesecondary under-hood fuse box (seepage ).

3.

441

529


Towing a Trailer

Trailer Jumper HarnessTrailer Connector Sockets

Trailer Brakes

Trailer Brake Fuse

Driving

445

7-PIN TRAILER SOCKET

SMALLLIGHT(GREEN)

LEFTTURN/STOP(RED)

BACK LIGHT(YELLOW)

GROUND(BLACK)

BRAKE(20A)(BLUE)


BRAKE LIGHTS(SKY BLUE)

BCHARGE(BLUE)

RIGHTTURN/STOP(WHITE)

ELECTRICBRAKE(BROWN/WHITE)

GROUND(BLACK)

０９／０３／１３　１６：２５：５６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４５０　

2010 Pilot

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the suspension andthe cooling system are in goodoperating condition.

The lights and brakes on yourvehicle and the trailer are workingproperly.

Your vehicle tires and spare are ingood condition and properlyinflated.

The trailer has been properlyserviced and is in good condition.

All weights and loads are withinlimits.

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All items on and in the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesin this section.

Towing performance can beaffected by high altitude, hightemperature, or when climbingsteep grades. Therefore, premiumfuel (premium unleaded gasolinewith pump octane number of 91 orhigher) is recommended whentowing more than 3,500 lbs (1,590kg).

The trailer tires and spare are ingood condition and inflated asrecommended by the trailermaker.

Towing a Trailer

Pre-Tow Checklist Driving Safely With a Trailer

446

０９／０３／１３　１６：２６：０６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４５１　

2010 Pilot

CONTINUED

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.Use D position when towing a traileron level roads. D is the proper shiftlever position to use when towing atrailer in hilly terrain. (See ‘‘

’’ on the next page foradditional gear information.)

When towing a fixed-sided trailer(e.g., camper), do not exceed 55 mph(88 km/h). At higher speeds, thetrailer may sway or affect vehiclehandling.

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses.

Allow more time and distance forbraking. Do not brake or turnsuddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

3

Towing a Trailer

Towing Speeds and Gears

Drivingon Hills

Making Turns and Braking

Driving

447

０９／０３／１３　１６：２６：１２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４５２　

2010 Pilot

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (Hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steering wheel,then turn the wheel to the left to getthe trailer to move to the left. Turnthe wheel to the right to move thetrailer to the right.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including putting thetransmission in Park and firmlysetting the parking brake. Also, placewheel chocks at each of the trailer’stires.

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause the trailer tosway. When being passed by a largevehicle, keep a constant speed, andsteer straight ahead. Do not try tomake quick steering or brakingcorrections.

If the vehicle’s tires slip whenretrieving a boat from the water,shift to first gear, and turn on VTM-4lock (see page ). DisengageVTM-4 lock as soon as the boat isout of the water to prevent damageto the VTM-4 system.

Your vehicle is not designed to betowed behind a motor home. If yourvehicle needs to be towed in anemergency, see page .

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently while going up a hill, shiftto D .

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed and shift down to D . Donot ‘‘ride’’ the brakes.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

418

531bottom

3

3

Driving on Hills Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Backing Up

Parking

Retrieving a Boat

Towing a Trailer

Towing Your Vehicle

Remember, ittakes longer to slow down andstop when towing a trailer.

448

０９／０３／１３　１６：２６：２２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４５３　

2010 Pilot

To avoid loss of control or rollover,be sure to follow all precautions andrecommendations.

Be sure to store cargo properlyand do not exceed your cargo loadlimits (see page and ).

Whenever you drive, make sureyou and your passengers alwayswear seat belts.

Keep your speed low, and nevergo faster than the conditions allow.

It’s up to you to continually assessthe situation and drive within thelimits.

Your vehicle has been designedprimarily for use on pavement. Butits higher ground clearance allowsyou to occasionally travel on unpavedroads, such as campgrounds, picnicsites, and similar locations. It is notdesigned for trail-blazing, mountainclimbing, or other challenging off-road activities.

If you decide to drive on unpavedroads, you will find that it requiressomewhat different driving skills.Your vehicle will also handlesomewhat differently than it does onpavement. Be sure to pay extraattention to the precautions and tipsin this section, and get acquaintedwith your vehicle before leaving thepavement.

405 434

Important Safety PrecautionsGeneral Information

Off-Highway Driving GuidelinesD

riving

449

Improperly operating thisvehicle on or off-pavement cancause an accident or rollover inwhich you and your passengerscould be seriously injured orkilled.

Follow all instructions andguidelines in this owner’smanual.Keep your speed low, anddon’t drive faster thanconditions permit.

０９／０３／１３　１６：２６：３２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４５４　

2010 Pilot

Before you leave the pavement, besure to do all scheduled maintenanceand service, and inspect your vehiclefor any problems. Pay specialattention to the condition of the tires,and check the tire pressures.

After you return to the pavement,carefully inspect your vehicle tomake sure there is no damage thatcould make driving it unsafe.Recheck the condition of the tiresand the tire pressures.

The route presents limits (too steepor bumpy roads). You have limits(driving skill and comfort). And yourvehicle has limits (traction, stability,and power).

Driving off-highway can behazardous if you fail to recognizelimits and take the properprecautions.

For better traction on all surfaces,accelerate slowly and gradually buildup speed. If you try to start too faston wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, youmight not have enough traction toget underway, and you may digyourself a hole. Starting with theshift lever in D position will help youhave a smoother start on snow or ice.

Keep in mind that you will usuallyneed more time and distance tobrake to a stop on unpaved surfaces.Avoid hard braking. Do not ‘‘pump’’the brakes; let the anti-lock brakingsystem pump them for you.

Debris in the road can damage yoursuspension or other components.Because your vehicle has a highcenter of gravity, driving over a largeobstacle, or allowing a wheel to dropinto a deep hole can cause yourvehicle to tip or roll over.

If you can’t clearly see all conditionsor obstacles on a slope, walk theslope before you drive on it. If youhave any doubt whether or not youcan safely drive on the slope, don’tdo it. Find another route.If you are driving up a hill and findthat you cannot continue,

. Your vehicle could rollover. Slowly back down the hill,following the same route you took upthe hill.

do not try toturn around

Check Out Your Vehicle

Remember

Accelerating and Braking Avoiding Obstacles

Driving on Slopes


450

０９／０３／１３　１６：２６：４２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４５５　

2010 Pilot

If you get stuck, engage the VTM-4Lock (see page ). Carefully try togo in the direction (forward orreverse) that you think will get youunstuck. Do not spin the tires at highspeeds. It will not help you get outand may cause damage to thetransmission or VTM-4 system.

If you are still unable to free yourself,your vehicle is equipped with frontand rear tow hooks designed for thispurpose.

Before driving through water, stop,get out if necessary, and make surethat:

If the water is deeper than the wheelhubs, some additional service maybe required. This service is notcovered by your warranties.

After driving through water, testyour brakes. If they got wet, gently‘‘pump’’ them while driving slowlyuntil they operate normally.

If you decide it is safe to drivethrough water, choose a suitablespeed and engage the VTM-4 Lock.Proceed without shifting or changingspeeds, and do not stop the vehicleor shut off the engine.

The banks and surface under thewater provide good traction. Thewater may hide hazards such asrocks, holes, or mud.

The water is not flowing too fast.Deep rushing water can sweep youdownstream. Even very shallowrushing water can wash theground from under your tires andcause you to lose traction andpossibly roll over.

The banks are sloped so you candrive out.

The water is not deep enough tocover your wheel hubs, axles, orexhaust pipe. You could stall andnot be able to restart your engine.The water can also damageimportant vehicle components.

418

CONTINUED


If You Get StuckCrossing a Stream

Driving

451

０９／０３／１３　１６：２６：５１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４５６　

2010 Pilot

Use a nylon strap to attach yourvehicle to the recovery vehicle, andcarefully take out the slack in thestrap. Once the strap is tight, therecovery vehicle should apply force.Remember that the recovery vehicleneeds good traction to avoidbecoming stuck, too.

You should never use a jack to try toget unstuck. Your vehicle couldeasily slip off the jack and hurt youor someone else.

You may be able to safely tow alightweight trailer (such as amotorcycle or small tent trailer) off-road if you follow these guidelines.

Do not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg)or a tongue weight of 100 lbs (45kg).

Stay on smooth, level dirt roads,and avoid driving in hilly terrain.

Allow extra room for starting,stopping, and turning.

Slow down if you encounter bumpsor other obstacles.


Towing a Trailer Off-Road

452

０９／０３／１３　１６：２６：５７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４５７　

2010 Pilot

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

This section also includesinstructions on how to read themaintenance minder messages onthe information display or multi-information display (depending onmodels), and instructions for simplemaintenance tasks you may want totake care of yourself.

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

......................Maintenance Safety . 454....................Maintenance Minder . 455

..............................Fluid Locations . 470......Engine Compartment Covers . 471

........................Adding Engine Oil . 472Changing the Engine Oil and

...........................................Filter . 473..............................Engine Coolant . 475

....................Windshield Washers . 477....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 478

.................Rear Differential Fluid . 480.............Transfer Assembly Fluid . 480

....................................Brake Fluid . 481....................Power Steering Fluid . 482

....................................Timing Belt . 482.............................................Lights . 483

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 490................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 490

.....................................Floor Mats . 491.................................Wiper Blades . 492

...............................................Tires . 496...................Checking the Battery . 504

.............................Vehicle Storage . 506

557

MaintenanceM

aintenance

453

０９／０５／２５　０９：５７：１５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４５８　

2010 Pilot

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Let the

engine and exhaust system cooldown before touching any parts.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Maintenance Safety


Injury from moving parts.

Burns from hot parts.

Carbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Potential Vehicle Hazards

454

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle, or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

０９／０３／１３　１６：２７：１３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４５９　

2010 Pilot

－－－－－－－－－－－－

Your vehicle displays engine oil lifeand maintenance service items onthe information display or multi-information display (depending onmodels) to show you when youshould have your dealer performengine oil replacement and indicatedmaintenance services.

Based on the engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life and displays it as apercentage.

The remaining engine oil life isshown on the display according tothis table:

To see the current engine oil life,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and press the select/reset knob repeatedly until theengine oil life display appears (seepage ).83

Calculated EngineOil Life (%)100 % 91 %90 % 81 %80 % 71 %70 % 61 %60 % 51 %50 % 41 %40 % 31 %30 % 21 %20 % 16 %15 % 11 %10 % 6 %5 % 1 %

0 %

DisplayedEngine Oil Life (%)

100 %90 %80 %70 %60 %50 %40 %30 %20 %15 %10 %5 %0 %

CONTINUED

Except Touring modelsEngine Oil Life Display

Maintenance MinderM

aintenance

455

ENGINE OILLIFE DISPLAY SELECT/

RESET KNOBU.S. model is shown.

０９／０３／１３　１６：２７：２２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４６０　

2010 Pilot

If the remaining engine oil life is 15to 6 percent, you will see the engineoil life indicator every time you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position. The maintenance minderindicator will also come on, and themaintenance item code(s) for otherscheduled maintenance itemsneeding service will be displayednear the ‘‘OIL LIFE’’ message.

When the remaining engine oil life is5 to 1 percent, you will see a‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with thesame maintenance item code(s),every time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

The 15 and 10 percent oil lifeindicators remind you that yourvehicle will soon be due forscheduled maintenance.

Maintenance Minder

456

MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR ‘‘SERVICE’’ MESSAGEMAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)

ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR

U.S. model is shown. U.S. model is shown. U.S. model is shown.

０９／０３／１３　１６：２７：２９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４６１　

2010 Pilot

The maintenance item code or codesindicate the main and sub itemsrequired at the time of the oil change(see page ).

You can switch the informationdisplay from the engine oil lifedisplay to the odometer or the tripmeter. Press and release the select/reset knob on the instrument panel.

When the engine oil life is 15 to 1percent, the maintenance minderindicator ( ) comes on everytime you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, then it goes outif you switch the information display.

When you see this message, havethe indicated maintenanceperformed by your dealer as soon aspossible.

When the remaining engine oil life is0 percent, the engine oil life indicatorwill blink. The display comes onevery time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Themaintenance minder indicator( ) also comes on and remainson in the instrument panel. Whenyou see this message, immediatelyhave the indicated maintenance doneby your dealer.

If you do not perform the indicatedmaintenance, negative distancetraveled is displayed and begins toblink after the vehicle has beendriven 10 miles (10 km) or more.

Negative distance traveled meansyour vehicle has passed themaintenance required point.

Immediately have the indicatedmaintenance done by your dealer.

458

CONTINUED

Maintenance MinderM

aintenance

457

U.S. model is shown. U.S. model is shown.

NEGATIVE DISTANCE TRAVELED

０９／０３／１３　１６：２７：３９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４６２　

2010 Pilot

To change the information displayfrom the engine oil life display to theodometer or the trip meter, pressand release the select/reset knob.

Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as described as follows.

When the engine oil life is 0 percentor negative distance traveled, themaintenance minder indicator( ) remains on even if youchange the information display.

All maintenance items displayed onthe information display are in code.For an explanation of thesemaintenance codes, see page .

Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the informationdisplay the next time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the maintenance minder asfollows:


Press the select/reset knobrepeatedly until the engine oil lifeis displayed.

1.

2.469

Except Touring models Except Touring models

Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeDisplay

Maintenance Minder

458

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM


MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM(S)

０９／０３／１３　１６：２７：４９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４６３　

2010 Pilot

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

Press the select/reset knob forabout 10 seconds. The engine oillife and the maintenance itemcode(s) will blink.

Press the select/reset knob foranother 5 seconds. Themaintenance item code(s) willdisappear, and the engine oil lifewill reset to ‘‘100.’’

To see the current engine oil life,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and push and releasethe INFO ( / ) button on thesteering wheel repeatedly, until theengine oil life is displayed (see page

).

3. 4.

88

CONTINUED

On Touring models

Maintenance MinderM

aintenance

459

ENGINE OILLIFE DISPLAY

SEL/RESET BUTTON

INFO ( / )BUTTONU.S. model is shown.



０９／０３／１３　１６：２７：５７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４６４　

2010 Pilot

▲ ▼When the remaining engine oil life is15 percent or less, the display showsa ‘‘SERVICE DUE SOON’’ messagealong with the maintenance itemcode(s) for other scheduledmaintenance items needing service.

The system message indicator onthe instrument panel will also comeon, and a beeper will sound.

To cancel the system message, pressand release the INFO ( / ) buttonon the steering wheel. At this time,the system message indicator willalso be turned off. Then the displaywill change to the engine oil lifedisplay. You will see themaintenance item code(s) along withthe engine oil life on the multi-information display.

Maintenance Minder

460

MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S) SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATORU.S. model is shown.

０９／０３／１３　１６：２８：０３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４６５　

2010 Pilot

You will also see the systemmessage every time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position until you have the indicatedmaintenance performed by yourdealer.

The maintenance item code(s)indicate the main and sub itemsrequired at the time of the oil change(see page ).


When the remaining engine oil life isless than 5 percent, you will see theabove display. The display thenchanges to ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW.’’Have the indicated maintenancedone as soon as possible.

465

CONTINUED

Maintenance MinderM

aintenance

461

０９／０３／１３　１６：２８：０９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４６６　

2010 Pilot

▲ ▼


To cancel the system message, pressand release the INFO ( / ) buttonon the steering wheel. At this time,the system message indicator willalso be turned off. Then the displaywill change to the engine oil lifedisplay. You will see a ‘‘SERVICE’’message and along with themaintenance item code(s) on themulti-information display.

If the indicated maintenance serviceis not done and the engine oil lifereaches 0 percent, you will see a‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ messagealong with the maintenance itemcode(s) on the multi-informationdisplay.

Maintenance Minder

462

U.S. model is shown. U.S. model is shown.

０９／０３／１３　１６：２８：１４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４６７　

2010 Pilot

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

When you see this message, havethe indicated maintenance done byyour dealer immediately.


The system message will appearagain by pressing the INFO ( / )button after cancel it.


To cancel the system message, pressand release the INFO ( / ) buttonon the steering wheel. At this time,the system message indicator will

be turned off. Then the displaywill change to the engine oil lifedisplay. You will see the engine oillife blinking and a ‘‘SERVICE’’message along with the maintenanceitem code(s) on the multi-information display.

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

not

Maintenance

463


０９／０３／１３　１６：２８：２０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４６８　

2010 Pilot

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

Negative distance traveled meansyour vehicle has passed themaintenance required point.

The system message will appearagain by pressing the INFO ( / )button after canceling it.


Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as described on page .

If the indicated required service isnot done and the remaining engineoil life becomes 0%, the multi-information display will show a‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message,the total distance traveled after theremaining oil life became 0%, and themaintenance item code(s).

To cancel the system message, pressand release the INFO ( / ) buttonon the steering wheel. At this time,the system message indicator will

be turned off. Then the displaywill change to the engine oil lifedisplay. You will see the negativedistance traveled blinking and a‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with themaintenance item code(s) on themulti-information display.

465

Maintenance Minder

not

464

U.S.U.S.

Canada Canada

０９／０３／１３　１６：２８：２８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４６９　

2010 Pilot

Press and hold the SEL/RESETbutton on the steering wheel formore than 10 seconds. Theremaining engine oil life resetmode will be shown on the multi-information display.

All maintenance items displayed onthe information display are in code.For an explanation of thesemaintenance codes, see page .

Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the display thenext time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the maintenance minder asfollows:


Press the SEL/RESET button onthe steering wheel until you seethe engine oil life display.

1.

2.

3.

469

CONTINUED


Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeDisplay

Maintenance MinderM

aintenance

465

MAINTENANCEMAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCESUB ITEM(S)


０９／０３／１３　１６：２８：３８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４７０　

2010 Pilot

▲ ▼Select ‘‘RESET’’ by pressing theINFO ( / ) button, then pressthe SEL/RESET button to resetthe engine oil life display. Themaintenance item code(s) willdisappear, and the engine oil lifewill reset to ‘‘100.’’ If you want tocancel the oil life reset mode,select ‘‘CANCEL.’’

If you have the required servicedone but do not reset the display, orreset the display without doing theservice, the system will not show thecorrect maintenance intervals. Thiscan lead to serious mechanicalproblems because you will no longerhave an accurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your vehicle best and canprovide competent, efficient service.

However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Make sure tohave the service facility or personreset the display as previouslydescribed. Keep all receipts as proofof completion, and have the personwho does the work fill out yourHonda Service History or CanadianMaintenance Log. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.

4.

Maintenance Minder

Important MaintenancePrecautions

466


０９／０３／１３　１６：２８：４４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４７１　

2010 Pilot

＃

－

－

－

We recommend the use of Hondaparts and fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

U.S. Vehicles:

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed in accordance with theintervals indicated by the odometer/trip meter display or the multi-information display.

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

398

398

478

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance, replacement, orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

Maintenance

467

０９／０３／１３　１６：２８：５３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４７２　

2010 Pilot

－

－

－

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page .

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

481

497

483

Maintenance Minder

468

０９／０３／１３　１６：２８：５７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４７３　

2010 Pilot

＃

＃

－－＃

Maintenance Minder

469

Maintenance Main Items

Replace engine oil

Replace engine oil and oil filter

Inspect front and rear brakes

Check parking brake adjustment

Inspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots

Suspension components

Driveshaft boots

Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA)

All fluid levels and condition of fluids

Exhaust system

Fuel lines and connections

Maintenance Sub Items

Rotate tires

Replace air cleaner element

Replace dust and pollen filter

Inspect drive belt

Replace transmission and transfer fluid

Replace spark plugs

Replace timing belt and inspect water pump

Inspect valve clearance

Replace engine coolant

Replace VTM-4 rear differential fluid

Symbol Symbol

A

B

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

1

If the message, ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months afterthe display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .

Independent of the maintenance messages in the information display,replace the brake fluid every 3 years.Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.

467

If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

If you drive primarily in urban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air from industry and fromdiesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles(24,000 km).

If you drive regularly in very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C), in very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C), or towing a trailer, replace every60,000 miles (U.S.)/100,000 km (Canada).

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehiclespeeds or trailer towing results in higher level ofmechanical (shear) stress to fluid. This requiresdifferential fluid changes more frequently thanrecommended by the maintenance minder. If youregularly drive your vehicle under these conditions,have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles(12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

:

1 :

NOTE :

Main

tenance

Min

der

０９／０３／２３　１４：２６：４９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４７４　

2010 Pilot

Fluid Locations

470

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

RADIATOR CAP

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

POWER STEERING FLUID(Red cap)

ENGINE COOLANTRESERVOIR

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

BRAKE FLUID(Black cap)

０９／０３／１３　１６：２９：０９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４７５　

2010 Pilot

The component parts in the enginecompartment are protected by thecover. You may need to remove thecover and the air intake cover whenyou perform some simplemaintenance work.

To remove the front bulkhead coverand the air intake cover, remove theholding clips with a flat-tipscrewdriver.

Covers are secured by holding clips.

Engine Compartment CoversM

aintenance

471

FRONT BULKHEAD COVER

HOLDING CLIP

AIR INTAKE COVER

０９／０３／１３　１６：２９：１４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４７６　

2010 Pilot

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, andtighten it securely. Wait a fewminutes, and recheck the oil level onthe engine oil dipstick. Do not fillabove the upper mark; you coulddamage the engine.

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda motor oil in your vehicle.Make sure the API Certification Sealsays ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on top of the valve cover.Pour in the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspills immediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil

472

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Ambient Temperature

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

０９／０３／１３　１６：２９：２１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４７７　

2010 Pilot

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals shown on the odometer/trip meter display or on the multi-information display.

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the informationdisplay or multi-information display(depending on models). The oil andfilter collect contaminants that candamage your engine if they are notremoved regularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Synthetic Oil Changing the Engine Oil andFilter

Engine Oil Additives

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and FilterM

aintenance

473

WASHER DRAIN BOLT

０９／０３／１３　１６：２９：３１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４７８　

2010 Pilot

Remove the oil filter, and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine and let it sitfor several minutes, then checkthe oil level on the dipstick. Ifnecessary, add more oil.

Make sure the oil filter gasket isnot stuck to the contacting surfaceof the engine. If it is, remove itbefore installing a new oil filter.

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

Make sure to clean off any dirtand dust on the contacting surfaceof a new oil filter.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to:

Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

9.

8.

7.

6.

4.

5.

3.

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

474

OIL FILTER

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

4.5 US qt (4.3 ) Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer, and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

０９／０３／１３　１６：２９：４０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４７９　

2010 Pilot

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Always use Honda Long-life Anti-freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolantis pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent distilledwater. Never add straight antifreezeor plain water.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

CONTINUED

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine CoolantM

aintenance

475

MAXMIN

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０９／０３／１３　１６：２９：４８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４８０　

2010 Pilot

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

Relieve any pressure in the coolingsystem by turning the radiator capcounterclockwise, withoutpressing down.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Put the radiator cap back on, andtighten it fully.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spill immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

3.

4.

1.

2.

5. 6.

Engine Coolant

476

RADIATOR CAP

RESERVE TANK

MAX

MIN

０９／０３／１３　１６：２９：５６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４８１　

2010 Pilot

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

The washer level indicator will comeon when the level is low (see page

).

If the washer fluid is low, a ‘‘LOWWASHER FLUID’’ message appearson the multi-information display.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

80

On Touring models


Windshield WashersM

aintenance

477

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

０９／０３／１３　１６：３０：０３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４８２　

2010 Pilot

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Start the engine, let it run until theradiator fan comes on, then shutoff the engine. For accurateresults, wait about 60 seconds (butno longer than 90 seconds) beforedoing step 2.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid when thisservice is shown on the informationdisplay or multi-information display(depending on models).

1.

2. 3.

4.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

478

DIPSTICK

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

０９／０３／１３　１６：３０：１０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４８３　

2010 Pilot

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the dipstickhole to bring it to the levelbetween the upper and lowermarks.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid when thisservice is indicated by a maintenancemessage on the multi-informationdisplay.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

Always use Honda GenuineATF-Z1 (automatic transmissionfluid).

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Make sure the rubber cap on thedipstick fits in the dipstick guideand that you push the dipstick inall the way.

5.

6.

Automatic Transmission FluidM

aintenance

479

Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1(automatic transmission f luid). Do notmix with other transmission f luids.Using transmission f luid other thanHonda Genuine ATF-Z1 may causedeterioration in transmission operationand durability, and could result indamage to the transmission.Damage resulting f rom the use oftransmission f luid other than HondaGenuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by theHonda new vehicle warranty.

０９／０３／１３　１６：３０：１８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４８４　

2010 Pilot

The rear differential should bedrained and refilled with new fluidwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on theinformation display or multi-information display. This servicemay be needed more often undercertain driving conditions (see page

).

Always use Honda VTM-4Differential Fluid, and have yourdealer replace the rear differentialfluid.

Always use Hypoid gear oil GL4 orGL5 with a viscosity of SAE 90 or80W-90. Have the fluid replaced byyour dealer.

The transfer assembly should bedrained and refilled with new fluidwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on theinformation display or multi-information display.

469

4WD models only 4WD models only

Rear Differential Fluid, Transfer Assembly Fluid

Rear Differential Fluid Transfer Assembly Fluid

480

FILLER BOLT

CORRECT LEVEL

０９／０３／１３　１６：３０：２４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４８５　

2010 Pilot

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Replace the brake fluid when thisservice is indicated on a maintenancemessage on the information displayor multi-information display(depending on models).

Check the fluid level in the brakefluid reservoir monthly.

Brake FluidM

aintenance

481

MAXMIN

０９／０３／１３　１６：３０：３１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４８６　

2010 Pilot

－－Check the level on the side of thereservoir when the engine is cold.The fluid should be between theUPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.If not add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL mark.

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

The timing belt should be replacedat the intervals shown in themaintenance minder schedule.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

If you are not sure how to addfluid, contact your dealer.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspills immediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

Replace the timing belt every 60,000miles (U.S.) or every 100,000 km(Canada) if you regularly drive yourvehicle in any of the followingconditions:

In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C).Frequently towing a trailer.

Timing BeltPower Steering Fluid

Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt

482

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVEL

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

０９／０３／１３　１６：３０：４０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４８７　

2010 Pilot

CONTINUED

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its base, and protect the glassfrom contact with your skin or hardobjects. If you touch the glass, cleanit with denatured alcohol and a cleancloth.

Open the hood.

If you need to change theheadlight bulb on the driver’s side,remove the front end of the airintake duct by pulling it out.

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thecargo area or pull a trailer,readjustment may be required.Adjustments should be done by yourdealer or another qualifiedtechnician.

The high beam headlight bulb, thelow beam headlight bulb, anddaytime running light bulb arereplaced the same way.

1.

Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight/DaytimeRunning Light Bulb

LightsM

aintenance

483

CONNECTOR

BULB

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

０９／０３／１３　１６：３０：４９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４８８　

2010 Pilot

Open the hood.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Remove the bulb by turning itabout one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,and turn it one-quarter turnclockwise to lock it in place.

Push the electrical connector ontothe new bulb.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.

1.

2.

3.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Lights

Replacing Front Turn Signal/Parking and Side Marker LightBulbs

484

SOCKET

BULB

CONNECTOR

BULB

CONNECTOR

BULB

FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LIGHT

０９／０３／１３　１６：３０：５９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４８９　

2010 Pilot

Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

Your vehicle uses halogen lightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its plastic case, and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.

Place a cloth on the edge of thecover to prevent scratches.Remove the covers by carefullyprying on the edge with a smallflat-tip screwdriver.

1.

4.

5.

6.

CONTINUED

Except LX modelsReplacing a Front Fog Light Bulb

LightsM

aintenance

485

BULB

SOCKET

SIDE MARKER LIGHT

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil,perspiration, or a scratch on the glasscan cause the bulb to overheat andshatter.

０９／０３／１３　１６：３１：０８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４９０　

2010 Pilot

Remove the bulb from the foglight assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Remove the front fog lightassembly from the bumper.

Open the tailgate.

Remove the two mounting boltswith an 8 mm wrench.

Place a cloth on the inner edge ofthe assembly to prevent scratches.Loosen the assembly by carefullyprying on the top and side edgeswith a small flat-tip screwdriver.Use your fingers to further pull itloose.

Remove the assembly from themounting holes by pulling it out.

1. 3.3.

4.

2.

2.

4.

Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs(in Rear Pillar)

486

CONNECTOR

０９／０３／１３　１６：３１：１７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４９１　

2010 Pilot

Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.


Put the socket back into the lightassembly, and turn it clockwise tolock it in place.

Each outside mirror has side turnsignal lights. The lights should bereplaced by your dealer.

Align the two tabs on the lightassembly with the mounting holesand install the rear light assemblyin the rear pillar. Tighten the twobolts securely.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Determine which of the four bulbsis burned out: stop/taillight,back-up light, side marker light, orturn signal light.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

5.

On Touring models

Lights

Side Turn Signal Lights

Maintenance

487

BULB

TABS

SOCKET

０９／０３／１３　１６：３１：２６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４９２　

2010 Pilot

Place a cloth on the edge of thelens segment to prevent scratches.Remove each lens segment bycarefully prying on its edge with asmall flat-tip screwdriver.

Remove the screw under each lens.

Pull the high-mount brake lightassembly out of the vehicle.

Remove the lens from the lightassembly.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.


Put the lens back on the lightassembly, and tighten themounting bolts securely.

Put the light assembly back intothe vehicle. Install the screws andtighten them securely.Reinstall the lens segments.

Remove the two mounting screwsfrom the light assembly.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

7.

8.

9.

6.

Lights

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

488

LENS SEGMENT

０９／０３／１３　１６：３１：３５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４９３　

2010 Pilot

Turn on the parking lights andcheck that the new bulb isworking.

Put the lens back into the lightassembly, right side first. Push onthe left edge until it snaps intoplace.

Place a cloth on the edge of thelens segment to preventscratching. Insert a small flat-tipscrewdriver between the left edgeof the lens and the housing. Thelens will come down.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb in untilit bottoms in the socket.

3.

4.

1.

2.

Replacing a Rear License PlateBulb

LightsM

aintenance

489

BULB

LENS

SCREWDRIVER LENS

CLOTH

０９／０３／１３　１６：３１：４２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４９４　

2010 Pilot

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air-dry beforeyou use the vehicle.

This filter removes the dust andpollen that is brought in from theoutside through the heating andcooling system/climate controlsystem.

Have your dealer replace the filterwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on theinformation display or multi-information display (depending onthe models). It should be replacedevery 15,000 miles (24,000 km) if youdrive primarily in urban areas thathave high concentrations of soot inthe air, or if the flow from theheating and cooling system/climatecontrol system becomes less thanusual.

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

Cleaning the Seat BeltsDust and Pollen Filter

Dust and Pollen Filter, Cleaning the Seat Belts

490

LOOP

０９／０３／１３　１６：３１：４９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４９５　

2010 Pilot

The floor mats that came with yourvehicle hook over the floor matanchors. This keeps the floor matsfrom sliding forward, possiblyinterfering with the pedals, orbackwards, making the frontpassenger’s weight sensorsineffective.

If you remove a floor mat, make sureto re-anchor it when you put it backin your vehicle.

If you use a non-Honda floor mat,make sure it fits properly and that itcan be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mats.

Floor MatsM

aintenance

491

FRONT REAR

０９／０３／１３　１６：３１：５４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４９６　

2010 Pilot

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every 6 months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, and areasthat are getting hard or if they leavestreaks and unwiped areas whenused.

To replace the front wiper blades:

Raise each wiper arm off thewindshield, lifting the driver’s sidefirst, then the passenger’s side.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm:

Press and hold the lock tab.Slide the blade assembly towardthe lock tab until it releasesfrom the wiper arm.

When replacing a wiper blade, makesure not to drop the wiper blade orwiper arm down on the windshield.

2.

1.

Wiper Blades

492

WIPER ARMS

LOCK TAB

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and the wiper arms.

０９／０３／１３　１６：３２：０２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４９７　

2010 Pilot

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the wiper arm against thewindow.Windshield: Lower the passenger’sside first, then the driver’s side.

Remove the blade from its holderby grabbing the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

6.

7.

4.

5.

3.

CONTINUED

Wiper BladesM

aintenance

493

BLADE BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

０９／０３／１３　１６：３２：１１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４９８　

2010 Pilot

To replace the rear wiper blade: Slide the blade out of the wiperarm.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Raise the wiper arm off the glasshatch and hold it.

3.

1.

2.

Wiper Blades

494

BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

WIPER ARM

０９／０３／１３　１６：３２：１８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０４９９　

2010 Pilot

Slide the new blade into the wiperarm. Make sure it is engaged inthe slot along its full length.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield or the hatch glass.

4.

5.

Wiper BladesM

aintenance

495

０９／０３／１３　１６：３２：２２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５００　

2010 Pilot

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) warns you when a tirepressure is low. See page or

for more information.

Even though your vehicle isequipped with TPMS, werecommend that you visually checkyour tires every day. If you think atire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.

420423

Inflation Guidelines

Tires

496

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

０９／０３／１３　１６：３２：３０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５０１　

2010 Pilot

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

Front/Rear:

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal and high-speed drivingconditions.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional information aboutyour tires, see page .

Check the air pressures when thetires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at least 3hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km). Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures.

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

If you check air pressures when thetires are hot (driven for severalmiles/kilometers), you will seereadings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreadings. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the recommendedcold air pressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

540

Recommended Tire Pressures

TiresM

aintenance

497

P245/65R17 105T32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

０９／０３／１３　１６：３２：３９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５０２　

2010 Pilot

A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

The service life of your tires isdependent on many factors,including, but not limited to, drivinghabits, road conditions, vehicleloading, inflation pressure,maintenance history, speed, andenvironmental conditions (evenwhen the tires are not in use).In addition to your regularinspections and inflation pressuremaintenance, it is recommended thatyou have annual inspectionsperformed once the tires reach fiveyears old. It is also recommendedthat all tires, including the spare, beremoved from service after 10 yearsfrom the date of manufacture,regardless of their condition or stateof wear.

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see a 1/2inch (12.7 mm) wide band across thetread. This shows there is less than1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left onthe tire.

The last four digits of the TIN (tireidentification number) are found onthe sidewall of the tire and indicatethe date of manufacture (See

on page ).542

Tire Inspection Tire Service Life

TireLabeling

Tires

498

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

０９／０３／１３　１６：３２：４９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５０３　

2010 Pilot

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS and vehicle stability assistsystem (VSA) to work inconsistently.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires according to themaintenance messages displayed onthe information display or multi-information display (depending onmodels). Move the tires to thepositions shown in the diagram eachtime they are rotated. If youpurchase directional tires, rotateonly front-to-back.

CONTINUED

Tire Maintenance Replacing Tires and WheelsTire Rotation

TiresM

aintenance

499

Front

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

Front

On vehicles with aluminum wheels,improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly Honda wheel weights f orbalancing.

０９／０３／１３　１６：３２：５７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５０４　

2010 Pilot

The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. When replacingtires, use the same size originallysupplied with the vehicle. Tire sizeand construction can affect wheelspeed and may cause the system toactivate.

When the tires are rotated, makesure the air pressures are checked.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

Also be sure you use only TPMSspecific wheels. If you do not, thetire pressure monitoring system willnot work.

Tires

500

０９／０３／１３　１６：３３：０３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５０５　

2010 Pilot

If you store a full size tire on thehoist, remove the spacer.Otherwise the hoist will not fullyreturn to its original position.

To remove the spacer, loosen thetwo bolts.

Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.

TiresM

aintenance

501

SPACER BOLTS (10 mm)

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

０９／０３／１３　１６：３３：０９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５０６　

2010 Pilot

＋Wheels:

Tires:

See page for information aboutDOT Tire Quality Grading, and page

for tire size and labelinginformation.

Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas the original tires. Mount snowtires on all four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.542

540

Wheel and Tire Specifications Winter Driving Snow Tires

Tires

502

17 x 7 1/2 J

P245/65R17 105T

０９／０３／１３　１６：３３：１６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５０７　

2010 Pilot

＃

Mount tire chains on your tires whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Install them only on thefront tires.

Clean the wheels as you would therest of the exterior. Wash them withthe same solution, and rinse themthoroughly.

Aluminum alloy wheels have aprotective clear-coat that keeps thealuminum from corroding andtarnishing. Cleaning the wheels withharsh chemicals (including somecommercial wheel cleaners) or a stiffbrush can damage the clear-coat. Toclean the wheels, use a milddetergent and a soft brush or sponge.

When installing chains, follow themanufacturer’s instructions andmount them as tightly as you can.Drive slowly with chains installed. Ifyou hear them contacting the bodyor chassis, stop and investigate.Make sure the chains are installedtightly, and that they are notcontacting the brake lines orsuspension. Remove the chains assoon as you start driving on clearedroads.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, Honda stronglyrecommends using the chains listedbelow.

SCC Super Z-6 SZ-435

Tire Chains Wheels

TiresM

aintenance

503

Using the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

０９／０３／１３　１６：３３：２４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５０８　

2010 Pilot

－

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfurther corrosion.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in thefrequency display. Use the presetbuttons to enter the digit code (seepage ).

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

313

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Checking the Battery

504

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledtechnician do the batterymaintenance.

０９／０３／１３　１６：３３：３１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５０９　

2010 Pilot

The navigation system will alsodisable itself. The next time you turnon the ignition switch, the systemwill require you to enter a PINbefore it can be used. Refer to thenavigation system manual.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected, or goes dead, the timesetting will be reset to 1:00. To setthe time again, follow the settingprocedure (see page ).314

Except Touring models On Touring models

Checking the BatteryM

aintenance

505

０９／０３／１３　１６：３３：３５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５１０　

2010 Pilot

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Fill the fuel tank.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front and rear wiperblade arms with a folded towel orrag so they do not touch thewindshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand tailgate seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand tailgate seals.

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fans cycle on and offtwice). Preferably, do this once amonth.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Park.

Vehicle Storage

506

０９／０３／１３　１６：３３：４３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５１１　

2010 Pilot

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 508....................Changing a Flat Tire . 509

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 516................................Jump Starting . 517

..............If the Engine Overheats . 519.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 521..........Charging System Indicator . 521

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 522...............Brake System Indicator . 523

..............................................Fuses . 524..............................Fuse Locations . 528

......................Emergency Towing . 531..........If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 532

Taking Care of the UnexpectedTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

507

０９／０３／１３　１６：３３：４７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５１２　

2010 Pilot

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Follow these precautions:Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

Do not mount snow chains on acompact spare.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some roadsurfaces. Use greater cautionwhile driving.

If you store a full size tire on thehoist, remove the spacer.Otherwise the hoist will not fullyreturn to its original position.

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

The low tire pressure indicatorcomes on and stays on after youreplace the flat tire with the compactspare tire. After several miles(kilometers) driving with thecompact spare tire, the TPMSindicator comes on and the low tirepressure indicator goes off.

After the flat tire is replaced with thespare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator stays on. Afterseveral miles (kilometers) drivingwith the spare, this indicator beginsto flash, then stays on again. You willalso see a ‘‘CHECK TPMSSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).426


On Touring models

Compact Spare Tire

508

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

０９／０３／１３　１６：３３：５７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５１３　

2010 Pilot

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area to stopthat is far away from the traffic lanes.

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park. Apply theparking brake.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

Open the tailgate.

Push the rear edge of the handleto raise the handle loop and pull upthe loop to raise the cargo areafloor.Remove the cargo area floor.

2.

1.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

509

JACK

TOOLS

SPARE TIRE

CARGO AREAFLOOR

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

０９／０３／１３　１６：３４：０５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５１４　

2010 Pilot

The spare tire is storedunderneath the rear cargo area.Remove the plastic cover and therubber cap on the cargo arealining to access the shaft for thespare tire hoist.

Put the extension with the wheelnut wrench on the hoist shaft.Turn the wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground.

The tools and jack are under thecargo area behind a cover on thepassenger’s side. Remove thecover and take the jack out of thetool kit case.

Fold down the third row seat (seepage ).

5. 6.

7. 8.161

Changing a Flat Tire

510

COVER

KNOB

PLASTIC COVER

WHEEL NUTWRENCH

The wheel nut wrench supplied withyour vehicle is specially adapted to f itthe hoist shaf t. Do not use any othertool.

０９／０３／１３　１６：３４：１３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５１５　

2010 Pilot

CONTINUED

Remove the bracket from thespare tire.

Keep turning the wheel nutwrench to create slack in the cable.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange.

9.

10.

12.11.


Care

ofthe

Unexpected

511

BRACKET JACKING POINTS

０９／０３／１３　１６：３４：２０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５１６　

2010 Pilot

Turn the dial at the bottom of thejack clockwise until the top of thejack contacts the jacking point.Make sure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

Attach the stay to the extension,then attach the wheel nut wrenchto the end of the extension.

Insert the hook at the end of thestay into the opening on the dial atthe bottom of the jack.

Make sure the stay, the extension,and the wheel nut wrench aresecurely attached.

13. 14. 15.


512

DIAL

CONNECTOR BUTTON

DIAL

HOOK

STAY CONNECTOR BUTTON

EXTENSION

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

０９／０３／１３　１６：３４：２７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５１７　

2010 Pilot

Turn the jack dial (wheel nutwrench) clockwise as shown toraise the vehicle until the flat tireis off the ground.

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tighten thewheel nuts fully.

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

16. 17.

18.

19.

CONTINUED


Care

ofthe

Unexpected

513

BRAKE HUB

０９／０３／１３　１６：３４：３４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５１８　

2010 Pilot

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Insert the hoist bracket into thecenter hole of the flat tire.

Remove the center cap from theflat tire, and place the flat tireunder the hoist, with the valvestem facing up.

20.

21. 22.


514

94 lbf·ft (127 N·m , 13 kgf·m)

０９／０３／１３　１６：３４：４０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５１９　

2010 Pilot

Slowly turn the extension with thewheel nut wrench clockwise totake up the slack of the hoist cable.Make sure the bracket is seated inthe center hole of the flat tire.

Turn the extension with the wheelnut wrench clockwise until the flattire rests against the underbody ofthe vehicle and you hear the hoistclick.

Store the jack and the tools in thetool box.

Refer to(see page or ).

23.

24.

25.

26.422 427


Changing a Tire withTPMS

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

515

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

Always raise the spare tire hoist, evenif you are not stowing a tire. If thehoist is lef t down, it will be damagedduring driving and need to be replaced.

０９／０３／１３　１６：３４：４７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５２０　

2010 Pilot

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position:

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, you do nothear the normal noise of the enginetrying to start. You may hear aclicking sound, a series of clicks, ornothing at all.

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery isdischarged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminal connec-tions (see page ). You canthen try jump starting the vehiclefrom a booster battery (see page

).

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position, but the engine does not run.

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

Check these things:Check the transmission interlock.The transmission must be in Parkor neutral or the starter will notoperate.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position. If theheadlights do not dim, check thecondition of the fuses. If the fusesare OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. See

on page .

517

531

504

517

78

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

The Starter Operates NormallyJump Starting

Emergency Towing

If the Engine Won’t Start

516

０９／０３／１３　１６：３４：５７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５２１　

2010 Pilot

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the warning indicator maynot be working.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

You cannot start your vehicle bypushing or pulling it. Put the transmission in neutral or

Park, and set the parking brake.

Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: heater, A/C, climatecontrol, audio system, lights, etc.

Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

1.

2.

411

525

531

CONTINUED

Starting theEngine

EmergencyTowing

Jump Starting To Jump Start Your Vehicle:

If the Engine Won’t Start, Jump StartingTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

517

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

０９／０３／１３　１６：３５：０８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５２２　

2010 Pilot

－

＋

＋

Start your vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

The numbers in the illustration showyou the order to connect the jumpercables.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourvehicle’s battery. Connect theother end to the positive ( )terminal on the booster battery.

Once the vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,and then from the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

5.

7.

4.

6.

3.

Jump Starting

518

BOOSTER BATTERY

０９／０３／１３　１６：３５：１６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５２３　

2010 Pilot

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

The pointer of your vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange under most conditions.If it climbs to the red mark, youshould determine the reason (hotday, driving up a steep hill, etc.).

If the vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Park, andset the parking brake. Turn off allthe accessories, and turn on thehazard warning lights.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

If the Engine OverheatsTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

519

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to the engine.

０９／０３／１３　１６：３５：２４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５２４　

2010 Pilot

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

If you do not find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

Start the engine, and set thetemperature to maximum heat(climate control to AUTO at‘‘ ’’). Add coolant to theradiator up to the base of the fillerneck. If you do not have theproper coolant mixture available,you can add plain water.Remember to have the coolingsystem drained and refilled withthe proper mixture as soon as youcan.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and checkthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

531

531

EmergencyTowing

EmergencyTowing

If the Engine Overheats

520

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０９／０３／１３　１６：３５：３２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５２５　

2010 Pilot

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

This indicator should never come onwhen the engine is running. If itstarts flashing or stays on, the oilpressure has dropped very low orlost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible, and you shouldtake immediate action.

If the charging system indicatorcomes on brightly when the engineis running, the battery is not beingcharged.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message onthe multi-information display whenthis indicator comes on.

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKCHARGING SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

1.

2.

3.

4.

398

472

531

95On Touring models

On Touring models

Emergency Towing

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System IndicatorTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

521

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

０９／０３／１３　１６：３５：４２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５２６　

2010 Pilot

If this indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeincreased emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator coming oncould be due to a loose or missingfuel fill cap. Tighten the cap until itclicks at least once. Tightening thecap will not turn the indicator offimmediately; it can take several daysof normal driving.

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may turn off as youcontinue driving, have your vehiclechecked by the dealer as soon aspossible.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKEMISSION SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If the battery in your vehicle hasbeen disconnected or gone dead,these codes may be erased. It takesseveral days of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks five times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for an emissionstest until the readiness codes are set.Refer to formore information (see page ).

95

550

On Touring models

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Readiness CodeEmissions Testing

522

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

０９／０３／１３　１６：３５：５０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５２７　

2010 Pilot

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

The brake systemindicator normally

comes on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, and asa reminder to check the parkingbrake. It will stay on if you do notfully release the parking brake.

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. Press lightly on thebrake pedal to see if it feels normal.If it does, check the brake fluid levelthe next time you stop at a servicestation (see page ).

If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed, and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

If the ABS indicator and the VSAsystem indicator come on with thebrake system indicator, have yourvehicle inspected by your dealerimmediately.

You will also see a ‘‘LOW BRAKEFLUID’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKESYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

481

9595

531


EmergencyTowing

Brake System IndicatorTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

523

U.S. Canada

０９／０３／１３　１６：３５：５８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５２８　

2010 Pilot

The vehicle’s fuses are located infour fuse boxes.

The interior fuse box is underneaththe dashboard on the driver’s side.

The rear fuse box is located at theleft side of cargo area.

To open it, push the tabs as shown.

The primary under-hood fuse box islocated on the passenger’s side. Thesecondary fuse box is located next tothe battery.

Fuses

524

UNDER-HOOD (SECONDARY)

UNDER-HOOD (PRIMARY)LID

TAB

TAB

REAR

０９／０３／１３　１６：３６：０７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５２９　

2010 Pilot

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

, , and , or the diagramon the fuse box lid, which fuse orfuses control that device. Checkthose fuses first, but check all thefuses before deciding that a blownfuse is the cause. Replace any blownfuses, and check if the device works.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse boxes bylooking through the top at the wireinside. Removing these fusesrequires a Phillips-headscrewdriver.

3.1.

2.

528 529 530

CONTINUED

Checking and Replacing Fuses

FusesTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

525

BLOWNBLOWN

FUSE

０９／０３／１３　１６：３６：１５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５３０　

2010 Pilot

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate that anything is wrong.Replace the fuse with one of thecorrect rating as soon as you can.

Look for a burned wire inside thefuse. If it is burned out, replace itwith one of the spare fuses of thesame rating or lower.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse boxes and rearfuse box, and all the fuses in theinterior and rear fuse boxes bypulling out each one with the fusepuller provided in the primaryunder-hood fuse box.

5.4.

Fuses

526

BLOWN

FUSE PULLER

０９／０３／１３　１６：３６：２０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５３１　

2010 Pilot

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem with yourvehicle. Leave the blown fuse inthat circuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified technician.

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in thefrequency display. Use the presetbuttons to enter the digit code (seepage ).

6.

313

FusesTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

527

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

０９／０３／１３　１６：３６：２５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５３２　

2010 Pilot

－

－－

－

No. Amps. Amps.No.Circuits Protected Circuits Protected

1

2

3

4

56789

101112

120 A

80 A50 A

50 A40 A

30 A30 A30 A40 A20 A15 A10 A

20 A

20 A

7.5 A20 A20 A15 A15 A

7.5 A15 A10 A10 A

13

14

151617181920212223

Main FuseNot UsedOP MainIG MainNot UsedNot UsedHead Light MainPower Window MainNot UsedCondenser FanCooling FanRear DefrosterBlowerFront Fog LightSubACM

Front Passenger’s PowerSeat RecliningFront Passenger’s PowerSeat SlideOil LevelHead Light Hi MainRadioIG CoilMainMG ClutchDBWInterior LightBack Up

Fuse Locations

528

PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

０９／０３／１３　１６：３６：３１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５３３　

2010 Pilot

Circuits ProtectedAmps.No.No. Amps.

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

Circuits Protected

Small LightStop LampBack LampTurn Lamp, Hazard

20 A7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A

1234

1234

40 A20 A30 A40 A

56789

101112

13141516

171819202122

30 A30 A15 A20 A20 A

20 A20 A15 A

10 A20 A20 A15 A

20 A15 A15 A20 A15 A30 A

Rear BlowerVSA MotorHazardPower Tail Gate CloserDriver’s Power SeatRecliningDriver’s Power Seat SlideStop & HornRear Console AccessorySocketRear WiperTrailer E-BrakeA/C InverterCenter Console AccessorySocketTrailer ChargeFront Accessory SocketRear Accessory SocketGlass Hatch MotorRear Heated SeatHead Light Washer Motor

Power Tail Gate MotorVTM-4Trailer MainVSA FSR

Fuse LocationsTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

529

SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX REAR FUSE BOX

０９／０３／１３　１６：３６：４０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５３４　

2010 Pilot

－

－

－－

－

＊

＊

No. Amps.

Circuits ProtectedNo. Amps.

Circuits ProtectedNo. Amps.Circuits Protected

6789

1011121314151617181920

21

10 A7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A10 A10 A10 A

7.5 A15 A15 A15 A20 A15 A

7.5 A20 A

VTM-4Fuel PumpACGVSAHeated Seat

12345

7.5 A15 A10 A

7.5 A15 A

VBSOL2STRLDNot UsedNot UsedDriver’s Power WindowHAC OPMoonroofDoor LockFront Passenger’s PowerWindowAudio AmpPassenger’s Side RearPower WindowDriver’s Side Rear PowerWindowNot UsedACCHACDay LightWiper

222324252627282930

3132

33

3435363738

7.5 A7.5 A

20 A20 A20 A20 A20 A

30 A20 A

20 A

10 A10 A

7.5 A30 A

Not UsedAuto LightAuto LightODSMeterSRSRight Daytime Running LightLeft Daytime Running LightSmall Lights (Interior)Small Lights (Exterior)Right Head Light LowLeft Head Light LowDaytime Running Light MainSmall Lights MainNot UsedTPMSHead Light Low Main

: On vehicles with rear entertainment system

Fuse Locations

530

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

０９／０３／１３　１６：３６：４９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５３５　

2010 Pilot

The operator will loadyour vehicle on the back of a truck.Any other method of towing willdamage the drive system. When youcontact the towing agency, informthem a flat-bed is required.

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

4WD models only

Emergency Towing

The only way you can safely towyour vehicle is with flat-bedequipment.

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

531

Towing with only two tires on theground will damage parts of the 4WDsystem. It should be transported on af lat-bed truck or trailer.

０９／０３／１３　１６：３６：５３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５３６　

2010 Pilot

If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,mud, or snow, call a towing serviceto pull it out (see the previous page).

For very short distances, such asfreeing the vehicle, you can use thedetachable towing hook that mountson the anchors in the front and rearbumpers.

Remove the cover, put cloth on theedge of the cover to preventscratches and carefully pry with asmall flat-tip screwdriver or ametal fingernail file.

Remove the towing hook andwheel nut wrench placed behind acover under the cargo area.

Screw the towing hook into thehole, and tighten it with the wheelnut wrench.The cover is attached to the

bumper with a tether.

1. 2.

3.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

532

COVER

WHEEL NUTWRENCH

TOWING HOOK

FRONT

０９／０３／１３　１６：３７：０１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５３７　

2010 Pilot

If Your Vehicle Gets StuckTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

533

TRAILER HITCH

REAR

To avoid damage to your vehicle, usethe towing hook f or straight, f latground towing only. Do not tow at anangle. The tow hook should not be usedto tow the vehicle onto a f lat bed. Donot use it as a tie down.

０９／０３／１３　１６：３７：０４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５３８　

2010 Pilot

534

０９／０３／１３　１６：３７：０７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５３９　

2010 Pilot

－

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 536................................Specifications . 538

DOT Tire Quality Grading..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 540

.................................Tire Labeling . 542Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) Required Federal............................Explanation . 544

.......................Emissions Controls . 547..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 549

........................Emissions Testing . 550

Technical InformationTechnicalInform

ation

535

０９／０３／１３　１６：３７：１０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５４０　

2010 Pilot

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers located in various places.

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.

Identif ication Numbers

536

CERTIFICATION LABEL

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

０９／０３／１３　１６：３７：１５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５４１　

2010 Pilot

The engine number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the front.

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

Identif ication NumbersTechnicalInform

ation

537

ENGINE NUMBER

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

０９／０３／１３　１６：３７：１９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５４２　

2010 Pilot

－－

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications

538

Seating Capacities

Air Conditioning

Dimensions Capacities

Weights

1.98 US gal (7.5 )2.48 US gal (9.4 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

5.3 US qt (5.0 )

190.9 in (4,850 mm)78.5 in (1,995 mm)70.9 in (1,802 mm)

21.00 US gal (79.5 )

TotalFrontSecondThird 3

328

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type ND-OIL8

21.2 22.9 oz (600 650 g)HFC-134a (R-134a)

The GCWR must be reduced 2 percent for every 1,000 feet (305meters) of elevation.

See the tire information label atta-ched to the driver’s doorjamb.

8,466 lbs (3,840 kg)

LengthWidthHeight

WheelbaseTrack

67.5 in (1,715 mm)67.7 in (1,720 mm)109.3 in (2,775 mm)

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine0.196 US gal (0.74 )

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengineReserve tank capacity:

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

Fuel tank

EnginecoolantEngine oil

Automatictransmissionfluid

Reardifferentialfluid (4WD)Transferassemblyfluid (4WD)Windshieldwasherreservoir

6.9 US qt (6.5 )

72.7 in (1,846 mm)

9,579 lbs (4,345 kg)

3.6 US qt (3.4 )8.6 US qt (8.1 )3.6 US qt (3.4 )8.6 US qt (8.1 )2.96 US qt (2.80 )3.01 US qt (2.85 )

0.45 US qt (0.43 )0.48 US qt (0.45 )

Gross vehicle weight rating

Gross combined weightrating (GCWR)

Approx.

FrontRear

1 :

2 :

U.S. vehiclesCanadianvehicles

1 : 2 : Except U.S. LX modelsU.S. LX models

2WD models

1 :

2 : 3 : 4WD models

2WD

4WD

ChangeTotalChange

IncludingfilterWithoutfilter

TotalChangeTotalChangeTotalChangeTotal

ChangeTotal

1

1

2

2

3

1

2

０９／０３／１３　１６：３７：３９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５４３　

2010 Pilot

－－

－－

＊

－－－－－

－－－－－－－－－－－－

＊

SpecificationsTechnicalInform

ation

539

Battery

Fuses

Engine

Alignment

Tires

Lights

60 W12 V12 V 55 W

12 V 8 W12 V 5 W

8 W5 W1.4 W3.8 W

12 V12 V12 V12 V

12 V12 V

28/8 W3 CP

12 V 5 W12 V 18 W

55 W12 V

60 W12 V

Capacity 12 V12 V

60 AH/5 HR72 AH/20 HR

12 V 21/5 W12 V 21/5 W

5 W12 V

Interior

Rear

Under-hood

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC i-VTECVCM 6-cylinder (V6) gasoline engine

3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)212 cu-in (3,471 cm )

10.5 : 1SXU22HCR11ILZKR7B11

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.08 in (2.0 mm)

0°30’0°30’

4°12’

Size

Pressure

P245/65R17 105TT165/80D17 104M

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

See page 530 or the fuse labelattached on the side panel.See page 529 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox lid.See page 528 and 529 or the fusebox cover.

Headlights

Daytime running lightsFront side marker lightsFront turn signal/parking lightsFront fog lightsRear turn signal/taillightsStop/taillightsRear side marker lightsBackup lightsLicense plate lightsIndividual map lights

Cargo area lightsHigh mount brake lightsVanity mirror lightsDoor courtesy lights

Front/RearSpareFront/RearSpare

FrontRearFrontRearFront

FrontRear

:

(H11)

(HB3)

(HB3)

DENSO:NGK:

(H11)HighLow

Except LX models

０９／０３／１３　１６：３８：０５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５４４　

2010 Pilot

The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder andmaximum section width. Forexample:

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear Traction

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

540

０９／０３／１３　１６：３８：１４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５４５　

2010 Pilot

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Temperature

TechnicalInform

ation

541

０９／０３／１３　１６：３８：１８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５４６　

2010 Pilot

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. The following is anexample of tire size with anexplanation of what each componentmeans.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Rim diameter in inches.

The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like the following example.TIN is located on the sidewall of thetire.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

P

R

DOT

B97R

245

65

17

105

T

Tire Labeling

Tire Size

Tire Identif ication Number (TIN)

542

TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE

(1)(2)(3)(4)

Tire SizeTire Identification Number (TIN)Maximum Tire PressureMaximum Tire Load

(1)

(1)

(3) (2)(4)

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

P245/65R17 105T

０９／０３／１３　１６：３８：３１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５４７　

2010 Pilot

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－ Tire type code.

Date of manufacture.

WeekYear

Cold Tire Pressure The tire airpressure when the vehicle has beenparked for at least three hours ordriven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Load Rating Means the maximumload that a tire is rated to carry for agiven inflation pressure.

Maximum Inflation Pressure Themaximum tire air pressure that thetire can hold.

Maximum Load Rating Means theload rating for a tire at the maximumpermissible inflation pressure forthat tire.

Recommended Inflation PressureThe cold tire inflation pressurerecommended by the manufacturer.

Treadwear Indicators (TWI)Means the projections within theprincipal grooves designed to give avisual indication of the degrees ofwear of the tread.

FW6X

2202

Tire Labeling

Glossary of Tire Terminology

TechnicalInform

ation

543

０９／０３／１３　１６：３８：４０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５４８　

2010 Pilot

－

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of adifferent size than the size indicatedon the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale

when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

544

０９／０３／１３　１６：３８：４６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５４９　

2010 Pilot

－

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicatorto indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is provided bya separate telltale, which displays thesymbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated,

the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure asintended.


Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal ExplanationTechnicalInform

ation

545

０９／０３／１３　１６：３８：５１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５５０　

2010 Pilot

－

TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicatorto indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combinedwith the low tire pressure telltale.When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as longas the malfunction exists.

On Touring models

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

546

０９／０３／１３　１６：３８：５６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５５１　

2010 Pilot

＊

＊

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.Scheduled maintenance is on page

.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positive

crankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to theintake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

469

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Emissions ControlsTechnicalInform

ation

547

０９／０３／１３　１６：３９：０４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５５２　

2010 Pilot

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, exhaust gasrecirculation, and three way catalyticconverter. These four systems worktogether to control the engine’scombustion and minimize theamount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcome out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: air intake,engine control, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM)uses various sensors to determinehow much air is going into theengine. It then controls how muchfuel to inject under all operatingconditions.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)system takes some of the exhaustgas and routes it back into the intakemanifold. Adding exhaust gas to theair/fuel mixture reduces the amountof NOx produced when the fuel isburned.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newHonda replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Emissions Controls

548

０９／０３／１３　１６：３９：１３　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５５３　

2010 Pilot

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine well maintained.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

Three Way Catalytic ConverterTechnicalInform

ation

549

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

WARM UP THREE WAY CATALYTICCONVERTERS

０９／０３／１３　１６：３９：２１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５５４　

2010 Pilot

If you take your vehicle for anemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park. Increasethe engine speed to 2,000 rpm, andhold it there until the temperaturegauge rises to at least 1/4 of thescale (about 3 minutes).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F (4° and 35°C).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, let the engine idle for 20seconds.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Testing of Readiness Codes

Emissions Testing

550

０９／０３／１３　１６：３９：２９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５５５　

2010 Pilot

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 30minutes.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD. Do not use the cruise control.When traffic allows, drive for 90seconds without moving theaccelerator pedal. (Vehicle speedmay vary slightly; this is okay.) Ifyou cannot do this for acontinuous 90 seconds because oftraffic conditions, drive for at least30 seconds, then repeat it twomore times (for a total of 90seconds).

7. 8. 9.

Emissions TestingTechnicalInform

ation

551

０９／０３／１３　１６：３９：３４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５５６　

2010 Pilot

552

０９／０３／１３　１６：３９：３６　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５５７　

2010 Pilot

....Customer Service Information . 554....................Warranty Coverages . 555

Reporting Safety Defects..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 556

.....................Authorized Manuals . 557

Warranty and Customer RelationsW

arrantyand

Custom

erR

elations

553

０９／０３／１３　１６：３９：３９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５５８　

2010 Pilot

U.S. Owners:

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Canadian Owners:Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact HondaCustomer Service.

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )

Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicle

Date of purchase

Odometer reading of your vehicle

Your name, address, and tele-phone number

A detailed description of theproblem

Name of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

536

Customer Service Information

554

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Automobile Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7A1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Honda Canada Inc.

Visit www.honda.ca for contactinformation

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Vortex Motor Corp.Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

Customer Relations

０９／０３／１３　１６：３９：４７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５５９　

2010 Pilot

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

this warranty gives upto 100% credit toward a replacementbattery.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered by a limited warranty.Please read your warranty bookletfor details.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Honda accessories are coveredunder this warranty. Time andmileage limits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty booklet fordetails.

covers all Hondareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2010 Honda warranty informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2010 warrantymanual that came with your vehicle.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

555

０９／０３／１３　１６：３９：５７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５６０　

2010 Pilot

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA), in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 NewJersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC20590.You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from .

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

556

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.saf ercar.gov

０９／０３／１３　１６：４０：０１　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５６１　

2010 Pilot

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order by phone or online:

Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

Covers maintenance and recommended procedures forrepair to engine and chassis components. It is writtenfor the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enoughfor most mechanically inclined owners to understand.

Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depthtroubleshooting information for each electrical circuitin your vehicle.

Describes the procedures involved in the replacementof damaged body parts.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S.only)

Authorized

Manuals

557

Publication

Form Number

61SZA01

61SZA01EL

61SZA30

31SZA610

31SZA810

31SZAM10

31SZAQ10

HON

Form Description

2010 Honda Pilot Service Manual

2010 Honda Pilot

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2010 Honda Pilot Body Repair Manual

2010 Honda Pilot Owner’s Manual

2010 Honda Pilot

Navigation System Owner’s Manual

2010 Honda Pilot Honda Service History

2010 Honda Pilot Technology Reference Guide

Order Form for Previous Years

Indicate Year and Model Desired

www. helminc. com

０９／０３／１３　１６：４０：１０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５６２　

2010 Pilot

558

０９／０３／１３　１６：４０：１２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５６３　

2010 Pilot

CONTINUED

................................................AAC . 300...Accessories and Modifications . 402

ACCESSORY (Ignition Key.....................................Position) . 137

............Accessory Power Sockets . 186...........................AC Power Outlet . 187

................Active Head Restraints . 158....................Additives, Engine Oil . 473

...........................Advanced Airbags . 31.............................Airbag (SRS) . 11, 26

..........Airbag System Components . 26......Air Conditioning System . 192, 199

.............Rear A/C Control . 197, 204.......................Air Outlets (Vents) . 206.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 496

......................................Antifreeze . 475Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

....................Indicator Light . 72, 430...................................Operation . 429

..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 313Anti-theft Steering Column

............................................Lock . 137........Audio System . 208, 210, 226, 252

Auto Control Mode, Starting........................................Engine . 411

............................Auto Door Lock . 116...Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 139

.........................Auto Door Unlock . 117..........Automatic Climate Control . 199

.......................Automatic Lighting . 127...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 24

.............Automatic Speed Control . 350..............Automatic Transmission . 413

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 538...............Checking Fluid Level . 478

.......................................Shifting . 413Shift Lever Position

...............................Indicators . 413................Shift Lever Positions . 414

....................Shift Lock Release . 416......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 310

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 70, 521............................Jump Starting . 517

..............................Maintenance . 504

............................Specifications . 539..............................Before Driving . 393

....................................Belts, Seat . 9, 22.........................Beverage Holders . 181

........HandsFreeLink . 361..................................Booster Seats . 58

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 429

.............Break-in, New Linings . 394............Bulb Replacement . 486, 488

...........................................Fluid . 481.......................................Parking . 169

.................System Indicator . 71, 523........................Wear Indicators . 429

.............................Braking System . 428.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 394

Brightness Control,...............................Instruments . 131

Bluetooth

Index

A

B

IND

EX

I

０９／０３／２３　１４：２６：５４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５６４　

2010 Pilot

...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 486

..............................Brake Lights . 486.................................Fog Lights . 485

................Front Parking Lights . 484........Front Side Marker Lights . 484

.................................Headlights . 483

.................................Rear Bulbs . 486............................Specifications . 539

....................Turn Signal Lights . 484..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 483

................................Cancel Button . 352............................Capacities Chart . 538

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 61..........................Cargo Area Light . 178

...................................Cargo Hook . 408....................Cargo, How to Carry . 404

.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii........................Certification Label . 536

.................................Chains, Tires . 503....................Changing a Flat Tire . 509

Changing Oil........................................How to . 473

......................................When to . 455...Charging System Indicator . 70, 521

............Checklist, Before Driving . 410................Childproof Door Locks . 144

.....................................Child Safety . 39..............................Booster Seats . 58

.............................Child Seats . 44, 47.....Important Safety Reminders . 39

..........................................Infants . 44..........................Larger Children . 57

.........................................LATCH . 49......................Risks with Airbags . 40

.............................Small Children . 45..........................................Tether . 54

...........................Warning Labels . 62.........Where Should a Child Sit? . 40

.......................................Child Seats . 47........LATCH Anchorage Points . 49

....Tether Anchorage Points . 55, 56.......................Cleaning Seat Belts . 490

...............Climate Control System . 199..............................................Clock . 314

....................................Coat Hooks . 185.....................Code, Audio System . 313

........................CO in the Exhaust . 547......................Compact Spare Tire . 508

.........................................Compass . 353.................Console Compartment . 180.................Consumer Information . 554

.............Controls, Instruments and . 65....................Conversation Mirror . 184

Coolant........................................Adding . 475

....................................Checking . 398.........................Proper Solution . 475

...................Temperature Gauge . 82Crankcase Emissions Control

........................................System . 547................Cruise Control Indicator . 78............Cruise Control Operation . 350

...................................Cup Holders . 181.............Customer Service Office . 554

.........................Customize Settings . 97................Door/Window Setup . 115

...........................Lighting Setup . 110...............................Meter Setup . 103

...........................Position Setup . 108......................Setting to Default . 100

Index

D

C

II

０９／０５／２５　０９：５７：２０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５６５　

2010 Pilot

CONTINUED

..............................Economy, Fuel . 399Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

........................................System . 431..................................Emergencies . 507

.............Battery, Jump Starting . 517...........Brake System Indicator . 523

................Changing a Flat Tire . 509.....Charging System Indicator . 521

..................Checking the Fuses . 525...........Driving with a Flat Tire . 508

.......Hazard Warning Flashers . 130............................Jump Starting . 517

.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 521...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 522

..................Overheated Engine . 519

.......................................Towing . 531.........................Emergency Brake . 169

....................Emergency Flashers . 130......................Emergency Towing . 531.......................Emissions Controls . 547........................Emissions Testing . 550

Engine..............Check Starter System . 412

....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 82.........................If it Won’t Start . 516

Malfunction Indicator................................Lamp . 70, 522.......................................Oil Life . 455

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 70, 521

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 472...............................Overheating . 519

............................Specifications . 539

............................Speed Limiter . 416.......................................Starting . 411

.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 547...............................Exhaust Fumes . 61

Exhaust Gas Recirculation........................................System . 548

...................................Dashboard . 3, 66..............Daytime Running Lights . 128

.................................Dead Battery . 517............Defects, Reporting Safety . 556

..............Defogger, Rear Window . 130

......Defrosting the Windows . 194, 203..........................Differential Fluid . 538

....................................Dimensions . 538.............Dimming the Headlights . 126

Dipstick..........Automatic Transmission . 478

..................................Engine Oil . 398..........................Directional Signals . 73

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 429.......................................Disc Care . 285

........................Disc Changer . 242, 274Disc Changer Error

...........................Messages . 251, 284....................Disc Player . 218, 242, 274

.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 474Doors

.................................Indicator . 13, 95............Locking and Unlocking . 138

..................Lockout Prevention . 144....................Power Door Locks . 138

..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 540

...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5...........................................Driving . 409

....................................Economy . 399Driving Position Memory

........................................System . 173..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 490

......DVD Player Error Messages . 345...................................DVD Player . 320

Index

E

IND

EX

III

０９／０３／１３　１６：４０：２７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５６６　

2010 Pilot

Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat........................................Belts by . 20

..........................Fan, Interior . 193, 202Features, Comfort and

..............................Convenience . 191....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 395

Filters.........................Dust and Pollen . 490

...............................................Oil . 473...........Flashers, Hazard Warning . 130

...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 509.....................................Floor Mats . 491

Fluids..........Automatic Transmission . 478

..........................................Brake . 481..........................Power Steering . 482

.......................Rear Differential . 480...................Transfer Assembly . 480..................Windshield Washer . 477

FM Stereo Radio...................................Reception . 308

.....................................Fog Lights . 128..............Folding the Second Seat . 160

.................Folding the Third Seat . 161........................Four-way Flashers . 130

............................Front Airbags . 11, 29......................................Front Seat . 154....................................Adjusting . 154

...................................Airbags . 11, 29

.......................................Heaters . 164.................................................Fuel . 394

......................Fill Door and Cap . 395...........................................Gauge . 82

................Octane Requirement . 394...............................Oxygenated . 394

........................Reserve Indicator . 80........................Tank, Filling the . 395......................Tighten Fuel Cap . 396

...............................Fuel Economy . 399.....................Fuses, Checking the . 525

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 483...........................HandsFreeLink . 361

..............................HFL Buttons . 361............Hazard Warning Flashers . 130

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 400.........................................Gasoline . 394...........................................Gauge . 82

.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 80................Octane Requirement . 394

........................Tank, Refueling . 395

................Gas Station Procedures . 395Gauges

...Engine Coolant Temperature . 82...............................................Fuel . 82

...............................Speedometer . 82.................................Tachometer . 82

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight.......................................Rating) . 435

GCWR (Gross Combined Weight.......................................Rating) . 436

............Gearshift Lever Positions . 413...................................Glass Hatch . 148

......................................Glove Box . 183GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

.......................................Rating) . 435

Index

G

H

F

IV

０９／０３／１３　１６：４０：３２　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５６７　

2010 Pilot

CONTINUED

.....................................Headlights . 126........................................Aiming . 483

..................Automatic Lighting . 127.........Daytime Running Lights . 128

..................High Beam Indicator . 78.........High Beams, Turning on . 126

....................Lights On Indicator . 78..........Low Beams, Turning on . 126

.......................Reminder Chime . 126........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 483

.................................Turning on . 126...................................Headphones . 346

............................Head Restraints . 157...............................Heated Mirror . 172...............................Heaters, Seats . 164

.............Heating and Cooling . 192, 199...............High-Low Beam Switch . 126

HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 357

.......................Hood, Opening the . 397...........................................Horn . 4, 123

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 536

Ignition............................................Keys . 134

.........................................Switch . 137............Timing Control System . 548

......................Immobilizer System . 135.........Important Safety Precautions . 6

...Indicators, Instrument Panel . 67, 68...............ABS (Anti-lock Brake) . 72

....................................A/T Temp . 76Brake (Parking and Brake

............................System) . 71, 523................Charging System . 70, 521

.............................Cruise Control . 78.................................Cruise Main . 78

DRL (Daytime Running......................................Lights) . 79

...................................Fog Lights . 78

...................................High Beam . 78........Key (Immobilizer System) . 78

.....................................Lights On . 78......................................Low Fuel . 80

................Low Oil Pressure . 70, 521......................Low Tire Pressure . 74

...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 522..........................Security System . 81...........................Side Airbag Off . 72

.......................................Seat Belt . 69...............................................SRS . 72

...................System Message . 77, 94...............Tire Pressure Monitor . 75

Turn Signal and Hazard...................................Warning . 73

............................VSA Activation . 73.................................VSA System . 73

..................Individual Map Lights . 177...............................Infant Restraint . 44

......................................Infant Seats . 44...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 496

..................................INFO Buttons . 87.................................Inside Mirror . 170

.............................Inspection, Tire . 498......................Instrument Panel . 67, 68

......Instrument Panel Brightness . 131..............Instruments and Controls . 65

....................Integrated Sunshade . 183.................................Interface Dial . 252...............................Interior Lights . 176

........................................Introduction . i...............................................iPod . 288

IndexIN

DE

X

I

V

０９／０３／１３　１６：４０：３７　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５６８　

2010 Pilot

................................................Keys . 134...........Keyless Memory Settings . 153

.......................Label, Certification . 536...............Lane Change, Signaling . 126

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 17, 23....................Light Control Switch . 176

Lights....................Bulb Replacement . 483

.................................Indicator . 67, 68.......................................Interior . 176.......................................Parking . 126

................................Turn Signal . 126.............................Load Limit . 405, 434

....LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 137

Locks.....Anti-theft Steering Column . 137

............................Fuel Fill Door . 395..................................Glove Box . 183

..................Lockout Prevention . 144...............................Power Door . 138

..............................Tailgate . 144, 145........................Low Coolant Level . 398.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 80

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 70, 521...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 538

............Luggage, Storing (cargo) . 404

..................................Maintenance . 453........................................Minder . 455

Owner’s Maintenance...................................Checks . 467

..........................................Safety . 454....................................Schedule . 469

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 522...........Memory, Driving Position . 173

.............................Message Display . 95..........................Message Indicator . 77

...............................Meters, Gauges . 82

........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 171.................................Modifications . 403

...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 403.......................................Moonroof . 168

........................MP3 . 219, 243, 280, 300.............Multi-Information Display . 87

...................Neutral Gear Position . 414..................New Vehicle Break-in . 394

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i...............Numbers, Identification . 536

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 394...................................Odometer . 83, 89

.........................Odometer, Trip . 83, 89....................Off-Highway Driving . 449...................Off-Road Precautions . 449

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 511.......................................Jack, Tire . 509

................................Jump Starting . 517

Index

O

J

K

L

M

N

VI

０９／０３／１３　１６：４０：４４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５６９　

2010 Pilot

CONTINUED

............Panel Brightness Control . 131........................Park Gear Position . 414

...........................................Parking . 419...............................Parking Brake . 169

Parking Brake and Brake.................System Indicator . 71, 523

...............................Parking Lights . 126..Parking Over Things that Burn . 419....Passenger Airbag Off Indicator . 36

.............................PGM-FI System . 548...................................Pollen Filter . 490

........................Power Door Locks . 138..............Power Seat Adjustments . 154...............Power Socket Locations . 179

............................Power Windows . 165.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 20.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13

...Additional Safety Precautions . 21.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 20

........................Protecting Children . 39.....................General Guidelines . 39

.......................Protecting Infants . 44.......Protecting Larger Children . 57

.........Protecting Small Children . 45Using Child Seats with

.....................................Tethers . 54.............................Using LATCH . 49

...................Radiator Overheating . 519Radio/Disc Sound

.......................System . 210, 227, 253.................Radio Theft Protection . 313

................................RDS . 213, 230, 257

...........................Readiness Codes . 550.......................Rear A/C Unit . 197, 204

............Rear Audio Control Panel . 321........Rear Entertainment System . 317

..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 486...Rearview Camera and Monitor . 390

...........................Rearview Mirror . 170.......Rear Window Defogger . 194, 203

Rear Window Wiper and.......................................Washer . 125

.....Reclining the Seat Backs . 154, 155.........Reclining the Second Seats . 159

.......................Reminder Indicators . 69................Remote Audio Controls . 311.................Remote Control (RES) . 322

.....................Remote Transmitter . 150Replacement Information

................Engine Oil and Filter . 473..........................................Fuses . 525

................................Light Bulbs . 483....................................Schedule . 469

................................Timing Belt . 482...........................................Tires . 499

.............................Wiper Blades . 492

Oil........................Change, How to . 473......................Change, When to . 455......................Checking Engine . 398

...............................Life, Engine . 455..............Pressure Indicator . 70, 521

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 472

.........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 137............................Outside Mirrors . 171

...............Outside Temperature . 85, 90....................Overheating, Engine . 519

....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 467.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 394

IndexIN

DE

X

P

R

VII

０９／０３／１３　１６：４０：５０　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５７０　

2010 Pilot

＊

＊

＊

Replacing Seat Belt After a............................................Crash . 25

..........Reporting Safety Defects . 556...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 398

...............................Restraint, Child . 39..................Reverse Gear Position . 414

.................................Rotation Tire . 499

..................................Safety Belts . 9, 22.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 556

.................................Safety Features . 8.........................................Airbags . 11

..................................Door Locks . 13..........................Head Restraints . 16

.................................Seat Belts . 9, 17...............Seats & Seat-Backs . 15, 16

.............Safety Labels, Location of . 62..............................Safety Messages . iii

.............Satellite Radio, XM . 236, 266.....................................Seat Belts . 9, 17

...............Additional Information . 22Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 24.....................................Cleaning . 490

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 23................................Maintenance . 25

Reminder Light and................................Beeper . 22, 69

...................System Components . 22...............Use During Pregnancy . 20

...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 17...............................................Seats . 154

.......Adjusting the Second Seat . 159..........Folding the Second Seat . 160

.............Folding the Third Seat . 161........................Head Restraints . 157

.......................................Heaters . 164......................Position Memory . 173....................Third Row Access . 161

............................Security System . 349Sensors

....Driver’s Seat Position Sensor . 31Front Passenger’s Weight

.....................................Sensors . 31......................Impact Sensors . 27, 28

...............................Serial Number . 536...........................Service Intervals . 455...........................Service Manual . 557

..............................Service Minder . 455.........Service Station Procedures . 395

..........................Setting the Clock . 314Shifting the Automatic

.............................Transmission . 413.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 413

........................Shift Lock Release . 416....................................Side Airbags . 32

................................Off Indicator . 35......................Side Curtain Airbags . 34

Side Marker Lights, Bulb.................Replacement in . 484, 485

...............................Signaling Turns . 73.....................................Snow Tires . 502

........................Sound System . 208, 252Spare Tire

..............................Inflating . 497, 508............................Specifications . 539

....................Specifications Charts . 538................................Speed Control . 350................................Speed Limiter . 416...................................Speedometer . 82

Index

S

VIII

０９／０３／１３　１６：４０：５４　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５７１　

2010 Pilot

CONTINUED

..........SRS, Additional Information . 26...Additional Safety Precautions . 37

.............................Airbag Service . 37......Airbag System Components . 26

..How the SRS Indicator Works . 35How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 29...How Your Side Airbags Work . 32

How Your Side Curtain Airbags.........................................Work . 34

.............................SRS Indicator . 35, 72..START (Ignition Key Position) . 137

.......................Starting the Engine . 411...................Auto Control Mode . 411

In Cold Weather at High..................................Altitude . 412

................With a Dead Battery . 517........Steam Coming from Engine . 519

Steering Wheel................................Adjustment . 133

...........Anti-theft Column Lock . 137......................Buttons . 311, 350, 361

Stereo Sound...............System . 208, 209, 226, 252

..................Storage Compartment . 182....................Storing Your Vehicle . 506

........................Sunglasses Holder . 183........................................Sun Visor . 184

Supplemental Restraint System......................................Servicing . 37

.........................SRS Indicator . 35, 72...................System Components . 26

..................................Synthetic Oil . 473

.....................................Tachometer . 82..........................................Tailgate . 144

...............................Glass Hatch . 148......................Open Indicator . 13, 95

...............................Opening the . 144.........................................Power . 145

......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 486.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 507

Technical Descriptions......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 540.....Emissions Control Systems . 547

Three Way Catalytic...............................Converter . 549

.......................Temperature Gauge . 82........Temperature, Inside Sensor . 207

....................Temperature, Outside . 90

...................Tensioners, Seat Belts . 24..............Tether Anchorage Points . 55

................Theft Protection, Radio . 313..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 549.Tilt/Telescopic Steering Wheel . 133

....................................Timing Belt . 482

....................................Tire Chains . 503.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 509

.................................Tire Labeling . 542Tire Pressure Monitoring

............System (TPMS) . 420, 544Low Tire Pressure

...........................Indicator . 74, 423.......Tire Pressure Monitor . 91, 424

IndexIN

DE

X

T

IX

０９／０３／１３　１６：４０：５９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５７２　

2010 Pilot

＊

...............................................Tires . 496..............................Air Pressure . 496

.........................Checking Wear . 498..........................Compact Spare . 508

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 540......................................Inflation . 496

..................................Inspection . 498..............................Maintenance . 499

...................................Replacing . 499......................................Rotating . 499

...........................................Snow . 502............................Specifications . 539

................................Tire Chains . 503...................Tools, Tire Changing . 509

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 434

................Emergency Wrecker . 531....Equipment and Accessories . 441

.............................Weight Limit . 434.........................Trailer Loading . 434

.................Trailer Towing Tips . 446Transmission

...............Checking Fluid Level . 478...........................Fluid Selection . 479

..............Identification Number . 536.............Shifting the Automatic . 413

.....................................Treadwear . 498................................Trip Computer . 92

.................................Trip Meter . 83, 89....................................Turn Signals . 73

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 507

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 540........................Unleaded Gasoline . 394..............USB Adapter Cable . 290, 301

.........USB Flash Memory Device . 298.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 474

............WARNING, Explanation of . iii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 62

..................Warranty Coverages . 555Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 477............................Level Indicator . 96

...................................Operation . 124Wheels

.............Adjusting the Steering . 133............Alignment and Balance . 499..........Aluminum Alloy Wheels . 503

.....................................Cleaning . 503..........................Compact Spare . 508

..............................Wrench, Nut . 510

................................Vanity Mirror . 185.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 405

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 538....Vehicle Identification Number . 536

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA )....................................System . 431

VSA Activation....................Indicator . 73, 95, 431

.........................VSA Off Switch . 432

..VSA System Indicator . 73, 95, 431.............................Vehicle Storage . 506

.....................................Ventilation . 195.................................................VIN . 536

..................................Viscosity, Oil . 472...........Voice Control System . 200, 252

..................................VTM-4 Lock . 418

Index

U

V

W

X

０９／０３／１３　１６：４１：０５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５７３　

2010 Pilot

＊

Windows.............................Auto Reverse . 166

................Operating the Power . 165.........................Rear, Defogger . 130

Windshield.....................................Cleaning . 124...........................Defroster . 194, 203

.....................................Washers . 124Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 492...................................Operation . 124

Rear Windshield Wiper and...................................Washer . 125

......................WMA . 219, 243, 280, 300....................................Worn Tires . 498

.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 531

.............................XM Radio . 236, 266

: U.S. only

Index

X

XI

０９／０３／１３　１６：４１：０９　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５７４　

2010 Pilot

4WD models only

4WD models only


Gasoline: Brake Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Rear Differential Fluid:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Transfer Assembly Fluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Front/Rear:32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

Compact Spare Tire:60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 87 or higher. Honda VTM-4 Differential Fluid

(see page ).

Honda Genuine ATF-Z1(automatic transmission fluid)(see page ).

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

21.00 US gal (79.5 )

SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosityhypoid gear oil, API serviceclassified GL4 or GL5 only.

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Premium fuel is recommendedwhen towing in certain conditions(see page ).

472

480

479

482

481

446

０９／０５／２５　０９：５７：３５　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０５７７　

2010 Pilot

This owner’s manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

This owner’s manual covers all models ofthe Pilot. You may find descriptions ofequipment and features that are not on yourparticular model.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce33SZAC10

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

０９／０３／１３　１５：２６：０８　３１ＳＺＡ６１０　０００１　

2010 Pilot

2010 honda pilot owner's manual

Documents